SC-T7200 T5200 T3200 T7200D T5200D Series Rev.E

SERVICE MANUAL
Large Format Color Inkjet Printer
SC-T7200 series
SC-T5200 series
SC-T3200 series
SC-T7200D series
SC-T5200D series
SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SECP13-006
Notice:
 All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
 All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly
appreciate being informed of them.
 The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
 The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. EPSON
disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright © 2022 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

Service Support Planning dept.

PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1) Personal injury and 2) Damage to equipment.
DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing
procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR
REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL
ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER
SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
4. WHEN DISASSEMBLING OR ASSEMBLING A PRODUCT, MAKE SURE TO WEAR GLOVES TO AVOID INJURY FROM METAL PARTS WITH
SHARP EDGES.
WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING
PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO
THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC
WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECOND-
SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.
6. WHEN AIR DUSTER IS USED ON THE REPAIR AND THE MAINTENANCE WORK, THE USE OF THE AIR DUSTER PRODUCTS CONTAINING
THE INFLAMMABLE GAS IS PROHIBITED.
7. MAKE SURE AN ANTIVIRUS SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON THE COMPUTER USED FOR SERVICE SUPPORT. BE SURE TO HAVE THE
LATEST VIRUS DEFINITION FILE FOR THE SOFTWARE.

About This Manual
About This Manual: This manual is made for the sole purpose of providing necessary information in order that a serviceperson qualified by Epson performs his / her appropriate
repair / maintenance for the applicable Epson’s products. You shall not use this manual out of this purpose.
This manual is Epson’s confidential information. When you use this manual, you shall hold it in strict confidence and shall not disclose to any third party without prior consent of
Epson.
The instructions and procedures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the
preceding page.
Manual Configuration
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix.
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product.
CHAPTER 2.TROUBLESHOOTING
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 3.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling the product.
CHAPTER 4.ADJUSTMENT
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.
CHAPTER 5.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epson-approved lubricants and
adhesives required for servicing the product.
CHAPTER 6.APPENDIX
Provides the following additional information for reference:
• Connectors
• Panel Menu Maps
• ASP List
• Exploded Diagrams

Symbols Used in this Manual
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a procedure or an action.
Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of, equipment.
May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also provide additional
information that is related to a specific subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
Indicates that a particular task must be carried out according to a certain standard after disassembly and before re-assembly, otherwise the quality of the components
in question may be adversely affected.
Indicates that lubrication is needed for the parts after disassembly, when doing a maintenance or replacing a part with a new one.
Lubrication

Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue Description
A May 30, 2014 First release
Chapter 3
• 3.1.1 Precautions (p.96): partially added.
• 3.2 Parts Diagram (p.100): “Sheet Assy” was added.
• 3.3 Disassembly Flowchart (p.109): “Sheet Assy” was added.
• 3.4.4.2 DAMPER KIT (p.155): partially revised.
• 3.4.4.3 PRINT HEAD (p.161): procedure was revised.
B March 25, 2015
• 3.4.4.4 HEAD FFC (p.163): procedure was added, “REASSEMBLY” was added.
• 3.4.4.6 SHEET ASSY (p.174): newly added.
Chapter 4
• 4.1.4 List of Tools/Software/Consumables for Adjustments (p.311): “CAUTION” was added.
Chapter 5
• 5.4 Exchange Parts (p.382): partially revised.
Chapter 2
• 2.3 Remedies for Service Call Error (p.63): Service Call Error 4000 was added.
Chapter 3
• Information about the printers modified to extend their lives was added.
• 3.1.1 Precautions (p.96): Added cautions for batteries in Germany.
C September 21, 2018 • 3.4.5.23 PLATEN BASE ASP (p.245) was added.
Chapter 4
• Flag for extending life was added.
Chapter 5
• 5.4 Exchange Parts (p.382): The life value of the pump cap unit was changed.
• 5.5.4 How to replace Porous Pads and Cleaning for Borderless Printing (p.387) was added.
Chapter 3
• 3.4.5.12 PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT (p.231): Caution point was added.
D September 31, 2021
Chapter 4
• 4.1.5 Service Program Basic Operations (p.313): Supported OS were revised.
Chapter 2
E February 14, 2022
• 2.2 Remedies for Maintenance Requests (p.61): partially revised.

SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series Revision E
Contents
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1.3.2 If necessary to escalate the trouble case ............................................. 60
2.2 Remedies for Maintenance Requests ................................................................. 61
1.1 Product Description ............................................................................................ 12
2.3 Remedies for Service Call Error ........................................................................ 63
1.2 Basic Specifications ............................................................................................ 13
1.2.1 Basic Specifications ................................................................................... 13 2.4 Remedies for Print Quality Troubles .................................................................. 88
1.2.2 Electric Specifications ............................................................................... 14 2.5 Trouble on Paper Feeding .................................................................................. 91
1.2.3 Ink Specifications ...................................................................................... 14 2.6 Other Troubles .................................................................................................... 92
1.3 Printing Specifications ........................................................................................ 15 2.7 Trouble on Service Program ............................................................................... 93
1.3.1 Paper Feed Specifications .......................................................................... 15
2.8 Trouble on NVRAM Viewer .............................................................................. 94
1.3.2 Supported Media ........................................................................................ 16
1.3.2.1 Epson Special Media Table ................................................................ 16 Chapter 3 DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
1.3.2.2 Usable Commercially Available Paper Size ...................................... 19
1.3.3 Printable area ............................................................................................. 21 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 96
1.3.4 Borderless Printing Specification .............................................................. 22 3.1.1 Precautions ................................................................................................. 96
1.3.5 Stacker ....................................................................................................... 22 3.1.2 Cautions after assembling .......................................................................... 98
1.4 Hardware Specifications ..................................................................................... 24 3.1.3 Orientation Definition ................................................................................ 98
1.4.1 Dimensions and Weight ............................................................................. 24 3.1.4 Recommended Tools ................................................................................. 99
1.4.2 Installation Room Requirement ................................................................. 24 3.2 Parts Diagram ................................................................................................... 100
1.4.3 Part Names ................................................................................................. 26 3.3 Disassembly Flowchart .................................................................................... 109
1.5 Control Panel Specifications .............................................................................. 29 3.4 Disassembly and Assembly Procedure ............................................................. 115
1.5.1 Control panel and LCD .............................................................................. 29 3.4.1 Preparation for servicing ......................................................................... 115
1.5.2 Menu Descriptions ..................................................................................... 32 3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit ..................................................................... 115
1.5.3 Serviceman Mode ...................................................................................... 54 3.4.2 Housing .................................................................................................... 117
3.4.2.1 TOP COVER .................................................................................... 117
Chapter 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING 3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER .............................................................................. 118
2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 59 3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE ................................................................. 119
2.1.1 Preliminary Check ..................................................................................... 59 3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B ............................................................. 120
2.1.1.1 Before performing troubleshooting .................................................... 59 3.4.2.5 IH COVER ....................................................................................... 121
2.1.1.2 Check for the usage environment ....................................................... 59 3.4.2.6 WASTE INK TANK COVER ......................................................... 124
2.1.1.3 Recurrence check of the trouble ......................................................... 59 3.4.2.7 PRINTER COVER ........................................................................... 125
2.1.1.4 Check for the counter values/history .................................................. 59 3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R COVER ......................................................... 126
2.1.1.5 Test print check .................................................................................. 59 3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER ...................... 127
2.1.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................................ 60 3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER .............................................................. 129
2.1.3 Procedure after troubleshooting ................................................................. 60 3.4.2.11 RIGHT BASE COVER .................................................................. 130
2.1.3.1 If the trouble has been successfully solved ........................................ 60 3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER ................................................................. 131
7
3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER .................................................. 132 3.4.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER ...................................................................... 221
3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER .................................................................. 133 3.4.5.6 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR ...................................................... 222
3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER .......................... 134 3.4.5.7 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR ..................................................... 224
3.4.2.16 LEFT BASE COVER ..................................................................... 135 3.4.5.8 ATC MOTOR .................................................................................. 226
3.4.2.17 FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER ................................................... 136 3.4.5.9 PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER) ......................................................... 227
3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER COVER ..................................................... 137 3.4.5.10 PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER) ...................................................... 228
3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER FRAME ..................................................... 138 3.4.5.11 PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR .................................................... 230
3.4.2.20 CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR .................................................. 139 3.4.5.12 PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT ................................................ 231
3.4.2.21 R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR ................................................ 140 3.4.5.13 REAR COVER ............................................................................... 234
3.4.2.22 L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR ................................................ 141 3.4.5.14 REAR COVER SENSOR .............................................................. 235
3.4.2.23 INTERLOCK SWITCH ................................................................. 142 3.4.5.15 1st PPK ROLLER ASSY ............................................................... 236
3.4.3 Electric Circuit Components .................................................................... 144 3.4.5.16 1st PAPER GUIDE ........................................................................ 237
3.4.3.1 MAIN BOARD ................................................................................ 144 3.4.5.17 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR ........................................................... 238
3.4.3.2 SUB BOARD ................................................................................... 147 3.4.5.18 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR ......................................................... 240
3.4.3.3 SUB-B BOARD ............................................................................... 149 3.4.5.19 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B ................................................ 241
3.4.3.4 PSH BOARD .................................................................................... 150 3.4.5.20 REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE ................................................... 242
3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD .............................................................................. 152 3.4.5.21 UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE .......................................................... 243
3.4.4 Carriage Mechanism / Ink System Mechanism ....................................... 154 3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE ........................................................ 244
3.4.4.1 CR COVER ...................................................................................... 154 3.4.5.23 PLATEN BASE ASP ..................................................................... 245
3.4.4.2 DAMPER KIT .................................................................................. 155 3.4.6 Cutter Mechanism .................................................................................... 247
3.4.4.3 PRINT HEAD .................................................................................. 161 3.4.6.1 CUTTER UNIT ................................................................................ 247
3.4.4.4 HEAD FFC ....................................................................................... 163 3.4.7 Fans .......................................................................................................... 250
3.4.4.5 CR FFC ............................................................................................. 173 3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN ......................................................................... 250
3.4.4.6 SHEET ASSY .................................................................................. 174 3.4.7.2 PW FAN ........................................................................................... 251
3.4.4.7 CR SCALE ....................................................................................... 182 3.4.7.3 HDD FAN ........................................................................................ 252
3.4.4.8 CR ENCODER ................................................................................. 187 3.4.7.4 SUCTION FAN ................................................................................ 253
3.4.4.9 CR TIMMING BELT ....................................................................... 188 3.4.8 Auto Take-up Reel ................................................................................... 254
3.4.4.10 CR MOTOR ................................................................................... 190 3.4.8.1 TAKE-UP REEL COVER ............................................................... 254
3.4.4.11 CR HP SENSOR ............................................................................ 192 3.4.8.2 TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR ............................................................. 255
3.4.4.12 APG UNIT ..................................................................................... 193 3.4.8.3 TAKE-UP REEL LED ..................................................................... 256
3.4.4.13 PG SENSOR ................................................................................... 195 3.4.8.4 TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH ............................................................. 257
3.4.4.14 PUMP CAP UNIT .......................................................................... 196 3.4.8.5 TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD ......................................................... 259
3.4.4.15 IC HOLDER ................................................................................... 199 3.4.8.6 TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR .............................................................. 261
3.4.4.16 INK TUBE ..................................................................................... 203 3.4.8.7 TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD ................................................... 263
3.4.4.17 CR UNIT ........................................................................................ 207 3.4.9 2nd Roll Unit (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only) ............................. 266
3.4.4.18 IM SENSOR ................................................................................... 210 3.4.9.1 FRONT FRAME .............................................................................. 266
3.4.4.19 PW SENSOR .................................................................................. 212 3.4.9.2 REAR FRAME ................................................................................ 267
3.4.5 Paper Feed Mechanism ............................................................................ 214 3.4.9.3 LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR ............................................... 268
3.4.5.1 PF MOTOR ...................................................................................... 214 3.4.9.4 RIGHT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR ............................................ 269
3.4.5.2 PF SCALE ........................................................................................ 216 3.4.9.5 2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR ..................................... 270
3.4.5.3 PF ENCODER .................................................................................. 217 3.4.9.6 LEFT COVER/LEFT LOWER COVER ......................................... 272
3.4.5.4 PF TIMING BELT ........................................................................... 219 3.4.9.7 RIGHT COVER/RIGHT LOWER COVER .................................... 273
8
3.4.9.8 RIGHT REAR COVER .................................................................... 275 4.10.8.1 PW Adjustment .............................................................................. 337
3.4.9.9 2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY ................................................................ 276 4.10.8.2 T&B&S Adjustment ....................................................................... 337
3.4.9.10 SUB-C BOARD ............................................................................. 277 4.10.9 PG Check & Adjustment ....................................................................... 339
3.4.9.11 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR .......................................................... 278 4.11 Head Related Checks and Adjustments .......................................................... 342
3.4.9.12 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR ........................................................ 279 4.11.1 Tube Inner Pressure Reduction .............................................................. 342
3.4.9.13 2nd ATC MOTOR .......................................................................... 281 4.11.2 Head ID Input ........................................................................................ 343
3.4.9.14 2nd PF SENSOR ............................................................................ 282 4.11.3 Nozzle Check ......................................................................................... 345
3.4.9.15 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B ............................................... 283 4.11.4 Cleaning ................................................................................................. 346
3.4.9.16 2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR ............................................. 284 4.11.5 Head Inclination Check & Adjustment (CR direction) ......................... 347
3.4.9.17 2nd ATC GEAR ASSY .................................................................. 286 4.11.5.1 Head Inclination Auto Adjustment (CR direction) ........................ 347
3.4.9.18 2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY ................................................................ 287 4.11.5.2 Head Inclination Manual Adjustment (CR direction) .................... 348
4.11.5.3 Correcting Head Inclination (CR direction) ................................... 348
Chapter 4 ADJUSTMENT 4.11.6 Head Slant Check & Adjustment (PF direction) ................................... 350
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 289 4.11.6.1 Head Slant Auto Adjustment (PF direction) .................................. 351
4.1.1 Precautions ............................................................................................... 289 4.11.6.2 Head Slant Manual Adjustment (PF direction) .............................. 352
4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part .................................. 290 4.11.6.3 Correcting Head Slant (PF direction) ............................................. 353
4.1.3 Adjustment Items ..................................................................................... 303 4.12 Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments ................................................ 354
4.1.4 List of Tools/Software/Consumables for Adjustments ............................ 311 4.12.1 Ink eject & pressure reduction ............................................................... 354
4.1.5 Service Program Basic Operations .......................................................... 313 4.12.2 Cleaning (Tube Inner Cleaning) ............................................................ 355
4.2 NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer ............................................................ 314 4.12.3 Initial Ink Charge ................................................................................... 356
4.2.1 NVRAM Read Procedure ........................................................................ 314 4.13 Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments ............................................... 357
4.2.2 NVRAM Write Procedure ....................................................................... 314 4.13.1 PF Belt Tension Check .......................................................................... 357
4.2.3 NVRAM Viewer Basic Operation ........................................................... 315 4.13.2 PC Scale Check ..................................................................................... 359
4.3 ADJUSTMENTS (Individual) .......................................................................... 320 4.13.3 Media Feed Auto Adjustment ................................................................ 360
4.13.4 Cut Position Check & Adjustment ........................................................ 361
4.4 ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence) ........................................................................... 321 4.13.5 Paper Thickness Sensor Adjustment ..................................................... 363
4.5 Installing Firmware .......................................................................................... 322 4.13.6 Rear AD Adjustment ............................................................................. 365
4.6 Image Print ....................................................................................................... 323 4.14 Boards Related Checks and Adjustments ....................................................... 366
4.7 Counter Reset ................................................................................................... 324 4.14.1 Main Board initial setting ...................................................................... 366
4.8 References ........................................................................................................ 326 4.14.2 RTC Check & Adjustment .................................................................... 367
4.14.3 MAC Address Input ............................................................................... 368
4.9 Initial Ink Charge Flag ...................................................................................... 327 4.14.4 Serial Number & USB ID Check & Adjustment ................................... 369
4.10 CR Related Adjustments ................................................................................ 328 4.14.5 Option HDD/PS Unit S/N information Write to NVRAM .................... 370
4.10.1 CR Belt Tension Check ......................................................................... 328 4.14.6 Board Replacement Date & Time Setting ............................................. 371
4.10.2 APG Function Check ............................................................................. 331 4.14.7 Flag for extending life ........................................................................... 372
4.10.3 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Auto Adjustment ........................................ 332 4.15 Other Printer Checks and Adjustments .......................................................... 373
4.10.4 CR Scale Check ..................................................................................... 333 4.15.1 Suction Fan Adjustment ........................................................................ 373
4.10.5 CR Active Damper Auto Adjustment .................................................... 334 4.15.2 Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset ............................................... 374
4.10.6 Auto Uni-D Adjustment ........................................................................ 335 4.15.3 Roll Unit Nip Release ............................................................................ 375
4.10.7 Auto Bi-D Adjustment, acceleration/deceleration print correction ....... 336 4.15.4 Operation Panel Check (LCD & Buttons) ............................................. 376
4.10.8 PW + T&B&S check and adjustment .................................................... 337 4.15.4.1 Panel LCD Operation Check .......................................................... 376
9
4.15.4.2 Panel Buttons Operation Check ..................................................... 376

4.15.5 Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment ..................................... 377
Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE
5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 379
5.2 Storing the Printer ............................................................................................. 380
5.3 Transportation ................................................................................................... 381
5.4 Exchange Parts ................................................................................................. 382
5.5 Cleaning ............................................................................................................ 383
5.5.1 Cleaning the roller ................................................................................... 383
5.5.2 Cleaning the Platen .................................................................................. 383
5.5.3 Cleaning the inside of the PLATEN/replacing the INK PAD ................. 384
5.5.4 How to replace Porous Pads and Cleaning for Borderless Printing ........ 387
5.6 Lubrication ....................................................................................................... 393
Chapter 6 APPENDIX
6.1 Block Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................... 397
6.1.1 Main Body ............................................................................................... 397
6.1.2 Auto Take-up Reel ................................................................................... 398
6.2 Connection Diagram ......................................................................................... 399
6.3 Panel Menu Map ............................................................................................... 405
6.4 Part names used in this manual ........................................................................ 410
6.5 Exploded Diagram/Parts List ........................................................................... 413
6.6 Status Sheet ...................................................................................................... 414
10
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

1.1 Product Description  Translucent printer cover allows you to check which roll paper is loaded
easily
 Models  Space saving design
 SC-T7200 series: 1118 mm (44 inch); supports Super B0  Front access design allows you to set the printer near a wall because you can
 SC-T5200 series: 914 mm (36 inch); supports Super A0 exchange the media, ink cartridges, maintenance box, and cutter from the
front.
 SC-T3200 series: 620 mm (24 inch); supports Super A1
 Further downsizing greatly reduces the occupied space compared with the
 SC-T7200D series: 1118 mm (44 inch); supports Super B0 traditional models.
 SC-T5200D series: 914 mm (36 inch); supports Super A0  New driver and applications
 Supported paper thickness  Brand-new driver with simple UI
Up to 1.5 mm  With the web UI OS-independent configuration and control of HDD through
 Ink configuration the Web are available.
Brand-new water color pigment ink configuration with excellent black tone  Provides the job monitoring and management functions using a job
important in quality CAD line drawing and highly vivid red essential for monitoring tool.
commercial posters  Easy printing from Microsoft Office using dedicated plug-in software
Ink configuration: Cyan, Yellow, Magenta, Matte black, Photo black
 Improved shorter occupancy time of the host PC
 High-speed throughput
 Occupancy time of the host PC has been significantly shortened with ESC/
Prints A1 plain paper in 28sec. Page and HP-GL2/RTL.
 High print quality  By adding the optional HDD unit, PC-less re-printing and more shortened
 For posters: occupancy time become available.
Excellent print quality in 4 colors, with resolution of up to 2800x1440  Lower running cost
dpi, and in variable dot sizes (minimal 3.5 picoliter)  Independent ink cartridges for each color
 For CAD:  high-capacity (700ml/350ml/150ml) ink cartridges
High quality CAD line drawing achieved by optimizing the  PC-less enlarged photocopy
combination of new inks and print modes Simply connecting a scanner enables PC-less enlarged photocopy.
 Media handling  Large sized LEDs
 Easier paper loading available thanks to the design for front-access and Equipped with large-sized LEDs for easier recognition of the printer’s error status.
spindle-less with optimal height based on ergonomics
 Supports double rolls. (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only)
 Supports continuous printing of drawings or posters (in a standard size such as
Supporting double rolls enables massive continuous printing using paper of the
A0, A1 or US-ANSI D/E)
same type and improves the usability when switching paper rolls of different paper
 Supports the large capacity stacker. (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only) types.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Description 12

 PostScript printing function (option) 1.2 Basic Specifications

Newly designed hardware PS is mounted for high speed RIP processing with a
high performance CPU. This enables ultra fast PS and PDF printing without any
settings (compared with the traditional software RIPs) or dedicated PC. 1.2.1 Basic Specifications
 Large format scanner (option) Item Specification
Large format magnified copying and computerizing copy data are available Print method On-demand inkjet
without any PC. 360 nozzles x 2 lines x 2 colors (Photo
Black
Configuratio Black, Matte Black)
n of nozzles 360 nozzles x 2 lines x 3 colors
Color
(Yellow, Magenta, Cyan)
Maximum resolution 2,880 x 1,440dpi
 ESC/P Raster (commands are
Control code nondisclosure)
 HP-GL/2, HP-RTL
Paper feed method Friction
RAM 1 GB For Main
 High-Speed USB
Interface  Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-TX/
1000Base-T)
Main body operation environment 10°C to 35 °C
-20 °C to 60 °C
When storing (packed) (within 120 hours under 60 °C, and
Temperature
within 1 month under 40 °C)
-20 °C to 40 °C
When storing (unpacked)
(within 1 month under 40 °C)
Main body operation environment 20% to 80% (Non condensing)
Humidity When storing (packed) 5% to 85% (Non condensing)
When storing (unpacked) 5% to 85% (Non condensing)
*Nozzle set configuration is;
Row A Row B Row C Row D Row E Row F Row G Row H Row I Row J
C M Y PK MK MK PK Y M C
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 13

1.2.2 Electric Specifications 1.2.3 Ink Specifications

Item Specification
Item Specification
Form Exclusive ink cartridge
Rated voltage 100 to 240 VAC
Pigment ink  Black system: Photo Black, Matte Black
Input voltage range 90 to 264 VAC
colors  Color system: Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Rated current 1.0 A to 0.5A
Cartridge life See the date printed on the package (at normal temperature)
Rated frequency 50 to 60 Hz Guaranteed life
Input frequency range 49.5 to 60.5 Hz after 1 year (after mounted in the printer)
installation
SC-T7200 series: Approx. 64W
SC-T5200 series: Approx.60W  Uninstalled (packed): -20 to 40 °C
Operating SC-T3200 series: Approx.52W (within 4 days under -20 °C, and within 1 month under 40 °C)
SC-T7200D series: Approx.65W  Installed: -20 to 40 °C
Power Storage (within 4 days under -20 °C, and within 1 month under 40 °C)
SC-T5200D series: Approx.61W
consumption  Transporting (packed): -20 to 60 °C
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series: Approx. 16W (within 4 days under -20 °C, within 1 month under 40 °C, and within 72
Ready mode
SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series: Approx. 17W hours under 60 °C)
Sleep mode 3.0 W or less Capacity 700 ml/350 ml/110ml
Power OFF 0.5 W or less  700ml: W40 x L305 x H110 mm
Dielectric strength 1.5 kV rms AC for 1 min. (between AC line and chassis) Dimensions  350ml: W40 x L200 x H110 mm
 110ml: W25 x L200 x H110 mm
Leek current 0.25 mA or less
Conforms to International Energy Star Program
Compliance with regulations (Category: the harmonic restraint measure guideline)
Conforms to VCCI Class B (with full options installed)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 14

1.3 Printing Specifications
1.3.1 Paper Feed Specifications

Item Specification
Paper feed method Friction feed
Return pitch 2.2049 μm (1/11,520 inch)
 Roll paper manual feed
Paper feeder
 Cut sheet manual feed
Feed speed  300ms (1/6 inch)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 15

1.3.2 Supported Media

1.3.2.1 Epson Special Media Table
ROLL PAPER
Note "*1": SC-T3200 Series not supported "*5": When a scanner is connected
"*2": SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series supported "*6": : Borderless printing available, but borders may appear or print quality decline due to paper
"*3": When the optional auto take-up reel unit is used (SC-T7200 series) expanding or contracting.
"*4": Use the tensioner supplied with the auto take-up reel unit. "*7": When the large format scanner is connected
Size Core Take-up*3 Large

Thickn
Diamet Borderless Head Copy/
Name ess Enlarged*5 ICC Profile
er Print*6 Alignment Large
mm inch (mm) Forward Backward
(inch) Scan*7
406 16 EPSON SC-

610 24 T3000_5000_7000_Series
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) 0.27 3 √ √ √ √ √ √ Premium Glossy Photo Paper
914*1 36*1
1118*2 44*2 250.icc
406 16 EPSON SC-
610 24 T3000_5000_7000_Series
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250) 0.27 3 √ √ √ √ √ √ Premium Semigloss Photo
914*1 36*1
1118*2 44*2 Paper 250.icc
254 10
- -
300 11.8 √ √
406 16 EPSON SC-
T3000_5000_7000_Series
Premium Luster Photo Paper (260) 508 20 0.27 3 - √ - √ Premium Luster Photo Paper
610 24 √ √ 260.icc
914*1 36*1 √ √
1118*2 44*2
406 16 EPSON SC-
610 24 T3000_5000_7000_Series
Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (260) 0.27 3 √ √ √ √ √ √ Premium Semimatte Photo
914*1 36*1
1118*2 44*2 Paper 260.icc
432 17
610 24 EPSON SC-
Photo Paper Gloss 250 0.25 3 √ √ √ √ √ √ T3000_5000_7000_Series
914*1 36*1
Photo Paper Gloss 250.icc
1118*2 44*2

Size Core Take-up*3 Large

Thickn
Diamet Borderless Head Copy/
Name ess Enlarged*5 ICC Profile
er Print*6 Alignment Large
mm inch (mm) Forward Backward
(inch) Scan*7
420 (A2) --- - EPSON SC-

610 24 T3000_5000_7000_Series
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (170) 0.18 2 √ √ √ √ √
914*1 36*1 √ Premium Glossy Photo Paper
1118*2 44*2 170.icc
420 (A2) --- − EPSON SC-
610 24 T3000_5000_7000_Series
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (170) 0.18 2 √ √ √ √ √
914*1 36*1 √ Premium Semigloss Photo
1118*2 44*2 Paper 170.icc
432 17 EPSON SC-
610 24 T3000_5000_7000_Series
Enhanced Matte Paper 0.25 3  √ − − √ − Enhanced and Archival
914*1 36*1
1118*2 44*2 Matte Paper.icc
610 24 EPSON SC-
914*1 36*1 T3000_5000_7000_Series
Doubleweight Matte Paper 0.21 2 √ √*4 − √ √ √ Doubleweight Matte
1118*2 44*2 Paper.icc
432 17
EPSON SC-
610 24
Singleweight Matte Paper 0.15 2 √ √*4 − √ − √ T3000_5000_7000_Series
914*1 36*1
Singleweight Matte Paper.icc
1118*2 44*2
610 24 EPSON SC-
T3000_5000_7000_Series
Enhanced Synthetic Paper 0.13 2  √ √ − − − Enhanced Synthetic
1118 44
Paper.icc
610 24 EPSON SC-
T3000_5000_7000_Series
Enhanced Adhensive Synthetic Paper 0.18 2  √ √ − − − Enhanced Adhensive
1118*1 44*1
Synthetic Paper.icc

CUT SHEET
Note "*1": SC-T3200 Series not supported

"*2": When MFP Scanner is connected to the SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series Series only. When the MFP Scanner is connected to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series, cut sheets are not supported.
"*3": : Borderless printing available, but borders may appear or print quality decline due to paper expanding or contracting.
"*4": Load the cut sheet, and then perform a copy operation.
Thickn
Large Copy/
Name Size ess Borderless*3 Enlarged*4 Head Alignment ICC Profile
Large Scan*2
(mm)
Super A3/B 
EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Premium
Premium Glossy Photo Paper A2 0.27 - √ √ √ Glossy Photo Paper.icc
US-C 
Super A3/B 
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper A2 0.27 - √ √ √ Semigloss Photo Paper.icc
US-C 
Super B 
Premium Luster Photo Paper A2 0.27 - √ √ √ Luster Photo Paper.icc
US-C 
Super A3/B 
EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Enhanced and
Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper A2 0.26 - - √ -
Archival Matte Paper.icc
US-C 
Super A3/B 
EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Photo Quality
Photo Quality Inkjet Paper A2 0.12 - - - -
Ink Jet Paper.icc
US-C 
610 x 762 mm
(24" x 30") EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Enhanced
Enhanced Matte Posterboard 1.30 - - - -
762 x 1016 mm Matte Poster Board.icc
(30" x 40")*1

1.3.2.2 Usable Commercially Available Paper Size ROLL PAPER

This printer supports the following paper specifications for non-Epson media.
Item Specification
C A U T IO N
 Do not use paper that is wrinkled, scuffed, torn, or dirty. Media types Plain paper and recycled paper
 Although plain paper and recycled paper manufactured by Paper core size 2 inch and 3 inch
other companies can be loaded and fed in the printer as long as
they meet the following specifications, Epson cannot guarantee Roll paper outer
150 mm or less
diameter
the print quality.
 Although other paper types manufactured by other companies  SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series:
can be loaded in the printer as long as they meet the following 254 mm (10 inches) to 1,118 mm (44 inches)
specifications, Epson cannot guarantee the paper feeding and  SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series:
Width
print quality. 254 mm (10 inches) to 914 mm (36 inches)
 SC-T3200 series:
254 mm (10 inches) to 610 mm (24 inches)
Paper thickness 0.08 to 0.5 mm
Basis weight 64 to 260g/m2
254 mm/10 inch
300 mm/11.8 inch
Super A3/B/329 mm/13 inch
406 mm/16 inch
US C/17 inch/432 mm
B2/515mm
Available width for
A1/594mm
borderless printing
610 mm/24 inch
B1/728 mm
A0/841 mm
914 mm/36 inch
1030 mm
1118 mm/44 inch

CUT SHEET
Item Specification
Media types Plain paper and recycled paper
 SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series:
210 mm (A4) to 1,118 mm (44 inches)
 SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series:
Width
210 mm (A4) to 914 mm (36 inches)
 SC-T3200 series:
210 mm (A4) to 610 mm (24 inches)
Length 279.4 to 1,580 mm
Paper thickness 0.08 to 0.8 mm (Board paper: 0.8 mm to 1.5 m)
Basis weight 64 to 260g/m2
254 mm/10 inch
300 mm/11.8 inch
Super A3/329 mm/13 inch
406 mm/16 inch
US C/17 inch/432mm
B2/515 mm
Available width for
A1/594 mm
borderless printing
610 mm/24 inch
B1/728 mm
A0/841 mm
914 mm/36 inch
B0/1030 mm
1118 mm/44 inch

1.3.3 Printable area Table 1-1. Roll Paper Margin

Roll Paper Margin Parameter Margin Values
ROLL PAPER A = 45mm
Note "*1": SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series Top45mm/Bottom15mm C =15mm
"*2": SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series
B, D = 3mm
"*3": SC-T3200 series
"*4": If “Banner” is selected for “Roll Paper Option” in the printer driver “Advanced” tab, the top 3mm A, B, C, D = 3mm
and bottom margins are 0 mm.
15mm A, B, C, D = 15mm
254mm~1118mm 㪁㪈
254mm~914mm 㪁㪉
3mm/15mm 254mm~620mm 㪁㪊 0mm/3mm Note "*": When “Normal” is selected, the value for A is 20 mm for the following paper.
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) / Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250) / Premium Luster
C 㪁㪋 3mm/15mm
Photo Paper (260) / Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (260)
When the following media are used in the “CAD / Line Drawing” mode, the value for A and C
is 3 mm.
Singleweight Matte/Plain Paper/Tracing Paper/Tracing Paper <Low Duty>
127mm
~
15m B D CUT SHEET
Note "*1": SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series

"*2": SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series
"*3": SC-T3200 series
A 㪁㪋 3~45mm
210mm~1118mm 㶎㪈
210mm~914mm 㶎㪉
Table 1-1. Roll Paper Margin 210mm~620mm 㶎㪊
Roll Paper Margin Parameter Margin Values

A, C = 15mm*
Normal
B, D = 3mm
A, C = 15mm
Top15mm/Bottom15mm
B, D = 3mm
A = 35mm
Top35mm/Bottom15mm C =15mm
B, D =3mm

1.3.4 Borderless Printing Specification Printer driver

Cutting Operation Explanation
settings
AVAILABLE PAPER TYPE  The top area may become slightly uneven
depending on the image since the print
For the paper types and sizes that support the borderless printing, see "1.3.2.1 Epson operation stops while cutting the top edge of
Special Media Table" (p16). the roll paper.
A  The printed paper is approximately 2 mm
ROLL PAPER CUTTING OPERATION shorter than the specified size since the printer
Double Cut cuts the paper inside the image to avoid
showing top and bottom margins.
Printer driver
Cutting Operation Explanation B  After cutting the bottom edge of the previous
settings
page, the printer feeds the paper, and then cuts
the top edge of the following page. Although
this produces 60 to 127 mm cut-off pieces, the
A cut is more accurate.
Borderless The default printer driver setting is “Borderless”.

1.3.5 Stacker
B  SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series
Table 1-2. Continuous Stacker

 The top area may become slightly uneven SC-T3200 SC-T5200 SC-T7200
Paper size Paper type
depending on the image since the print series series series
operation stops while cutting the top edge of
A1 594 x 841mm Plain paper 20 pages 20 pages 20 pages
the roll paper.
 If the cut position is misaligned slightly, small A1 841 x 594mm --- 20 pages 20 pages
A parts of the image may be shown on the top or A0 841 x 1189mm --- 20 pages 20 pages
bottom of the adjacent pages. If this occurs,
Single Cut US-ANSI D 22 x 34 inch 1 pages 1 pages 1 pages
perform “Adjust Cut Position”.
B  When printing only one page the operation US-ANSI D 34 x 22 inch --- 20 pages 20 pages
performed is the same as that for “Double Cut”.
When continuously printing multiple sheets, US-ANSI E 34 x 44 inch --- 1 pages 1 pages
the printer cuts 1 mm inside on the top edge of
the first page and the bottom edge of the Table 1-3. Single Sheet Stacker
subsequent pages to avoid showing margins. Product name Maximum Width Maximum Length
SC-T3200 series All paper type / A1 + (approx. 610 mm) Approx. 1,189 mm
SC-T5200 series All paper type / A0 Portrait (841mm) Approx. 1,189 mm
SC-T7200 series All paper type / A0 Portrait (841mm) Approx. 1,189 mm

 SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Table 1-4. Continuous stacker specification

Stackable Pages
Paper size Paper type
SC-T5200D series SC-T7200D series
A1 Portrait
Plain paper 20 pages 20 pages
(594mm or less)
Table 1-5. Single Sheet Stacker specification

Product Maximum Length
Maximum Width
name Large-capacity position Compact position
SC-T7200D/
SC-T5200D All paper Approx. 1,580 mm Approx. 1,189 mm
series

1.4 Hardware Specifications 1.4.2 Installation Room Requirement

This section provides the printer dimensions and shows the main components.
1.4.1 Dimensions and Weight

Model Width Depth*1 Height Weight*2
SC-T7200 series 1,608 mm 762 mm 1,128 mm Approx. 92 kg
SC-T5200 series 1,405 mm 762 mm 1,128 mm Approx. 84 kg
SC-T3200 series 1,050 mm 691 mm 613 mm Approx. 54 kg
(w/o dedicated stand)
SC-T3200 series 1,050 mm 762 mm 1,117 mm Approx. 67kg
(w/ dedicated stand)
SC-T7200D series 1,608 mm 734 mm 1,128 mm Approx. 133kg
SC-T5200D series 1,405 mm 734 mm 1,128 mm Approx. 118kg Figure 1-1. SC-T7200 Series/SC-T5200 Series
Note 1: When the paper basket is retracted

2: Excluding ink cartridges
Figure 1-2. SC-T3200 Series
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 24

Figure 1-3. SC-T7200D/SC-T5200 Series
Figure 1-4. When the Large Format Scanner is installed

Note "*1": SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
"*2": SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series

1.4.3 Part Names Table 1-6. Front Side

No. Name
FRONT SIDE
1 Printer cover
2 Poster board support
3 Maintenance box covers
4 Paper basket/Large-capacity paper basket
5 Casters
6 Stack guides*
7 Stack guide switch lever*
8 Cartridge cover
9 Ink cartridges
10 AC inlet
11 Option port
12 USB port
13 LAN port
14 Data light
15 Status light
16 Control panel
17 Alert lamp
18 Roll rest
19 Adapter guides
20 Roll lock lever
21 Adapter holder
22 Paper slot
Figure 1-5. Front Side 23 Print head
24 Roll paper cover
25 Paper eject guide
Note "*": SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series only

BACK SIDE ROLL 2 UNIT (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D SERIES)

.
Figure 1-6. Back side
Table 1-7. Back side

Figure 1-7. Roll 2 unit
No. Name
1 Option slot
2 Roll 2 unit connector*
Table 1-8. Roll 2 unit
3 Rear cover*
No. Name
Note "*": SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only 1 Paper slot
2 Drawer handles
3 Adapter guides
4 Adapter holder
5 Roll lock lever

ROLL PAPER ADAPTER
Figure 1-8. Roll paper adapter
Table 1-9. Roll paper adapter

No. Name
1 Adapter lock lever
2 Size lever

1.5 Control Panel Specifications Table 1-10. Control panel

Name Function
1.5.1 Control panel and LCD 1 Power button Turns the power on and off.
 On: The power is on.
CONTROL PANEL  Flashing: The printer is receiving data or cleaning the
2 Power light print head or performing other operations in
the course of being shut down.
 Off: The power is off.
3 Load/Remove Paper button Displays the Load/Remove Paper menu.

Displays the printer’s status, menus, error messages, and
4 Screen
so on.
Displays the menu for the tab currently selected in the
5 [Menu] button
display.
If menus are displayed, pressing this button takes you up
6 Back button
one level in the menu hierarchy.
7 Left/Right buttons Use these buttons to select tabs.
When menus are displayed, these buttons can be used to
8 Up/Down buttons
highlight items or options.
 Displays the menu for the tab currently selected in the
display.
 When menus are displayed and an item is highlighted,
9 OK button pressing this button displays the sub-menu for the
highlighted item.
 If pressed while a parameter is selected from the Menu,
the parameter is set or executed.
10 Help button Displays the Help menu.
Displays the Maintenance menu, which is used for nozzle
11 Maintenance button
checks and head cleaning.
 The printer enters pause status if this is pressed while
printing.
Figure 1-9. Control panel 12 Pause/Cancel button  Pressing this button while a menu or help is displayed
closes the menu or help and returns the printer to ready
status.
 It is used to manually cut roll paper using the built-in
cutter.
13 Feed/Cut Media button  If printing is not currently in progress and the printer is
loaded with roll paper, you can feed paper ahead by
pressing first this button and then the [] button.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel Specifications 29

LCD Table 1-11. LCD

Name Function
 Screen View
Displays the printer’s status, operation, and error
1 Message
messages.
Print Displays print job status and can be used to access the
Queues Tab Print Queues menu.
Shows the type of paper in the printer and can be used to
access the Paper menu.
When roll paper is used, it also shows the roll width.
When Roll Paper Remaining is On, it shows the amount
of roll paper remaining. When the length remaining
reaches or falls below the value selected for Remaining
Alert, a icon appears above the tab icon and an alert
like that shown below is displayed to warn that the
printer is nearing the end of the roll.
Tabs/Info
2
Display Area
Paper Tab When roll paper is loaded on Roll 1/Roll 2 of the SC-
T7200D/SC-T5200D series, you can check which is
selected (in use) by looking at the icon.
Indicates a roll that is selected (in use).The
number indicates either Roll 1 or Roll 2.
Indicates a roll in a standby state.

If there is an automatic switching command,
this roll is selected for printing.
Figure 1-10. LCD

Table 1-11. LCD

Name Function
Displays ink status.
The ink cartridge status is indicated as follows.
: No error.
: Ink is low.
Ink Tab
: Ink cartridge is expended.
: An error occurred.
: Non-genuine cartridge is installed.

Tabs/Info
2 Shows the status of the Maintenance Box and is used to
Display Area
display the Maintenance menu.
Maintenance Box status is shown as follows.
Maintenance : No error.
Tab
: The Maintenance Box is nearing the end of
its service life.
: Maintenance Box is at the end of its service
life.
Setup Tab Displays the IP address and menus for various settings.
Large Copy This tab is displayed only when the optional Large
Tab Format Scanner is connected.
Enlarged
Displayed only when a scanner is connected.
Copy Tab

1.5.2 Menu Descriptions

Note "*1": SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D seriess only
"*2": SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series only
"*3": When the optional hard disk unit or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit has been connected only
"*4": When the optional Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit has been connected only
Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default) Explanation
Lists the estimated start time and time needed to print the selected job.
It also predicts whether the job can be completed without replacing paper, ink or the
Maintenance Box. The estimates are guidelines only. We recommend proceeding even
if Can Not Complete is displayed.
Waiting Job Name Remote Manager and the LFP HDD Utility display the reason for the Can Not
User Complete message and allow you to hold or cancel the job.
Print Queue*3 Estimated Start Time Printing availability by paper remaining cannot be performed correctly if Roll Paper
Remaining is Off.
Estimated Print Time
The printer will not predict availability on the basis of the amount of ink remaining
Printing Availability
when documents are printed using LFP Print Plug-In for Office or EPSON
CopyFactory5.
Print Queues*3 When the printer printed using the PS driver included with the optional Adobe
PostScript 3 Expansion Unit, Estimated Start Time and Estimated Print Time are
displayed as “0 minutes”.
Paused Job Name This option is available only if On is selected for Store Held Job in the Setup menu,
User Displays the print settings for held jobs and the reason the job is held.
Paper Type Jobs that are held because the job print settings differ from those currently selected for
XXXXXXXXXXX
View Hold Queue the printer can be printed as described below.
Held Queue*2*3 (name of held job) Source
1. Replace the paper and take whatever other steps may be necessary to ready the
Size
device for printing.
Reason For Hold
2. Select Resume All Jobs.
Resume All Jobs Press the OK button to resume all held jobs currently in the queue.


Stored Job Name
User
Length
Pages Shows the status of the selected stored job when it was last printed.
XXXXXXXXXXX After viewing the job, press the OK button to enter the number of copies. Press the
Saved Job Queue*3 Paper Type
Print Queues*3 (name of stored print job) []/[] buttons to choose the number of copies and press the OK button to display
Copies
the estimated print time and print availability. Press the OK button to start printing.
Source
Size
Estimated Print Time
Print Job Log Sheet Press the OK button to print the print job log.
Remove Paper Instructions are not displayed if no paper is loaded.
Roll Paper*2
Roll 1*1 Highlight the paper to be loaded and press the OK button. Follow the on-screen
Load/Remove Paper Roll 2*1 instructions to load the paper.
Cut Sheet (up to 0.8 If paper is already loaded in the printer, the instructions for removing the loaded paper
mm thick) type will be displayed before loading instructions are shown.
Paper
Poster Board
Plain Paper
Photo Paper
Select the type of paper loaded.
Select Paper Type Matte Paper
Others
Custom Paper Select the name of the custom paper loaded in the printer.


Plain Paper
Photo Paper
Select Reference You can select the media type that is the closest to the paper you are using.
Matte Paper
Paper
Others
XXXXXXXXXXX No Paper Selected Select this option if you do not wish to specify the paper type.
Custom Paper
Paper (name of custom Narrow
Setting Select the platen gap, which is the distance between the print head and the paper.
paper type)
Standard Normally, select Standard. Select a wider setting if printed images are smeared. If,
Platen Gap
Wide upon performing head alignment, you feel that it is still not completely aligned, select
Narrow.
Wider
Detect Paper Press the OK button to print a pattern to determine the thickness of the current paper.
Thickness Select the pattern number with the least misalignment from the print results.


Pattern Use this setting if you are unable to resolve banding issues (horizontal striped lines or
uneven colors) in the standard print area (for cut sheets the area excluding the 1 to 2
cm strip at the bottom of the paper) even after head cleaning or head alignment.
Pattern selected
Press the Z button to print an adjustment pattern. Measure the distance between the
“+” symbols.
Use only the distance between the center symbols or the average of the distances
between the left, center, and right symbols.
Paper Feed Adjust

Value
XXXXXXXXXXX
Custom Paper
Paper (name of custom
Setting
paper type)
After the adjustment pattern is printed, the length of the pattern will be displayed in
the control panel. Press the []/[] buttons to enter the measured value and press the
OK button.
Value selected
Choose an adjustment between -0.70 and +0.70%. Selecting too small a value causes
dark bands; adjust the amount upward. Similarly, choosing too large a value causes
white bands; adjust the amount downward.
It is important to choose the appropriate amount of suction for the paper used in order
to maintain the correct distance between the paper and the print head. Choosing too
high a value for thin or soft paper will increase the distance between the paper and the
Paper Suction -4 to 0
print head, causing print quality to decline or preventing the paper feeding correctly.
In such cases, you will need to lower the paper suction. The suction power is
weakened when the parameter is lowered.
Normal Select High or Extra High if the paper wrinkles during printing.
Roll Paper Tension High If Extra High is set, the following setting is enabled: Setup menu > Advanced Settings
Extra High > Roll Paper Tension.


ON
Remove Skew Select whether to enable (On) or disable (Off) paper skew reduction.
OFF
XXXXXXXXXXX
Custom Paper Enter a name of up to 22 characters for custom paper settings. Choose an easy-to-remember name for quick
(name of custom Setting Name
Setting selection.
paper type)
Yes
Restore Settings Restore the selected custom paper settings to default values.
No
Print Paper List Press the OK button to print a list of custom paper settings.
ON Select whether to display/record (On) or not to display/record (Off) the amount of
remaining roll paper. If On is selected, you will be prompted to enter the length of the
roll. The following options can be made available by entering the length of the loaded
Paper roll.
 Time until replacement
When the roll is removed, a barcode will automatically be printed on the roll
Roll Paper Remaining stating the length remaining, the value selected for the roll remaining alert, and the
OFF
paper type.
The barcode is automatically read and settings adjusted the next time the paper is
used, improving efficiency when multiple rolls of paper are used.
 Printing Availability
The printer will estimate printing availability based on the length of the roll.
Displayed when On is selected for Roll Paper Remaining.
Remaining Alert 1 to15 m Set within a range from 1 to 15 m to display a warning when the amount of remaining
roll paper drops below that limit. You can set in 1 m increments.
Press the OK button to print a nozzle check pattern. Inspect the pattern visually and perform head cleaning if
Nozzle Check
you detect faint or missing colors.
Inspect the printed pattern and select the check boxes for patterns with faint or missing areas. To select all
Head Cleaning
nozzles, place a check in the box on the left.
Maintenance Auto (Uni-D)
If print results are grainy or out of focus, perform head alignment to realign the print head. If Auto is
Auto (Bi-D) selected, the printer will scan the printed pattern during printing and realign the head automatically.
Head Alignment
Manual (Uni-D) If Manual is selected, a pattern will be printed; inspect the pattern visually and enter the value you think
appropriate.
Manual (Bi-D)


You can fine tune the cut position when printing to roll paper with no margins in all
Adjust Cut Position -3 to 3mm
directions. The cut position can be adjusted in increments of 0.2 mm.
Maintenance Cutter Maintenance Moves the cutter to the replacement position so it can be replaced. Press the OK button to move the cutter to
Replace Cutter the replacement position. The paper must be removed before the cutter can be replaced. Remove the paper
before proceeding.
ON Choose On to automatically cut roll paper using the built-in cutter as each page is
Auto Cut printed or Off to disable auto paper cutting. The setting selected with the printer driver
OFF takes priority when the printer driver is used.
Normal If you want to reduce operation noise during cutting, set Silent. If Silent is set, the
Cutting Mode
Silent cutting speed is reduced.
ON If On is selected during borderless printing, the printer will automatically trim the
Refresh Margin leading edge to remove any ink stains that may have been left by the previous copy; to
OFF disable this feature, choose Off.
ON If Auto Cut is Off, you can choose to print (On) or not print (Off) cut lines on roll
paper. Cut lines are not printed if Auto Cut is On or when cut sheets or poster board is
used.
Note, however, that if the roll width selected with the computer is narrower than the
Page Line
OFF paper loaded in the printer, cut lines will be printed regardless of the option selected
for Auto Cut.
The setting selected with the printer driver takes priority when the printer driver is
Setup Printer Setup Roll Paper Setup
used.
Normal
Top15mm/
Bottom15mm
Top35mm/ When set to Normal, the top and bottom margins are 15 mm, and the left and right
Roll Paper Margin Bottom15mm margins are 3 mm.
Top45mm/ Except for 15mm, the left and right margins for all other settings are 3 mm.
Bottom15mm
3 mm
15 mm
Continue
Select the action to perform for a roll after replacement: print the remaining data
Roll End Option Stop Printing
(Continue) / do not print (Stop Printing) / print again from the beginning (Reprint).
Reprint*3


ON Normally, leave the setting at On.
If you experience problems with automatic loading when you use commercially
available paper because of lack of tension, slipperiness, extremely large curls, or other
Auto Loading*1 problems, set to Off.
OFF Remove all paper before configuring this setting. If paper is loaded, the setting cannot
be changed.
While the setting is Off, the Roll 2 unit cannot be used.
Auto Select the action to take when the roll currently in use is under the following
conditions: automatically switch between Roll 1 and Roll 2 and print (Auto) / print
Roll 1
fixed to Roll 1 (Roll 1)/print fixed to Roll 2 (Roll 2).
 The roll is finished, and there is data still to be printed.
Roll Switch
 The printer predicts that there is not enough roll paper remaining, and printing
Setting*1
cannot be completed.
Roll 2
 The print margin will be large for the width of the print job.
When the setting is Auto, the roll is switched according to the Roll Switch Condition
setting.
Type Match From the following options, select the condition under which to
switch to another roll for printing when the current roll has run
Setup Printer Setup Roll Paper Setup out.
 Type Match: Switch to the other roll for printing only when
Paper Type the paper type specified in the job and the paper type of the
Disable other roll are the same.
If a different type of paper has been loaded on the other roll,
an error appears, and the printer cannot print.
 Disable: Print even when the paper type is different.
Print Length From the following options, select the conditions when you
Roll Switch want to switch in consideration of roll paper remaining and
Remaining Amount
Condition*1 print length (length of one page of a print job).
Note that if Roll Paper Remaining is Off in the Paper menu,
this setting is disabled regardless of its configuration.
 Print Length: If both Roll 1 and Roll 2 have enough paper
Paper Length remaining for the print length, print using the roll with the
Disable lower remaining amount. If the remaining amount of one
roll is shorter than the print length, print using the other roll.
 Remaining Amount: Print using the roll with the lower
remaining amount regardless of the print length.
 Disable: Print using the roll currently in use regardless of the
remaining amount or print length.


Best Fit From the following options, select the conditions when you
want to use the roll paper that reduces print margins in
Width Match
consideration of roll paper width and print job length (the value
of Document Size of the printer driver).
 Best Fit: Compare the roll width of Roll 1 and Roll 2 and the
Paper Width width of the print job, and then print using the roll with the
smaller print margin.
Disable
 Width Match: Print using the roll with a width that matches
Roll Switch the width of the print job.
Roll Paper Setup
Condition*1  Disable: Print using the roll currently in use regardless of the
roll paper width or print job width.
Roll In Use Select the print job priority when there are several waiting jobs:
print jobs that can be printed by the roll currently in use, switch
to another roll, and then print the remaining jobs (Roll In Use) /
Setup Printer Setup Print Job Priority*3 Print jobs in the order they were received (In Order). When the
In Order setting is In Order, automatic roll switching operations may be
frequent depending on the settings of the print jobs, and this
may increase the overall print time.
This setting is used if one of the following settings are configured to Extra High:
Paper menu > Custom Paper Setting > Roll Paper Tension or Printer driver's Paper
Configuration > Roll Paper Tension.
Roll Paper Tension 1 to 5 If wrinkles are formed on the paper during printing when the above mentioned Roll
Paper Tension is High, set it to Extra High, and then configure the strength of the
Advanced Settings tension using this setting.
Higher values produce higher tension.
ON If the paper is thick, the print head may scuff the print surface. Choose On to prevent
scuffing. This option can be used to temporarily change the value selected for Custom
Less Head Scuffing
OFF Paper Setting > Platen Gap in the Paper menu. Note, however, that On has no effect
when Wider is selected for Platen Gap.


Specify how long the printer pauses to allow the ink to dry after printing each page;
choose from values between 0 and 60 minutes. Depending on the ink density or paper
Drying Time Per
0 to 60 minutes type, the ink may take a while to dry. If the ink blurs on the paper, set a longer time for
Page
drying the ink.
The longer the drying time, the more time required for printing.
ON Choose whether the printer automatically detects (On) or does not detect (Off) the
paper width. Try choosing Off if a paper setting error is displayed when the paper is
Paper Size Check correctly loaded. Note, however, that the printer may print outside the paper when Off
OFF is selected. If it prints beyond the edges of the paper, the inside of the printer becomes
dirty with ink. We generally recommend to operate with this setting set to On.
ON If On is selected, an error will be displayed in the control panel and printing will stop
Paper Skew Check if the paper is skewed; select Off to disable this feature. On is recommended in most
Advanced Settings OFF circumstances as skewed paper may cause the printer to jam.
Setup Printer Setup ON This setting is displayed if an optional hard disk unit or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion
Unit is connected. If On is selected, print jobs that require a paper type, source, or
output paper size (width) that differs from those currently selected with the printer will
be saved as held jobs; select Off to disable this feature.
If Off is selected, an error will be displayed and will printing will stop if the source
Store Held Job*2*3
OFF selected for the print job does not match that selected with the printer.
When On is selected, printing will not stop if an error occurs; instead, jobs with non-
matching settings will be saved to the hard disk unit or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion
Unit as held jobs. Held jobs can be printed from the Print Queue menu after the printer
has been readied by, for example, loading the correct type of paper.
If printing stops mid-way when the printer and computer are connected by a USB
USB Timeout 10 to 600 seconds
cable, set a longer time.
Speed
HP-GL/2 Settings Quality Choose Print Quality in view of image quality and print speed.
Fine


The hard clip area of the PS command of the data becomes the base output size. The
actual output size depends on the Margin Options setting.
When the data does not contain a PS command, the smallest rectangle area A of in the
following illustration including the print object becomes the base output size.
Auto
Choose the base output size from the compatible standard sizes. The actual output size
depends on the Margin Options setting.
Output Size A Series/US-ANSI/
For a cut sheet, this setting is available only when the data does not contain a PS
US-ARCH/B Series/
Setup Printer Setup HP-GL/2 Settings command.
Photo Series/Others
If the data contains a command, this setting is not available, and the hard clip area of
the PS command becomes the base output size.
Select this option when outputting at non-standard sizes. After selecting this setting,
set Paper Width and Paper Height. You can set in 0.1 mm increments.
Paper Width
SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series: 89* to 1118mm
SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series: 89* to 914mm
SC-T3200 series: 89* to 610mm
User Defined
Paper Height
127 to 4,620 mm
The actual output size depends on the Margin Options setting.
Note "*": The smallest size supported by the printer is 254 mm wide × 127 mm
long. If a smaller size is entered for this setting, the document will print
with wider-than-expected margins, which must be trimmed.
3mm Select the top, bottom, left, and right margin values.
Margin
5mm For a cut sheet, the bottom margin is 14 mm regardless of the settings.


The position at which the margin is added depends on the Output Size setting, as
shown below
 When set to Auto
Adds the value selected for Margin (area B of in the following illustration) outside
the hard clip area of the PS command of the data (area of A in the following
illustration).
Setup Printer Setup HP-GL/2 Settings Margin Options Standard
 When set to a standard size or User Defined

Adds the value selected for Margin (area B of in the following illustration) inside
the size selected for Output Size (area A of in the following illustration) and prints
only the section within the area excluding the margins.


The position at which the margin is added depends on the Output Size setting, as
shown below.
 When set to Auto
The result is the same as when Standard is selected.
 When set to a standard size or User Defined
Adds the value selected for Margin (area B of in the following illustration) outside
the size selected for Output Size (area A of in the following illustration). With the
actual Output Size, the margin section becomes larger than the selected size (the
area A of in the following illustration).
Add Margins
Setup Printer Setup HP-GL/2 Settings Margin Options
Depending on the Output Size setting, adds the value selected for Margin (area of in
the following illustration) inside the hard clip area B of the PS command of the data or
the size selected for Output Size (area A of in the following illustration). When there
is a print object in the margin section, it is clipped and not printed.
Clip By Margins


0 degree You can rotate the coordinates of the drawn data counterclockwise in units of 90
degree before printing. Note that objects drawn by RTL are not rotated.
90 degree
When both this setting and the RO command specify rotation, rotation is performed
180 degree using the combined amount of both values. Note that rotation by the RO command is
for objects only (the arrow section in the following illustration), and rotation is not
performed for the drawn area (the square section in the following illustration). As a
Rotate result, objects in a section that protrude from the drawn area are not printed.
270 degree
Setup Printer Setup HP-GL/2 Settings

ON Select whether to flip horizontally (mirror) using the center of the Output Size width
as the basis line and then print (On) or print without flipping horizontally (Off).
Mirror
OFF
If an angle is specified for Rotate, the rotated result is flipped horizontally.


Software From the following selections, choose the palette that specifies the color and thickness
of the logical pen.
Default
 Software: Print according to the pen configurations set in the application, and
Palette A ignore the built-in palette of the printer.
 Default: Print according to the settings of the built-in palette of the printer specified
in advance. The settings of the palette cannot be changed. The built-in palette
specifies a logical pen with a pen width of 0.35 mm and 256 colors. For a sample of
Select Palette colors that correspond to the color numbers, seethe included “Color Palette.pdf”.
“Color Palette.pdf” recommends checking a print result that was printed with Print
Palette B Quality set to CAD / Line Drawing (Color) in the included printer driver.
 Palette A/Palette B: The printer prints according to the settings of the built-in
palette that you specified for Define Palette. If Define Palette setting is not set, the
results are the same as when Default is selected.
When Default/Palette A/Palette B is set, the pen configurations set in the application
are ignored.
Palette A You can define a unique built-in palette by specifying the pen width and color for the
16 types of logical pen. There are two types of definable built-in palettes: Palette A
Setup Printer Setup HP-GL/2 Settings and Palette B. Select a palette to be defined, select Pen Number, and then define the
Define Palette Pen Width and Pen Color for each pen. For a sample of colors that correspond to the
Palette B color numbers, see the included “Color Palette.pdf”.
“Color Palette.pdf” recommends checking a print result that was printed with Print
Quality set to CAD / Line Drawing (Color) in the included printer driver.
ON Select whether to merge the intersection of the overlapping lines within the image
according to the MC command of the data (On) / Move lines to be printed later to the
front at intersections (Off).
Line Merge
OFF
Reset HP-GL/2 Yes

If Yes is selected, the HP-GL/2 Settings are restored to default values.
Settings No


Yes
Printer Setup Restore Settings If Yes is selected, the Printer Setup is restored to default values.
No
The supported PostScript version and the latest version for processable PDF files are
displayed.
Version
If the PDF version displayed in the document properties of the PDF file is the same or
earlier than the version displayed here, the file can be processed.
If the OK button is pressed, the information of the Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit
PS Status Sheet
is printed
Auto Select the size of the paper used for printing.
A Series (A4)/US- When Auto is selected, the printer prints using the size of the print data. The actual
ANSI/US-ARCH/B output size depends on the margin settings.
Series/Photo Series/ When a standard size or User Defined is selected, all print data is enlarged or
Others reduced to the selected paper size and then printed.
Output Size
The sizes that can be selected vary with the printer model.
When print data is created with the paper size set to A4, the following settings have
Setup User Defined the described results.
Option Setup*4 PS3 Expansion Unit Auto: data is printed with margins added outside the A4 size.
A4: data is printed with the A4 data reduced to the printable area of the A4 size.
Speed
Quality Normal Choose Print Quality in view of image quality and print speed.
Fine
Color Specify whether to print in color or switch to black and white and then print.
Depending on the paper type specified on the printer, the setting is not displayed.
Color Mode
Grayscale When you are using the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series, the setting depends on the
paper type of the roll paper currently in use.
ON This setting is displayed only when the paper type is set to Singleweight Matte Paper
and Plain Paper.
When you are using the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series, the setting depends on the
Dot Correction
OFF paper type of the roll paper currently in use.
If lines printed with CAD programs or similar programs have gaps or smudges, you
may be able to reduce them by setting On.


SWOP v2/US Web Uncoated v2/US
Sheetfed Coated v2/US Sheetfed
Uncoatedv2/Coated GRACoL 2006/SWOP
Grade 3 Paper/SWOP Grade 5 Paper/
Coated FOGRA27/Web Coated FOGRA28/
Uncoated FOGRA29/Coated FOGRA39/ When you simulate CMYK ink colors of offset printers, you
CMYK Simulation Euroscale Coated v2 /Euroscale Uncoated can select the color of the CMYK ink to be simulated. If Off is
v2/JapanWebCoated (Ad)/ set, ink is not simulated.
JapanColor2001Coated/
JapanColor2001Uncoated/
JapanColor2002Newspape/
JapanColor2003WebCoate/
EPSON_TOYO/EPSON_DIC/OFF
sRGB
Adobe RGB (1998) When you will print RGB data, you can select the color space of the RGB to be
RGB Source Apple RGB simulated.
ColorMatch RGB If Off is set, ink is not simulated.
Setup Option Setup*4 PS3 Expansion Unit OFF

Absolute Select the conversion method (rendering intent) of color space when carrying out
CMYK simulation or RGB simulation from the following four types.
Relative
 Absolute Colorimetric: Assigns absolute color gamut coordinates to the original
Perceptual and print data and converts the data. Color tone adjustment is not performed on any
white point (or color temperature) for the original or print data. This setting is
appropriate for when color accuracy is important, such as when printing logo
colors.
 Relative Colorimetric: Converts the data so that a set of color gamut and white
Rendering Intent
point (or color temperature) coordinates in the original data match their
corresponding print coordinates. This feature is used for many types of color
Saturation matching.
 Perceptual: Converts the data so that a more visually natural image is produced.
This setting is appropriate for photo images.
 Saturation: Convert focusing on the vividness of color rather than color accuracy.
Suitable for business graphics such as graphs and charts, for which the use of bright
colors is preferred.
Black Pt ON When you have converted from a wide color space to narrow color space or you feel
Compensation OFF that the shadows are smudged, set to On.


ON Select whether to rotate portrait print data 90 to the right automatically (On) or print
without rotation (Off).
Auto Rotate
OFF Print data that was created in a landscape orientation is not automaticallyrotated even
when this setting is On.
Option Setup*4 PS3 Expansion Unit ON Normally, leave the setting at Off. If the print head stops frequently while waiting for
Caching To HDD
OFF data expansion during printing, set to On.
ON Select whether to print a sheet with the error condition listed (On) or not to print (Off)
PS Error Sheet when a PostScript error occurs during printing or an error occurs during printing of a
OFF PDF file.
You can see the firmware version.
When an optional auto take-up reel unit is connected, its firmware version is displayed
Firmware Version xxxxxxx,x.xx,xxxx below the firmware version of the printer.
Furthermore, when an optional Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit is connected, its
Printer Status two control versions are displayed at the end.
Option Status Lists the optional accessories currently connected to the printer and available for use.
Show Total Prints XXXXXXm2 Displays the total area of media printed (to a maximum of six digits).
Print Status Sheet Press the OK button to print a list of current printer settings. Choose this option to view settings at a glance.
Auto Select whether to use DHCP to set the IP address (Auto), or to set the address
Setup
IP Address Setting manually (Panel). Choose Panel to enter the IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default
Panel Gateway. Contact your system administrator for detailed information.
Enable
IPv6 Setting Select whether to enable or disable the IPv6 function.
Disable
Enable
IPsec Setting Select whether to enable or disable the IPsec function.
Disable
Enter a Pre-Shared Key of up to 20 characters (half-width alphanumeric characters
PSK Setting
and symbols).
Network Setup
Enable
IEEE802.1x Setting Select whether to enable or disable the IEEE802.1X function.
Disable
Enable
HTTPS Redirect Setting Select whether to enable or disable the function to auto-direct HTTP to HTTPS.
Disable
Press the OK button to print a list of the Network Setup. Use this information for a complete overview of
Print Status Sheet
network settings.
Yes
Restore Settings Select Yes to restore all Network Setup content to default values.
No

The printer will enter sleep mode if no errors have occurred, no print jobs have been
Sleep Mode 5 to 210 minutes received, and no actions are performed on the control panel for an extended period of
time. This setting selects the amount of time until the printer enters sleep mode.
OFF The printer turns off automatically when there are no errors, no print jobs being
received, and no control panel or other operations are performed for eight hours.
Power Settings Power Off Timer The delay before the printer turns off can be selected from values between 1 and 24
1 to 24 hours hours in increments of 1 hour.
Choose Off to prevent the printer turning off automatically.
Yes
Restore Settings Select Yes to restore all Eco Settings to default values.
No
Japanese
English
French
Italian
German
Language Portuguese Select the language used on the control panel's screen.
Setup Spanish
Preference Dutch
Russian
Korean
Chinese
m Select the unit of length which is displayed on the control panel's screen or printed on
Unit: Length
ft/in the patterns.
ON Choose whether the large alert lamp lights (On) or does not light (Off) when an error
Alert Lamp Setting
OFF occurs.
Enter an administrator password of up to 20 characters.

Selecting Administrator Menu displays a password prompt. The Administrator Menu will only be displayed
Change Password if the correct password is entered, preventing non-administrators from accidentally changing settings.
Keep the password in a safe place.
Administrator Menu Should you forget the password, contact your dealer or Epson Support.
Password Required
Choose whether the administrator password is required to access Network Setup from
Operational Control Network Setup No Password the control panel or Remote Manager.
Required


Power Cleaning
Inspect the printed pattern and select the check boxes for patterns with faint or missing areas. To select all
nozzles, place a check in the box on the left.
Yes If Yes is selected, an optional hard disk unit or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit
that is connected to the printer is formatted.
Formatting the hard disk unit or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit deletes all stored
Manage HDD*3 Format Hard Disk
No print jobs.
Setup Administrator Menu Hard disk units or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Units that have been used with other
printers must be formatted before they can be used with this printer.
Auto
Normally, leave the setting at Auto. Sent print data is identified, and the operation
Printer Mode PostScript*3 mode is switched automatically. If operation mode switching is not performed
correctly, and printing is not performed correctly, set to the operation mode to be used.
HP-GL/2
YY/MM/DD Set the printer’s built-in clock. The time provided by the clock is used when printing
Date And Time
HH:MM logs and status sheets.
Enter the difference between the current time zone and GMT.
Time Zone The selected time zone is used in e-mail notifications sent by Remote Manager when an error occurs and so
on.
Yes Select Yes to initialize the user font and user ICC profile saved in the user area of the
Reset PS Settings*4
No Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit. Initialization deletes saved data.
Yes Select Yes to restore defaults for all settings except the Date And Time, Language,
Reset All Settings
No and Unit: Length options in the Setup menu.
Color
Enlarged Copy Color/Grayscale Choose whether to copy in color or in black and white.
Grayscale


With Border Document sizes are listed to the left of the arrows. The copy is enlarged to fit the
width of the roll currently loaded in the printer. The maximum size is 914 mm (36
A3->Auto,B4->Auto,A4->Auto, B5- inches). If a roll wider than 36 inches is loaded in the SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series,
>Auto,A5->Auto,LTR->Auto, 4x6->Auto, the maximum size is still 36 inches.
A4/2->Banner(Auto) Borderless To print without borders, select Borderless. Note that this item is not displayed when a
plain paper roll is loaded because Borderless is not supported.
The sizes available vary with the scanner.
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Select the size of the original document when copying at other sizes.
Auto Document Size
LTR, 4x6 The sizes available vary with the scanner.
Choose the output size when copying at other sizes.
Enlarged Copy A0, US E, B1, A1*,
A0 (2Sheets) is available only with the SC-T3200 Series.
Output Size US D, B2, US C, A2,
Other Size A0 is available only with the SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series/SC-T5200/SC-T5200D
A0 (2Sheets)
series.
With Border To print without borders, select Borderless.
Border This item is not displayed when a plain paper roll is Borderless loaded because
Borderless Borderless is not supported.
Speed
Quality Choose Copy Quality in view of image quality and print speed.
Fine
Five options from
Density Choose copy density.
Light to Dark
Roll 1 Choose whether to copy and print using Roll 1 or Roll 2.
Roll Select When roll paper that does not support large copy/large scan is loaded, this option is
Roll 2 not displayed.
Manual 25 to 400% Choose whether to set the copy scaling manually (Manual) or zoom automatically in
Scaling
Auto accordance with the width of the loaded roll paper (Auto).
Color Choose whether to copy a color document and print it with colors or in black and
Large Copy / Large Color/Grayscale
Copy Settings Grayscale white.
Scan
Text/Line Drawing
Tracing Paper
Document Type Recycled Paper Select the type in accordance with the loaded document.
Blueprint
Poster


Auto
ISO A, US-ANSI, The default setting of Auto is recommended in most situations. Note that, depending
US-ARCH, JIS B, on the document, it may not be possible to detect the width correctly even when the
Width ISO B setting is Auto. In such cases, change from the standard size and specify a width of
cm your choosing.
inch
Speed Choose the quality of copying and printing.
Quality Fine prioritizes quality so the print speed is slower.
Copy Settings Fine
The selectable options vary with the Document Type setting.
Density Level -3 to 3 Set the copy density. Negative values (-) are lighter, and positive values (+) is darker.
Contrast Level -3 to 3 Set the contrast. Negative values (-) are weaker, and positive values (+) are stronger.
Set the adjustment value for the background. Configure this setting when you are
copying documents with colors or documents that are thin, or when removing
Background Level -3 to 3
unwanted backgrounds. Negative values (-) are weaker, and positive values (+) are
stronger.
Large Copy / Large
Scan Sharpness Level -3 to 3 Set the sharpness. Negative values (-) are weaker, and positive values (+) are stronger.
Color Choose whether to scan colored documents with colors or convert to black and white
Color/Grayscale
Grayscale and then scan.
Text/Line Drawing
Tracing Paper
Document Type Recycled Paper Select the type in accordance with the loaded document.
Blueprint
Scan Setting*1
Poster
Auto
ISO A, US-ANSI, The default setting of Auto is recommended in most situations. Note that, depending
US-ARCH, JIS B, on the document, it may not be possible to detect the width correctly even when the
Width ISO B setting is Auto. In such cases, change from the standard size and specify a width of
cm your choosing.
inch


JPEG Select the file format for scanned images. When Resolution is Direct Print (360dpi),
Save Image Type
PDF only JPEG is available.
Direct Print (360dpi)

200 dpi Choose the resolution for scanning.
Resolution When Direct Print (360dpi) is selected, you can print scanned image files directly. If
300 dpi
you choose a resolution other than Direct Print (360dpi), open Scan File Options,
400 dpi perform Send To Shared Folder, and print on a computer via an application.
600 dpi
High
Large Copy / Large
Scan Setting*1 File Size Compression Normal Choose the compression rate when saving scanned images.
Scan
Low
Choose the density for scanning. Negative values (-) are lighter, and positive values
Density Level -3 to 3
(+) is darker.
Contrast Level -3 to 3 Set the contrast. Negative values (-) are weaker, and positive values (+) are stronger.
Set the adjustment value for the background. Configure this setting when you are
scanning documents with colors or documents that are thin, or when removing
Background Level -3 to 3
unwanted backgrounds. Negative values (-) are weaker, and positive values (+) are
stronger.
Sharpness Level -3 to 3 Set the sharpness. Negative values (-) are weaker, and positive values (+) are stronger.

1.5.3 Serviceman Mode

The Serviceman Mode is intended to be used by a service person for servicing the printer.
HOW TO START & QUIT
1. Turn the printer on by pressing the [Menu], [Back], and [OK] buttons together.
2. Turn the printer off to quit the Serviceman Mode.
SERVICEMAN MODE MENU LIST
Menu
Explanation
Class 1 2 3
Paper Adjusts the detection accuracy of the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR.
Rear AD Adjusts the AD value of the PE Sensor.
CR Un Cap Unlocks or re-locks the carriage and uncaps/re-caps the Print Head.
Red
LCD RGB Check Green Checks the operation of the LCD.
Mecha Adjustment Blue
Panel Check Checks the operation of the buttons and the LEDs.
Sensor Check ILS
PPK Sensor Check
Checks the operation of sensors.
WPPK Sensor Check
WRoll Pull Out Sensor

Menu
Explanation
Class 1 2 3
PG--
PG-
PG PGtyp
PG+
PG++
400 CPS
H to F Speed 500 CPS
Life CR Used only in manufacturing processes. Not used in service operations.
240 CPS
400 CPS
F to H Speed 500 CPS
240 CPS
Page Size
Fan
Life Count

Menu
Explanation
Class 1 2 3
Feed Amount 1
PS1
PS2
Feed Speed 1
PS3
PS4
Feed Amount 2
PF PS1
PS2
Feed Speed 2
PS3
PS4
Wait
Fan
Life Count
Life Wait1 Used only in manufacturing processes. Not used in service operations.
RLS Wait2
Life Count
PG--
PG-
PG PGtyp
APG PG+
PG++
Wait
Life Count
Length
Return Length
Cutter
Wait
Life Count

Menu
Explanation
Class 1 2 3
Feed Amount
Feed Speed KS2/KS3
Roll LD
Wait
Life Count
Direction CW/CCW
Wait 1
Roll RLS
Wait 2
Life Count
Feed Amount
Life Used only in manufacturing processes. Not used in service operations.
Feed Speed WKS2/WKS3
WRoll LD
Wait
Life Count
Direction CW/CCW
Wait 1
Roll RLS
Wait 2
Life Count
PP change
Display Count

CHAPTER
2
TROUBLE SHOOTING

2.1 Overview 2.1.1.3 Recurrence check of the trouble

Check if the trouble the user claims recurs with the returned printer.
This section explains the basic procedure for troubleshooting problems on the printer
quickly and efficiently.  If RIP was used, check if the trouble recurs when the driver is used.
When carrying out the troubleshooting procedures, take a flexible measure following  If 3rd party's media were used, check if the trouble recurs when a genuine
your sales company's policy and considering the troubling situation. medium is used.
 If 3rd party's ink was used, perform the repair according to the policy of each
2.1.1 Preliminary Check local sales subsidiary.
Make sure to verify or perform the following basic items whenever servicing the  If the F/W was not the latest, gain agreement with the user on the update of F/
printer. W, and check if the trouble recurs when the latest F/W is used.
2.1.1.1 Before performing troubleshooting 2.1.1.4 Check for the counter values/history
Download NVRAM and check the following with NVRAM Viewer. (For the check
Before troubleshooting, perform basic checks such as connection check of the power
method, see P.315.)
cable and installation check of the ink cartridges.
 Counter history of the periodic replacement parts. (if any part's life is near.)
2.1.1.2 Check for the usage environment  Printer's operating history (if any cause for the trouble exists)
Check the user's usage environment.
 Error history (the frequency/history of errors related with the trouble)
 Temperature/humidity of the installation site
(For the guaranteed environment, see P.13.) 2.1.1.5 Test print check
 Drivers/RIP that the user uses For the trouble related with print quality, carry out “Test Print” and check the current
 Genuine media or 3rd party's media? adjustment status. (For the procedure of test print, see P.323.)
 Genuine ink or 3rd party's ink?

 F/W version (the latest?)
 Check also the following if necessary.
Phenomenon Check Item

The installation site inclined?
Any vibrating equipment near the site?
Bad print quality The user's panel settings
Is the interior dirty?
Clean it if dirty.
Missing dots/bad print quality Near a conditioner's ventilation duct?
TROUBLE SHOOTING Overview 59

2.1.2 Troubleshooting Procedure 2.1.3.2 If necessary to escalate the trouble case

Refer to the following items according to the observed symptom, carry out the Make a report with the following data.
corresponding troubleshooting following the procedures described in the next sections.  Backed-up NVRAM data
1. Trouble with a Maintenance Request or Service Call Error. (See P.61, P. 63)  Firmware version
2. Trouble on print quality (See P.88)
3. Trouble on paper feeding (See P.91)  Service program version
4. Other troubles (See P.92)  For bad print quality: a print sample with the marked symptom and a printed
5. Trouble on Service Program (See P.93) test pattern.
6. Trouble on NVRAM Viewer (See P.94)
 For faulty parts: the faulty parts themselves and a photos of the troubling
section.
2.1.3 Procedure after troubleshooting  Information on the user/the repair listed below
This is a format of the escalation report. At least check out the items on the
2.1.3.1 If the trouble has been successfully solved list and register the case in the escalation system.
 Check if the movement of the covers is normal (without any damage, noises).
If any abnormality is found, lubricate or replace the faulty parts. • Model name
• Serial number
 Carry out the cleaning after repair. • With or without options
 Prepare a report on the repair. (follow your company/local office's policy.) • Content of the claim from the user
• Date of occurrence
• Trouble occurrence conditions/recurrence method
• What the service person actually observed
(Check items before check, the content of troubleshooting and repair.)
• Date of escalation
• Purpose of escalation
(Measures which the user/service person)
• Degree of urgency (S/A/B/C)
S: High (those which may cause a death, ignition, etc.)
A: Problems, bugs
B: Strong request
C: Inquiry
• Deadline for the response
• Repair history
• Part-replacement history
TROUBLE SHOOTING Overview 60

2.2 Remedies for Maintenance Requests

Maintenance call (Maintenance request) number is a character string written in hexadecimal code displayed on the screen when the maintenance request/maintenance error occurred.
Value obtained from the logical sum of the items assigned to each bit in the table below is used.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Maintenance Requests 61

Table 2-1. Maintenance call list

Bit assignment (binary code) hexadecimal
Maintenance name
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 code
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 00000001 INK TUBE life near end
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 00000002 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 00000004 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 00000008 Out of RTC battery
Near life end or other maintenance

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 00000010 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 00000020 PUMP CAP UNIT life near end
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000040 -
IC HOLDER (pump in ink path)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000080
life near end
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000100 RTC date not set
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000200 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000400 DAMPER KIT life near end
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000800 -
IC HOLDER (waste ink pad)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001000
near end
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00002000 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00004000 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00008000 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00010000 INK TUBE life end
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00020000 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00040000 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00080000 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00100000 -
Life end (life lengthening)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00200000 PUMP CAP UNIT life end

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00400000 -
IC HOLDER (pump in ink path)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00800000
life end
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01000000 -
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 02000000 -
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 04000000 DAMPER KIT life end
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 08000000 -
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10000000 IC HOLDER (waste ink pad) end
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20000000 -
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40000000 -
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 80000000 -
Note : Ex): When “Maintenance Request 00000108” is displayed.
As “00000108” in hexadecimal means “0000000000000000100001000” in binary, you can find out the code is assigned to Bit-3 and Bit-8 referring to the above table. In
this case, two errors are occurring simultaneously. (Bit-3: Out of RTC battery/ Bit-8: RTC date not set)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Maintenance Requests 62

2.3 Remedies for Service Call Error

The following tables explains the Service Call error messages and remedies.
Table 2-2. Service Call Error

Code Category Error Name Cause Check Item Remedy
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
0001 EMG NMI error CPU detects NMI. ---
P.144)
0002 EMG System error --- ---
P.144)
CR scan pass counter has reached the specified Replace the INK TUBES (See
1101 INK TUBE CR life error value. (which means the INK TUBES have --- P.203) and reset the counter of the
reached the end of their service life.) INK TUBE (See P.324).
1. Replace the CR HP SENSOR.
The CR HP SENSOR cannot detect the CR UNIT. (See P.192)
Or the CR UNIT cannot detect the touching 1. Is the CR HP SENSOR out of order? Does the light shielding 2. Re-install the CR ENCODER.
surface for the home position setting, so the home plate react to the sensor? If it is faulty, replace it. (See
position cannot be set. 2. Is there any paper jammed inside the printer? P.187)
CR HP detection
1125 CR  CR HP SENSOR failure 3. Does the CR SCALE have any scratches or dirt? 3. Clean the CR SCALE using
error
 False detection of the home due to paper jam or 4. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the ethanol.
any other obstacle Service Program. 4. Replace the CR SCALE. (See
 Misreading of CR SCALE 5. Does the CR Lock function normally? P.182)
 CR Lock is damaged. 5. Replace the CR Lock (PUMP
CAP UNIT). (See P.196)
 Connection failure of the CR MOTOR or the
CR ENCODER. 1. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the
 The number of occurrences of overcurrent to connections below? 1. Replace the CR ENCODER.
the CR MOTOR has reached a predetermined  CR ENCODER to SUB BOARD (CN102) (See P.187)
1138 CR Over current error limit.  CR MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN19) 2. Replace the CR MOTOR. (See
 Irregular load 2. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the P.190)
 CR ENCODER failure Service Program.
 CR MOTOR failure
1. Remove the foreign material.
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the CR 1. Is the CR MOTOR driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1139 CR Oscillation error
MOTOR driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the CR MOTOR driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See
P.144)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Service Call Error 63


1. Check if the CR UNIT is attached correctly.
Overcurrent to the CR MOTOR was detected. 2. Is there any foreign materials on the CR UNIT drive path? 1. Re-install the CR UNIT. (See
 CR ENCODER cable is damaged. 3. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the P.207)
 CR MOTOR cable is damaged. connections below? 2. Replace the CR ENCODER.
113A CR Overload error
 Irregular load  CR ENCODER to SUB BOARD (CN102) (See P.187)
 CR ENCODER failure  CR MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN19) 3. Replace the CR MOTOR. (See
 CR MOTOR failure 4. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the P.190)
Service Program.
The CR MOTOR was driven at a speed faster than 1. Replace the CR ENCODER.
a predetermined one during deceleration. (See P.187)
 Irregular load Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the 2. Replace the SUB BOARD. (See
113B CR Over speed error
 CR ENCODER failure Service Program. P.147)
 SUB BOARD is damaged. 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 CR MOTOR driver failure (See P.144)
The number of occurrences of reversing the CR 1. Check the following connection and installation direction.
MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit.
 CR ENCODER to SUB BOARD (CN102) 1. Adjust the tension of the CR
 The polarity of CR ENCODER cable is
 CR MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN19) TIMING BELT. (See P.188)
113C CR Reversing error opposite.
2. Check if the tension of the CR TIMING BELT is proper. 2. Replace the CR ENCODER.
 The polarity of CR MOTOR cable is opposite.
3. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the (See P.187)
 Slipping of the teeth of CR TIMING BELT
 CR ENCODER failure Service Program.
Abnormally-long driving duration of the CR

Driving time-out MOTOR was detected. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
113D CR ---
error  Irregular load P.144)
 Firmware becomes out of control.
The CR MOTOR was driven at a speed 1. Replace the CR ENCODER.
abnormally faster than a predetermined one during (See P.187)
acceleration or deceleration. 2. Replace the CR MOTOR. (See
Velocity deviation  Irregular load Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the P.190)
113E CR
error  CR ENCODER failure Service Program. 3. Replace the SUB BOARD. (See
 CR MOTOR failure P.147)
 SUB BOARD is damaged. 4. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 CR MOTOR driver failure (See P.144)


The CR MOTOR was driven at a speed 1. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the
abnormally slower than a predetermined one connections below?
during operation. 1. Replace the CR ENCODER.
 CR ENCODER to SUB BOARD (CN102)
 CR ENCODER cable is damaged. (See P.187)
113F CR Lock error  CR MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN19)
 CR MOTOR cable is damaged. 2. Replace the CR MOTOR. (See
2. Check if the tension of the CR TIMING BELT is proper.
 Irregular load P.190)
 CR ENCODER failure 3. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the
 CR MOTOR failure
Service Program.

The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the PF 1. Is the PF MOTOR driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1229 PF Oscillation error
MOTOR driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the PF MOTOR driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See
P.144)
Overcurrent to the PF MOTOR was detected.
 PF ENCODER cable is damaged. 1. Replace the PF ENCODER.
 PF MOTOR cable is damaged. Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the (See P.217)
122A PF Overload error
 Irregular load Service Program. 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 PF ENCODER failure (See P.144)
 PF MOTOR failure
The PF MOTOR was driven at a speed faster than 1. Replace the PF ENCODER.
a predetermined one during deceleration. (See P.217)
 PF irregular load Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the 2. Replace the SUB-B BOARD.
122B PF Over speed error
 PF ENCODER failure Service Program. (See P.149)
 SUB-B BOARD is damaged. 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 PF MOTOR driver failure (See P.144)
The number of occurrences of reversing the PF 1. Check the following connection and installation direction.
MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit.
 PF ENCODER to SUB-B BOARD (CN2) 1. Adjust the tension of the PF
 The polarity of PF ENCODER cable is
 PF MOTOR to SUB-B BOARD (CN1) TIMING BELT. (See P.219)
122C PF Reversing error opposite.
2. Check if the tension of the PF TIMING BELT is proper. 2. Replace the PF ENCODER.
 The polarity of PF MOTOR cable is opposite.
3. Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the (See P.217)
 Slipping of the teeth of PF TIMING BELT
 PF ENCODER failure Service Program.
Abnormally-long driving duration of the PF

122D PF ---


The PF MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally
faster than a predetermined one during 1. Replace the PF ENCODER.
acceleration or deceleration. (See P.217)
Velocity deviation  Irregular load Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the 2. Replace the PF MOTOR. (See
122E PF
error  PF ENCODER failure Service Program. P.214)
 PF MOTOR failure 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 SUB BOARD is damaged. (See P.144)
 PF MOTOR driver failure
The PF MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally
1. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the
slower than a predetermined one during operation.
connections below? 1. Replace the PF ENCODER.
 PF ENCODER cable disconnection
 PF ENCODER to SUB-B BOARD (CN2) (See P.217)
122F PF Lock error  PF MOTOR cable disconnection
 PF MOTOR to SUB-B BOARD (CN1) 2. Replace the PF MOTOR. (See
 Irregular load
2. Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the P.214)
 PF ENCODER failure
Service Program.
 PF MOTOR failure
1. Turn the power off and then back on. Does the printer recover 1. Replace the HEAD FFC. (See
Head driver
The temperature of the Head driver rises, and has from the error? P.163)
131B --- (transmission gate)
reached a predetermined limit. 2. Is the FFC connected to the connector properly without being 2. Replace the PRINT HEAD.
overheat error
tilted? (See P.161)
The number of PUMP CAP UNIT operation has Replace the PUMP CAP UNIT
1412 PUMP Pump life error reached the specified limit. (The rotation of the --- (See P.196), and reset its counter
pump motor has reached the specified limit.) (See P.324).
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connection
Undetermined Replace the PUMP CAP UNIT
1416 PUMP PUMP CAP UNIT failure below?
position error (See P.196).
 PUMP CAP UNIT to MAIN BOARD (CN14)
 Connection failure of the pump motor or the
pump motor encoder.
 The number of occurrences of overcurrent to Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections
the pump motor has reached a predetermined Replace the pump motor encoder
below?
1418 PUMP Overcurrent error limit. and pump motor (PUMP CAP
 Pump motor (pump motor encoder) to MAIN BOARD
UNIT). (See P.196)
 Irregular load (CN14).
 pump motor encoder failure
 pump motor failure
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the pump 1. Is the pump motor driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1419 PUMP Oscillation error
motor driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the pump motor driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See
P.144)


Overcurrent to the pump motor was detected.
 Pump motor encoder cable disconnection Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections
Replace the pump motor encoder
 Pump motor cable disconnection below?
141A PUMP Overload error and pump motor (PUMP CAP
 Irregular load  Pump motor (pump motor encoder) to MAIN BOARD
UNIT). (See P.196)
 Pump motor encoder failure (CN14)
 Pump motor failure
The pump motor was driven at a speed faster than 1. Replace the pump motor
a predetermined one during deceleration. encoder (PUMP CAP UNIT).
141B PUMP Over speed error  Irregular load --- (See P.196)
 Pump motor encoder failure 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 Pump motor driver failure (See P.144)
The number of occurrences of reversing the pump
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections
motor has reached a predetermined limit.
below? Replace the pump motor encoder
141C PUMP Reversing error  The polarity of pump motor encoder cable is
 Pump motor (pump motor encoder) to MAIN BOARD (PUMP CAP UNIT). (See P.196)
opposite.
(CN14)
 The polarity of pump motor cable is opposite.
Abnormally-long driving duration of the pump
Driving time-out motor was detected. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
141D PUMP ---
The pump motor was driven at a speed abnormally
faster than a predetermined one during 1. Replace the pump motor
acceleration or deceleration. encoder and pump motor
Velocity deviation (PUMP CAP UNIT). (See
141E PUMP  Irregular load ---
error P.196)
 Pump motor encoder failure
2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
(See P.144)
 Pump motor driver failure
The pump motor was driven at a speed abnormally
slower than a predetermined one during operation. Replace the pump motor encoder
below?
141F PUMP Lock error  Irregular load and pump motor (PUMP CAP
 Pump motor (pump motor encoder) to MAIN BOARD
 Pump motor encoder failure UNIT). (See P.196)
(CN14)
Life of the Holder
The number of replacement counter of the ink Replace the IC HOLDER. (See
Holder Ink Ink Pad (IC
1430 cartridges has reached the specified life. (the life --- P.199) and reset its counter (See
Pad HOLDER life
of the waste ink pad attached to the IC HOLDER) P.324).
error)


Life of the pump in The number of IC HOLDER operation has
Replace the IC HOLDER. (See
Pump in the the ink path (IC reached the specified limit. (The motion of the
14B0 --- P.199) and reset its counter (See
ink path HOLDER life pump in the ink path has reached the specified
P.324).
error) limit.)
Replace the DAMPER KIT (See
DAMPER DAMPER KIT The DAMPER KIT has reached its end of
14C0 --- P.155) and reset its counter (See
KIT error specified life.
P.324).
1. Replace the PG SENSOR. (See
P.195)
1. Is the PG SENSOR out of order? Does the light shielding
plate react to the sensor? 2. Replace the APG UNIT. (See
P.193)
PG position When changing the PG, the PG SENSOR could 2. Do the planetary gearing work normally? (Do the planet gears
150C PG 3. Remove any obstacles around
undetectable error not detect the PG position. and outer gears properly engage with each other?)
the CR UNIT home position.
3. Is the CR UNIT out of its home position? (Do the planet gears
The printer changes the PG with
and outer gears properly engage with each other?)
the CR UNIT being at its home
position.
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the APG 1. Is the APG motor driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1519 APG Oscillation error
motor driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the APG motor driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See
P.144)
 Connection failure of the APG motor.
 Overcurrent to the APG motor was detected.
 APG motor cable is damaged. Replace the APG UNIT. (See
151A APG Overload error below?
 Irregular load P.193)
 APG motor (APG encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
 APG encoder failure
 APG motor failure
The APG motor was driven at a speed faster than a
predetermined one during deceleration. 1. Replace APG UNIT. (See
P.193)
151B APG Over speed error  Irregular load ---
 APG encoder failure
(See P.144)
 APG motor driver failure
The number of occurrences of reversing the APG
motor has reached a predetermined limit.
151C APG Reversing error below? Replace APG UNIT. (See P.193)
 The polarity of APG motor cable is opposite.
 APG motor (APG encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
 APG motor failure
Detects that the driving period is irregularly long.
Driving time-out Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
151D APG  Irregular load ---
error P.144)


The APG motor was driven at a speed abnormally
faster than a predetermined one during
acceleration or deceleration. 1. Replace APG UNIT. (See
Velocity deviation P.193)
151E APG  Irregular load ---
error 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 APG encoder failure
(See P.144)
 APG motor failure
 APG motor driver failure
 Connection failure of the APG motor.
 The APG motor was driven at a speed
abnormally slower than a predetermined one Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections
151F APG Lock error during operation. below? Replace APG UNIT. (See P.193)
 Irregular load  APG motor (APG encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
 APG encoder failure
 APG motor failure
 Connection failure of the PE SENSOR (Roll
1. Is there any problems such as damaged cable or connection
Paper).
failures in the PE SENSOR (Roll Paper)? (CN17) Replace the PE SENSOR (Roll
1523 ROLL Roll sensor error  The lever of the PE SENSOR (Roll Paper) does
2. Does the lever of the PE SENSOR (Roll Paper) move Paper). (See P.227)
not work correctly or dropped off.
correctly?
 PE SENSOR (Roll Paper) failure
1. Is the 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR driver on the MAIN 1. Remove the foreign material.
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the 1st BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1529 ROLL Oscillation error
PAPER FEED MOTOR driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the 1st PAPER FEED the MAIN BOARD. (See
MOTOR driver? P.144)
 Connection failure of the 1st PAPER FEED
MOTOR.
 Overcurrent to the1st PAPER FEED MOTOR
was detected. Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
below? Replace the 1st PAPER FEED
152A ROLL Overload error  1st PAPER FEED MOTOR cable is
damaged.  1st PAPER FEED MOTOR (1st PAPER FEED MOTOR MOTOR. (See P.238)
Encoder) (CN15)
 Irregular load
 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure
 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR failure
The 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR was driven at a
speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one 1. Replace the 1st PAPER FEED
during acceleration or deceleration. MOTOR. (See P.238)
152B ROLL Over speed error ---
 Irregular load 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure (See P.144)


The number of occurrences of reversing the 1st
PAPER FEED MOTOR has reached a Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
predetermined limit. below? Replace the 1st PAPER FEED
152C ROLL Reversing error
 The polarity of 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR  1st PAPER FEED MOTOR (1st PAPER FEED MOTOR MOTOR. (See P.238)
encoder cable is opposite. Encoder) (CN15)
Abnormally-long driving duration of the 1st
Driving time-out PAPER FEED MOTOR was detected. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
152D ROLL ---
The1st PAPER FEED MOTOR was driven at a
speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one
during acceleration or deceleration. 1. Replace the 1st PAPER FEED
Velocity deviation MOTOR. (See P.238)
152E ROLL  Irregular load ---
 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure
(See P.144)
 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR failure
 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Driver failure
 Connection failure of the 1st PAPER FEED
MOTOR or the CR ENCODER.
 The 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR was driven at a Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
speed abnormally slower than a predetermined below? Replace the 1st PAPER FEED
152F ROLL Lock error one during operation.  1st PAPER FEED MOTOR (1st PAPER FEED MOTOR MOTOR. (See P.238)
 Irregular load Encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN15).
 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure
1. Is the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR driver on the MAIN 1. Remove the foreign material.
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the
Driven BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1539 Oscillation error PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR driver has shorted
roller 2. Is there any foreign materials around the PRESSURE the MAIN BOARD. (See
out.
ROLLER MOTOR driver? P.144)
Overcurrent to the PRESSURE ROLLER
MOTOR was detected.
 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR cable is
damaged. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections
Driven  PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR cable is below? Replace the PRESSURE
153A Overload error
roller damaged.  PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR (PRESSURE ROLLER ROLLER MOTOR. (See P.222)
 Irregular load SENSOR) to MAIN BOARD (CN14)
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR encoder
failure
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR failure


The PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR was driven at
a speed faster than a predetermined one during 1. Replace the PRESSURE
deceleration. ROLLER SENSOR. (See
Driven
153B Over speed error --- P.224)
roller  Irregular load
 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR failure
(See P.144)
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR driver failure
The number of occurrences of reversing the
PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR has reached a
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections Replace the PRESSURE
predetermined limit.
Driven below? ROLLER MOTOR encoder cable/
153C Reversing error  The polarity of PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR
roller  PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR (PRESSURE ROLLER PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR.
encoder cable is opposite.
MOTOR encoder cable) to SUB-B BOARD (CN5) (See P.222)
 The polarity of PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR
cable is opposite.
Abnormally-long driving duration of the
Driven Driving time-out PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR was detected. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
153D ---
roller error  Irregular load P.144)
a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined 1. Replace the PRESSURE
one during acceleration or deceleration. ROLLER MOTOR encoder
Driven Velocity deviation  Irregular load cable/PRESSURE ROLLER
153E --- MOTOR. (See P.222)
roller error  PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR encoder
failure 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR failure (See P.144)
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR driver failure
a speed abnormally slower than a predetermined
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections Replace the PRESSURE
one during operation.
Driven below? ROLLER MOTOR encoder cable/
153F Lock error  Irregular load
roller  PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR (PRESSURE ROLLER PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR.
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR encoder
MOTOR encoder cable) to SUB-B BOARD (CN5) (See P.222)
failure
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR failure
The home position of the Cutter is not detected.
 Operation failure due to paper jam 1. Is there any paper jammed around the CUTTER UNIT?
Cutter HP  Connection failure of the CUTTER HOME 2. Is there any problems such as damaged cable or connection Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See
1540 Cutter
detection error POSITION SENSOR. failures in the CUTTER HOME POSITION SENSOR? P.247)
 CUTTER HOME POSITION SENSOR failure (CN16)
 CUTTER MOTOR failure


The Cutter cannot return to its home position.
Is there any problems such as damaged cable or connection Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See
1541 Cutter Cutter return error  Slipping of the teeth of the Cutter Timing Belt
failures in the CUTTER HOME POSITION SENSOR? (CN16) P.247)
 CUTTER HOME POSITION SENSOR failure
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the cutter 1. Is the cutter motor driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1548 Cutter Oscillation error
motor driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the cutter motor driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See
P.144)
 Connection between the SUB-B BOARD and
the MAIN BOARD has an abnormality.
Motor  The CUTTER UNIT operation is not detected.
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connection
 Irregular load
Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See
1549 Cutter disconnection below?
P.247)
error  CUTTER MOTOR Assy cable is damaged.  CUTTER MOTOR Assy to MAIN BOARD (CN4, CN301)
 CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure.
 CUTTER MOTOR failure
Overcurrent to the CUTTER MOTOR was
detected.
 CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER cable is Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections
damaged. below? Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See
154A Cutter Overload error
 CUTTER MOTOR cable is damaged.  CUTTER MOTOR (CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER) to P.247)
 Irregular load SUB-B BOARD (CN4)
 CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure
The CUTTER MOTOR was driven at a speed 1. Replace the CUTTER UNIT.
faster than a predetermined one during (See P.247)
deceleration. 2. Replace the SUB-B BOARD.
154B Cutter Over speed error ---
 Irregular load (See P.149)
 CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 CUTTER MOTOR driver failure (See P.144)
The number of occurrences of reversing the
CUTTER MOTOR has reached a predetermined
limit.
below? Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See
154C Cutter Reversing error  The polarity of CUTTER MOTOR
 CUTTER MOTOR (CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER) to P.247)
ENCORDER cable is opposite.
SUB-B BOARD (CN4)
 The polarity of CUTTER MOTOR cable is
opposite.


Abnormally-long driving duration of the CUTTER
154D Cutter ---
The CUTTER MOTOR was driven at a speed
1. Replace the CUTTER UNIT.
abnormally faster than a predetermined one during
(See P.247)
acceleration or deceleration.
Velocity deviation 2. Replace the SUB-B BOARD.
154E Cutter  Irregular load ---
error (See P.149)
 CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure
(See P.144)
 CUTTER MOTOR driver failure
The CUTTER MOTOR was driven at a speed
during operation. below? Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See
154F Cutter Lock error
 Irregular load  Cutter motor (CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER) to SUB-B P.247)
 CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure BOARD (CN4)
 During detection of paper thickness, the
thickness cannot be determined because the 1. Check if the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR is secured
Paper Thickness sensor is not stable due to vibration or the like. firmly. Replace the PAPER THICKNESS
1551 Sensor
Sensor error  The PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR is 2. Check if the cable of the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR is SENSOR. (See P.230)
damaged and cannot detect the paper thickness routed correctly and secured with hooks(CN16).
correctly.
1. Check if the paper with the thickness more than 2.2mm is
Paper thickness at At power-on, the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR loaded. Replace the PAPER THICKNESS
1561 ---
power-on error detects more than 2.2mm paper thickness. 2. Check and adjust the position of PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR. (See P.230)
SENSOR. (See P.363)
1. Is the ATC MOTOR driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged?
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the ATC 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1599 ATC Oscillation error 2. Is there any foreign materials around the ATC MOTOR
MOTOR driver has shorted out. the MAIN BOARD. (See
driver?
P.144)
Overcurrent to the ATC MOTOR was detected.
 ATC MOTOR cable disconnection. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections
Replace the ATC MOTOR. (See
159A ATC Overload error  Irregular load below?
P.226)
 ATC MOTOR encoder failure  ATC MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
 ATC MOTOR failure


The ATC MOTOR was driven at a speed faster
1. Replace the ATC MOTOR.
than a predetermined one during deceleration.
(See P.226)
159B ATC Over speed error  Irregular load ---
 ATC MOTOR encoder failure
(See P.144)
 APG MOTOR driver failure
The number of occurrences of reversing the ATC
MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections
Replace the ATC MOTOR. (See
159C ATC Reversing error  The polarity of ATC MOTOR cable is below?
P.226)
opposite.  ATC MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
Abnormally-long driving duration of the ATC
159D ATC ---
The ATC MOTOR was driven at a speed
acceleration or deceleration. 1. Replace the ATC MOTOR.
Velocity deviation (See P.226)
159E ATC  Irregular load ---
 ATC MOTOR encoder failure
(See P.144)
 ATC MOTOR driver failure
 Connection failure of the ATC MOTOR.
 The ATC MOTOR was driven at a speed
during operation. Replace the ATC MOTOR. (See
159F ATC Lock error below?
P.226)
 Irregular load  ATC MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
 ATC MOTOR encoder failure
 ATC MOTOR failure
When detecting the origin of the PPK, the status of
1. Replace the 1st PPK
the sensor and the current PPK Unit’s position do
1. Check if any disconnection, damages or broken cables in the RELEASE SENSOR A or B.
not match.
ROLL Release 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A or B connection. (See P.241)
15B1 PPK  Connection failure of the 1st PPK RELEASE
error 2. Check if any disconnection, damage or broken cable in the 1st 2. Replace the 1st PPK
SENSOR A or B
PPK RELEASE MOTOR. RELEASE MOTOR. (See
 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A or B failure
P.240)
 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
1. Is the 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR driver on the MAIN 1. Remove the foreign material.
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the 1st PPK BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
15B9 PPK Oscillation error
RELEASE MOTOR driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the 1st PPK RELEASE the MAIN BOARD. (See


 Connection failure of the 1st PPK RELEASE
MOTOR.
 Overcurrent to the 1st PPK RELEASE
MOTOR was detected. Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR cable is below? Replace the 1st PPK RELEASE
15BA PPK Overload error damaged.  1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR (1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR MOTOR. (See P.240)
 Irregular load Encoder) to MAIN BORARD (CN15)
 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder
failure
 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
The 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR was driven at a
1. Replace the 1st PPK
RELEASE MOTOR. (See
during acceleration or deceleration.
15BB PPK Over speed error --- P.240)
 Irregular load
 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder failure
(See P.144)
 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR driver failure
The number of occurrences of reversing the 1st
PPK RELEASE MOTOR has reached a Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
predetermined limit. below? Replace the 1st PPK RELEASE
15BC PPK Reversing error
 The polarity of 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR is  1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR (1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR MOTOR. (See P.240)
opposite. Encoder) to MAIN BORARD (CN15)
 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
Abnormally-long driving duration of the 1st PPK
Driving time-out RELEASE MOTOR was detected. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
15BD PPK ---
 Firmware becomes out of control
The 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR was driven at a
during acceleration or deceleration.
Velocity deviation  Irregular load Replace the 1st PPK RELEASE
15BE PPK ---
error  1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder MOTOR. (See P.240)
failure
 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR driver failure


When detecting the origin of the 2nd PPK, the 1. Replace the 2nd PPK
status of the sensor and the current PPK Unit’s 1. Check if any disconnection, damages or broken cables in the RELEASE SENSOR A or B.
WROLL release position do not match. 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A or B connection. (See P.241)
15C1 WPPK
error  Connection failure of the 2nd PPK RELEASE 2. Check if any disconnection, damage or broken cable in the 2. Replace the 2nd PPK
SENSOR A or B 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR. RELEASE MOTOR. (See
 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure P.240)
1. Is the 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR driver on the MAIN 1. Remove the foreign material.
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the 2nd BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
15C9 WPPK Oscillation error
PPK RELEASE MOTOR driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the 2nd PPK RELEASE the MAIN BOARD. (See
 Connection failure of the 2nd PPK RELEASE
MOTOR.
 Overcurrent to the 2nd PPK RELEASE
MOTOR was detected. Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
below?
 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR cable is Replace the 2nd PPK RELEASE
15CA WPPK Overload error damaged.  2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR (2nd PPK RELEASE
MOTOR. (See P.279)
MOTOR Encoder) to SUB-C BOARD (CN4)
 Irregular load
 SUB-C BOARD to MAIN BOARD (CN500)
 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder
failure
 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
The 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR was driven at a
speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one 1. Replace the 2nd PPK
during acceleration or deceleration. RELEASE MOTOR. (See
15CB WPPK Over speed error --- P.279)
 Irregular load
 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder failure
(See P.144)
 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
The number of occurrences of reversing the 2nd
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
PPK RELEASE MOTOR has reached a
below?
predetermined limit. Replace the 2nd PPK RELEASE
15CC WPPK Reversing error  2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR (2nd PPK RELEASE
 The polarity of 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR MOTOR. (See P.279)
MOTOR Encoder) to SUB-C BOARD (CN4)
cable is opposite.
 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
Abnormally-long driving duration of the 2nd PPK
Driving time-out RELEASE MOTOR was detected. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
15CD WPPK ---
 Firmware becomes out of control


The 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR was driven at a
speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one 1. Replace the 2nd PPK
during acceleration or deceleration. RELEASE MOTOR. (See
Velocity deviation
15CE WPPK  Irregular load --- P.279)
error
 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder failure 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure (See P.144)
 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR driver failure
 Connection failure of the 2nd PPK RELEASE
MOTOR.
 The 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR was driven Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
at a speed abnormally slower than a below?
predetermined one during operation. Replace the 2nd PPK RELEASE
15CF WPPK Lock error  2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR (2nd PPK RELEASE
MOTOR. (See P.279)
 Irregular load MOTOR Encoder) to SUB-C BOARD (CN4)
 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder  SUB-C BOARD to MAIN BOARD (CN500)
failure
 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
1. Is the 2nd ATC Motor driver on the MAIN BOARD 1. Remove the foreign material.
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the 2nd damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
15D9 WATC Oscillation error
ATC Motor driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the 2nd ATC Motor the MAIN BOARD. (See
driver? P.144)
Overcurrent to the 2nd ATC Motor was detected.
 2nd ATC Motor cable is damaged.
below? Replace the 2nd ATC Motor. (See
15DA WATC Overload error  Irregular load
 2nd ATC Motor to SUB-C BOARD (CN2) P.281)
 2nd ATC Motor Encoder failure
 2nd ATC Motor failure
The 2nd ATC Motor was driven at a speed
abnormally faster than a predetermined one during 1. Replace the 2nd ATC Motor.
acceleration or deceleration. (See P.281)
15DB WATC Over speed error ---
 Irregular load 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 2nd ATC Motor Encoder failure (See P.144)
The number of occurrences of reversing the 2nd
ATC Motor has reached a predetermined limit.
15DC WATC Reversing error  The polarity of 2nd ATC Motor cable is
opposite.


Abnormally-long driving duration of the 2nd ATC
Driving time-out Motor was detected. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
15DD WATC ---
The 2nd ATC Motor was driven at a speed
acceleration or deceleration. 1. Replace the 2nd ATC Motor.
Velocity deviation (See P.281)
15DE WATC  Irregular load ---
 2nd ATC Motor Encoder failure
(See P.144)
 2nd ATC Motor driver failure
 Connection failure of the 2nd ATC Motor.
 The 2nd ATC Motor was driven at a speed
abnormally slower than a predetermined one
15DF WATC Lock error during operation.
 Irregular load
 2nd ATC Motor Encoder failure
 2nd ATC Motor failure
1. Is there any foreign materials around the C 2nd PAPER FEED 1. Remove the foreign material.
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the 2nd MOTOR driver? 2. If the error still occurs, replace
15E9 WROLL Oscillation error
PAPER FEED MOTOR driver has shorted out. 2. Is there any foreign materials around the 2nd PAPER FEED the MAIN BOARD. (See
 Connection failure of the 2nd PAPER FEED
MOTOR.
 Overcurrent to the 2nd PAPER FEED MOTORIs there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections
was detected. below?
 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR cable is Replace the 2nd PAPER FEED
15EA WROLL Overload error  2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR (2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR
damaged. MOTOR. (See P.278)
Encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN3)
 Irregular load  SUB-C BOARD to MAIN BOARD (CN500)
 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure
 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR failure
The 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR was driven at a
speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one 1. Replace the 2nd PAPER FEED
during acceleration or deceleration. MOTOR. (See P.278)
15EB WROLL Over speed error ---
 Irregular load 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure (See P.144)
 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR failure


 The number of occurrences of reversing the 2nd
PAPER FEED MOTOR has reached a
below?
predetermined limit. Replace the 2nd PAPER FEED
15EC WROLL Reversing error  2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR (2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR
 The polarity of 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR MOTOR. (See P.278)
encoder cable is opposite.
Abnormally-long driving duration of the 2nd
Driving time-out PAPER FEED MOTOR was detected. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
15ED WROLL ---
The 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR was driven at a
during acceleration or deceleration. 1. Replace the 2nd PAPER FEED
Velocity deviation MOTOR. (See P.278)
15EE WROLL  Irregular load ---
 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure
(See P.144)
 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR driver failure
 Connection failure of the 2nd PAPER FEED
MOTOR.
 The 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR was driven at
below?
a speed abnormally slower than a Replace the 2nd PAPER FEED
15EF WROLL Lock error predetermined one during operation.  2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR (2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR
MOTOR. (See P.278)
 Irregular load
 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure
 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR failure
1. Replace the cables of the
When checking the connection of WROLL Unit,
WROLL Unit.
its connection cannot be confirmed.
2. Replace the cable that connects
 Connection failure between cable of the 1. Connection between the cables of the WROLL Unit and the
the WROLL Unit and the
WROLL Unit and the relay connector. SUB-C BOARD has an abnormality.
MAINBOARD.
WROLL Unit  Connection failure between the relay cable and 2. Connection between the cables of the WROLL Unit and the
1619 --- 3. Replace the relay cable. (See
connection error the MAIN BOARD. relay connectors has an abnormality.
P.144)
 Connection failure between the cable of the 3. Connection between the relay cables and the MAIN BOARD
WROLL Unit and the SUB-C BOARD. 4. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
has an abnormality.
(See P.144)
 MAIN BOARD failure
 SUB-C BOARD failure
5. Replace the SUB-C BOARD.
(See P.277)


If the error still occurs after
resetting the date and time,
perform the followings.
Incorrect RTC data The various absolute time settings stored on the Reset the date and time settings of the RTC using the Service
1A23 RTC 1. Replace the RTC backup
error NVRAM are abnormal. Program. (See P.367)
battery.
(See P.144)
1. Turn the power off and remove
the RTC backup battery.
2. After several seconds, re-attach
RTC Access T/O The RTC circuit on the MAIN BOARD the battery and turn the power
1A26 RTC ---
error malfunctions. back on.
3. Reset the date and time settings
of the RTC using the Service
Program. (See P.367)
 The HEAD FFC is not connected correctly. 1. Replace the HEAD FFC. (See
 A temperature out of a predetermined range Is the HEAD FFC connected properly without being connected P.163)
1A37 --- Thermistor error
was detected by the Head thermistor. at an angle and any abnormalities such as peeled terminals? 2. Replace the PRINT HEAD.
 Head thermistor failure (See P.161)
Transistor  Transistor failure
Replace the PRINT HEAD. (See
1A38 Hardware environmental  A temperature out of a predetermined range ---
P.161)
temperature error was detected by the Head thermistor.
 Connection failure of the HEAD FFC.
1. Replace the HEAD FFC. (See
 Electric parts or components are damaged due
P.163)
to improper HEAD FFC connection such as
Is the HEAD FFC connected properly without being connected 2. Replace the PRINT HEAD.
1A39 Hardware Head error connecting it at an angle.
at an angle and any abnormalities such as peeled terminals? (See P.161)
 The drive circuit in the PRINT HEAD is
damaged. 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
(See P.144)
 The fuse of the MAIN BOARD has blown.
Head rank ID An invalid Head rank ID was written to the Rewrite the Head rank ID with a
1A41 --- Check the Head rank ID using the Service Program. (See P.343)
input error NVRAM. correct one. (Page 343)
I2C
communication
An I2C communication error has occurred in the Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
1A50 Hardware error (Between ---
MAIN BOARD. P.144)
elements on ASIC
and MAIN)


1. Replace the CR FFC between
I2C the MAIN BOARD and SUB
Are the MAIN BOARD and SUB BOARD properly connected BOARD. (See P.173)
communication
An I2C communication error between the MAIN to each other without any cable disconnection, FFCs being
1A51 Hardware error (Between 2. Replace the SUB BOARD. (See
BOARD and SUB BOARD has occurred. connected at an angle, and any abnormalities such as peeled
elements on ASIC P.147)
terminals? (CN100)
and SUB) 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
(See P.144)
Conflicting option The power is turned on with the two options Use only either of the two ports
1A80 Hardware Check if both two PCIe ports are used by the options.
error inserted to both PCIe ports. for an option at a time.
Power supply voltage on the HDD Option Board
IF Option Board has dropped.
1A81 Hardware --- Replace the HDD Option Unit.
voltage drop error  Short circuit or damage of the HDD Option
Board
PS Option Board
1A82 Hardware PS Option Board failure --- Replace the PS Option Unit.
startup error
Wrong operation (Example: When the printer is
PS Option Board Check the connection between the PS Option Unit and the Turn the printer off, then connect
1A83 Hardware turned on, the PS Option Unit is removed without
connection error MAIN BOARD. the PS Option Unit again.
turning off the power.)
Power supply voltage on the PS Option Board has
PS Option Board
1A84 Hardware dropped. --- Replace the PS Unit.
voltage drop error
 Short circuit or damage of the PS Option Board
The FAN on the PS Option Board has stopped or
does not operate.
PS Option Board  A foreign object has stuck in the BOARD BOX
1A85 Hardware --- Replace the PS Unit.
FAN stop error FAN.
 BOARD BOX FAN failure
 Connection failure
PS Option Board
1A86 Hardware HDD overcurrent PS Option Board failure --- Replace the PS Unit.
error
PS Option Board
1A87 Hardware VBUS overcurrent PS Option Board failure --- Replace the PS Unit.
error
1. Replace the PW FAN. (See
The PW FAN has stopped or does not operate.
P.251)
 A foreign object has stuck in the PW FAN. 1. Check if something is stuck in the PW FAN.
1A90 Hardware Power FAN error 2. Check the connection between
 PW FAN failure 2. Connect the PW FAN cable correctly.
the BOARD BOX FAN and the
 Connection failure
MAIN BOARD (CN24).


Check the resistance between terminals of “F4” fuse on the
MAIN BOARD.
MAIN BOARD
Check Position
Check Posi-
1. If the resistance value of “F4” on the MAIN BOARD is more

than “1Ω”,
-> The fuse has blown out. It is necessary to check whether the 1. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
 CSIC control error. drive circuit in the PRINT HEAD has broken or not. (See P.144)
CSIC  The drive circuit damage in the Print Head was [Check method] 2. Replace the PRINT HEAD (See
1F80 CSIC error
control caused by the 42V fuse blue out of the Main Pull out the PRINT HEAD FFC from “CN101” on the MAIN P.161)
Board. BOARD, then check the resistance value between “15th” pin 3. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See
and “19th” pin of the FFC terminal. P.199)
-> more than “1MΩ”: Go to remedy “1”.
-> less than “1MΩ”: Go to remedy “1” and “2”.
HEAD FFC C A U T IO N
• Be careful to
handling of FFC.
15 19
• Be careful to
electrode
measurement.
2. If the resistance value of “F4” on the MAIN BOARD is less

than “1Ω”,
-> The fuse has not blowing out.
Go to remedy “3”.


1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See
CSIC P.199)
1F81 CSIC error CSIC control error ---
control 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
(See P.144)
CSIC P.199)
(See P.144)
CSIC P.199)
(See P.144)
CSIC P.199)
(See P.144)
CSIC P.199)
(See P.144)
CSIC P.199)
1FB8 CSIC error CSIC control error ---
(See P.144)
CSIC P.199)
1FB9 CSIC error CSIC control error ---
(See P.144)
CSIC P.199)
1FBE CSIC error CSIC control error ---
(See P.144)
CSIC P.199)
1FBF CSIC error CSIC control error ---
(See P.144)


CSIC P.199)
1FC0 CSIC error CSIC control error ---
(See P.144)
CSIC P.199)
(See P.144)
CSIC P.199)
(See P.144)
CSIC P.199)
(See P.144)
 Running out of disk space of the controlled
domain for print job on the optional HDD Unit.
Storage Controlled domain 1. Replace the optional HDD Unit
1FE0  Integration value of print jobs reached the ---
control full error 2. Replace the whole printer
maximum of the controlled domain on the
optional HDD Unit.
 Optional HDD Unit failure
Storage
1FE1 Invalid lock  Non-support HDD Unit was attached to the Is the attached HDD Unit guaranteed product? Replace the optional HDD Unit
control
printer
Storage Device access
1FE2 Optional HDD Unit failure --- Replace the optional HDD Unit
control error
Turn the power off and then it
 Connection failure of the optional HDD Unit
Storage Is there any problems such as damaged cable or connection back on after checking the
1FE3 Missing device  Communication error between the optional
control failures in the optional HDD Unit? connection of the optional HDD
HDD Unit and the printer Unit.
2000 Memory NVRAM error NVRAM erase or write error has occurred. ---
P.144)
 Access error to the FLASH ROM
2001 Memory FLASH ERROR  Failed mounting or damage of the FLASH ---
P.144)
ROM
Writing to the SDRAM was attempted, but Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
2002 Memory SDRAM error ---
nothing could be written to it. P.144)


1. Re-install the main firmware.
FLASH BOOT
 Installing the firmware has failed. (Page 322)
2003 Memory SUM CHECK ---
 The Flash ROM is out of order. 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
error
(See P.144)
1. Re-install the main firmware.
(Page 322)
200A Memory F/W load error Reading / decompressing the firmware has failed. ---
(See P.144)
System interrupt
A system failure such as CPU failure, or defective Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
200D System watchdog time-out ---
cash has occurred. P.144)
error
Internal timeout Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See
2030 System SoC internal failure ---
error P.144)
1. Replace the PSH BOARD. (See
The AC power has been shut off due to a power P.150)
3000 AC shut-off AC shut-off failure, unplugged, PSH BOARD failure, or Check if the Power cable is correctly connected.
MAIN BOARD failure or the like.
(See P.144)
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connection
D184 Replace the SUB BOARD. (See
Debugging Debugging error Communication error of the SUB BOARD below?
D185 P.147)
 MAIN BOARD to SUB BOARD (CN100)
D8F4 below? Replace the SUB BOARD. (See
Debugging Debugging error Communication error of the SUB BOARD
D8F5 P.147)
The program's image process error Replace the SUB BOARD. (See
D231 Debugging Debugging error below?
(May occur related to D8F4 or D8F5.) P.147)
below? Replace the SUB BOARD. (See
S241 Debugging Debugging error The program's image process error
P.147)


This error is intended to be used in the product 1. Re-install the main firmware.
Turn the power off and then turn it back on. Does the printer
Service call for development stage. It is supposed to not occur to (Page 322)
Dxxy Debugging recover from the error? (No repair work is needed unless the
FW debugging marketed products, but may occur due to an 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD.
error occurs again.)
unexpected cause such as external noises. (See P.144)
3. If not improved, escalate the
case with the information in
“Info1~Info3” displayed on the
call window.
CPU related
Fxxx CPU There is something wrong with the firmware. Is the firmware installed correct one for the printer? &DOO)RU6HUYLFH
service call 1RWHWKHIROORZLQJDQG
FDOOIRUVHUYLFH
&RGH1111
,QIR11111111
,QIR11111111
,QIR11111111
1. Check the PRESSURE MOTOR operation (After removing

the RIGHT LOWER COVER, check whether the piston
included in the IC HOLDER is moving or not during the
initialization)
1. Replace the pressure unit (IC

Check the piston
HOLDER). (See P.199)
Pressure Pressurizing The initialization process did not complete within movement from this
1620 2. If the error still occurs, replace
motor initialization error a predetermined time period. hole.
the MAIN BOARD. (See
P.144)
2. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the

connection below?
 IC HOLDER to MAIN BOARD (CN14)
the RIGHT LOWER COVER, check whether the piston 1. Replace the pressure unit (IC
Pressurizing/ included in the IC HOLDER is moving or not during the HOLDER). (See P.199)
Pressure The pressurizing and suction processes did not initialization) (See item for SC1620)
1621 Suction switching 2. If the error still occurs, replace
motor complete within a predetermined time period.
error 2. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the the MAIN BOARD. (See
connection below? P.144)


the RIGHT LOWER COVER, check whether the piston 1. Replace the pressure unit (IC
included in the IC HOLDER is moving or not during the HOLDER). (See P.199)
Pressure Operating time-out The switching operation did not complete within a initialization) (See item for SC1620)
1622 2. If the error still occurs, replace
motor error predetermined time period.
2. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the the MAIN BOARD. (See
connection below? P.144)
1. Remove the foreign materials.
1. Is the pressure motor driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged?
Pressure Continuous The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the pressure 2. If the error still occurs, replace
1623 2. Is there any foreign materials around the pressure motor
motor revolution error motor driver has shorted out. the MAIN BOARD. (See
driver?
P.144)
1. Check which life part has reached the end of life with
4000 Life parts End of life A life part has reached the end of its service life. 1. Replace the life part.
NVRAM Viewer.
Interlock switch 1. Various Service Call Errors are displayed in turn
1. Replace the INTERLOCK
**** Sensor communication Communication failure due to broken cables. inconsistently. (e.g.: 1138 => 1411 => 1418 => 150C, etc.)
SEITCH. (See P.142)
error 2. Is the cable of the INTERLOCK SWITCH broken?

2.4 Remedies for Print Quality Troubles

This section provides troubleshooting of print quality troubles classifying them by observed symptom. Before performing troubleshooting, refer to ?Nozzle Check? (p345) and print
nozzle check pattern. Examine the printed pattern, and if any missing segment is found, perform the PRINT HEAD cleaning.
Table 2-3. Print Quality Troubles

Symptom Cause Check Item Remedy
The Wiper is contaminated and wiping 1. Is the Wiper or Wiper Cleaner contaminated? 1. Clean the Wiper.
the PRINT HEAD cannot be performed
2. Is the Wiper or Wiper Cleaner damaged? 2. Replace the Wiper and Wiper Cleaner.
properly.
1. Clean the Cap.
The Head Cap is contaminated. Is the Cap contaminated? 2. Replace the Cap (PUMP CAP UNIT). (See
P.196)
There is some foreign material on the
Is there any foreign materials on the PRINT HEAD? Clean the PRINT HEAD.
PRINT HEAD.
There is something wrong in the pump
Is the pump tube being bent or getting caught between
The nozzles are still clogging after tube and the cleaning (suctioning of Route the pump tube correctly.
surrounding parts or components?
cleaning. ink) cannot be performed properly.
The ink is leaking. Is there any ink leakage observed on the ink flow paths? If any leakage is found, correct it.
There is air inside the ink path. Is there any air bubbles observed in the ink flow paths? Run a head cleaning. (Page 346)
1. Reconnect the HEAD FFC.
Is the HEAD FFC connected properly without being
The HEAD FFC is not connected
connected at an angle and any abnormalities such as peeled 2. If the trouble still occurs, the cause may be
correctly. breaking of the HEAD FFC. Replace the HEAD
terminals?
FFC. (See P.163)
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the following parts one by one.
 PRINT HEAD (See P.161)
 MAIN BOARD (The fuse may have blown) (See P.144)
Carry out the following adjustments.
 Auto Bi-D adjustment (Page 336)
Adjustment failure of the IM SENSOR ---
 Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto Adjustment
(Page 332)
Does the IM SENSOR function normally? Check it using
IM SENSOR is out of order. Replace the IM SENSOR. (See P.210)
the Service Program.
Horizontal or vertical lines look
Carry out the adjustments correctly.
misaligned.
Have the following adjustments been made properly?  Head inclination adjustment (CR direction)
The PRINT HEAD has not been
 Head inclination auto adjustment (CR direction) (Page 347)
adjusted properly.
 Head slant auto adjustment (PF direction)  Head slant adjustment (PF direction) (Page
350)
1. Is the paper thickness setting correct? 1. Correct the paper thickness setting.
Improper PG adjustment
2. Has the PG adjustment been made properly? 2. Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 339)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Print Quality Troubles 88


 Head inclination adjustment (CR direction)
The PRINT HEAD has not been
--- (Page 347)
adjusted properly.
 Head slant adjustment (PF direction) (Page
350)
Carry out the following adjustment.
 Media Feed Auto Adjustment
The paper was not fed properly. --- Check the following settings.
Bandings in the paper feeding direction.  Feed Adjustment
 Media Tension
1. Clean the PF SCALE.
1. Is the PF SCALE damaged or contaminated?
2. Reinstall the PF SCALE and PF ENCODER.
PF SCALE or PF ENCODER failure 2. Is the PF SCALE attached properly?
3. Replace the PF SCALE (See P.216) and PF
3. Is the PF ENCODER installed correctly?
ENCODER (See P.217).
The tension of the PF TIMING BELT is Correct the tension of the PF TIMING BELT.
---
not proper. (Page 357)
PF MOTOR failure --- Replace the PF MOTOR. (See P.214)
 Auto Bi-D adjustment (Page 336)
Adjustment failure of the IM SENSOR ---
 Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto Adjustment
(Page 332)
1. Is the paper thickness setting correct? 1. Correct the paper thickness setting.
Improper PG adjustment
2. Has the PG adjustment been made properly? 2. Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 339)
1. Clean the CR SCALE.
1. Is the CR SCALE damaged or contaminated?
2. Reinstall the CR SCALE and CR ENCODER.
Bandings in the carriage movement CR SCALE or CR ENCODER failure 2. Is the CR SCALE attached properly?
direction. 3. Replace the CR SCALE (See P.182) and CR
3. Is the CR ENCODER installed correctly?
The tension of the CR TIMING BELT Correct the tension of the CR TIMING BELT.
---
is not proper. (Page 328)
1. Is there any slack in the loaded paper?
 Suction setting failure 1. Make the suction setting properly.
2. Does the SUCTION FAN work normally? Check it
 SUCTION FAN failure 2. Replace the SUCTION FAN. (See P.253)
using the Service Program.
Lubrication on the CR moving parts is
Has the oil pad of the CR UNIT dried out? If the pad is dry, lubricate it. (See P.393)
insufficient.


1. Is the paper wrinkled, bent, rippled, or warped? 1. Replace the paper with a new proper one.
There is a problem with the paper used. 2. Is the paper too thick and contacting with the head? 2. Adjust the PG setting according to the paper
Printed side is smudged or smeared with 3. Is the paper too thin and loosening when being fed? thickness.
ink. Improper PG adjustment Has the PG adjustment been made properly? Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 339)
The PF (Paper Feed) Roller is
Is the PF roller smudged or smeared with ink or anything? Clean the roller. Print some blank pages to clean it.
contaminated
1. Clean the platen.
1. Is the platen contaminated with ink?
The platen is contaminated. 2. Enable (select “ON”) the Paper Size Check
The backside of paper is smudged or 2. Is the Paper Size Check function enabled?
function.
smeared with ink.
Suction Fan is making the ink mists
Is the suction level of the fan proper? Change the suction level appropriately.
drift to the back of the printing paper.
The ink in the ink cartridge is not Shake the ink cartridges so that ink droplets spread
---
Color or print density unevenness within a agitated enough. evenly inside the cartridges.
page or across pages. Deterioration of ink quality Have the installed ink cartridges expired? Replace the expired ink cartridges with new ones.
Improper PG adjustment Has the PG adjustment been made properly? Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 339)
Rewrite the Head rank ID with a correct one. (Page
Blurred print Too much ink discharge. Has the Head rank ID been written correctly?
343)
Traces of Pressure Roller are caused
Remove the paper if the printer is left for a long
because the paper had been kept set in ---
Paper dust is attached or the traces of the time.
the printer for a long time.
rollers appear.
The paper dust attached on the PF Clean the rollers. Print some blank pages to clean
Is there any paper dust attached to the PF rollers?
rollers transferred to the paper. them.

2.5 Trouble on Paper Feeding

This section describes the possible troubles on paper feeding and their causes and remedies.
Table 2-4. Trouble on Paper Feeding

Improper PE SENSOR adjustment --- Perform the Rear AD Adjustment. (Page 365)
Paper is not fed into the printer properly. Does the PE SENSOR work normally? Check it using the
PE SENSOR failure Replace the PE SENSOR. (See P.227)
Service Program.
1. Clean the PF SCALE.
1. Is the PF SCALE damaged or contaminated?
2. Reinstall the PF SCALE and PF ENCODER.
PF SCALE or PF ENCODER failure 2. Is the PF SCALE attached properly?
3. Replace the PF SCALE (See P.216) and PF
3. Is the PF ENCODER installed correctly?
Paper feeding or paper ejecting is The tension of the PF TIMING BELT is Correct the tension of the PF TIMING BELT.
---
abnormal. not proper. (Page 357)
1. Is the suction setting proper?
 Suction setting failure 1. Make the suction setting properly.
2. Does the SUCTION FAN work normally? Check it
 SUCTION FAN failure 2. Replace the SUCTION FAN.
using the Service Program.
PF rollers failure Are the PF rollers contaminated or damaged? Clean the rollers or replace them.
The Paper Skew Check function has Enable (select “ON”) the Paper Skew Check
---
been disabled. function.
The Paper Size Check function has Enable (select “ON”) the Paper Size Check
---
been disabled. function.
Does the PW SENSOR work normally? Check it using the
Paper is skewing. The PW SENSOR is not working. Replace the PW SENSOR. (See P.212)
Service Program.
Roll paper edge is attached to the take-
--- Attach the paper to the take-up reel correctly.
up reel at an angle.
The paper hold-down plate is pressing Align the holes on the plate with the edges of
---
paper too strong. paper.
Paper feed amount is not configured Perform the Media Feed Auto Adjustment. (Page
---
correctly. 360)
Actual margins differ from the specified
margins. Enable (select “ON”) the Paper Size Check
The Paper Size Check function has
--- function. (The printer is not capable of precisely
been disabled.
correcting less than 2 mm differences.)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on Paper Feeding 91

2.6 Other Troubles

Table 2-5. Other Troubles
The power cable is unplugged Is the power plug connected properly? Connect it properly.
Is the electrical outlet overloaded sharing with any other Use one electrical outlet for the printer only if
The power voltage is unstable.
electric equipment? possible.
Is there any problems in the connection between the PSH
Connection failure of the PSH BOARD Correct the problem.
BOARD and the MAIN BOARD?
The printer is not powered.
Connection failure of the PANEL Is there any problems in the connection between the
Correct the problem.
BOARD PANEL BOARD and the MAIN BOARD?
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the following parts one by one.
 AC inlet
 PSH BOARD (See P.150)
A wrong type of network cable is used. Is a crossing cable used as the network cable? Replace the cable with a straight cable.
Is there any abnormalities observed on the cable?
 Are the connectors firmly inserted?
Network cable failure  Is the cable breaking? Correct the problem.
Cannot access to the network.  Is the cable being bent or is there anything placed on the
cable?
LAN connector failure Is the connector deformed or damaged? Replace the MAIN BOARD.
The MAC address is invalid. --- Rewrite the address with a correct one. (Page 368)
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the MAIN-C BOARD. (See P.147)
The tension of the CR TIMING BELT Correct the tension of the CR TIMING BELT.
---
is not proper. (Page 328)
Lubrication of the CR UNIT and CR Does the CR UNIT move smoothly? Check it by pulling
If the unit does not move smoothly, lubricate it.
shaft is insufficient. the CR TIMING BELT.
1. Clean the CR SCALE.
The printer makes a strange noise when the 1. Is the CR SCALE damaged or contaminated?
2. Reinstall the CR SCALE and CR ENCODER.
CR is moving. CR SCALE or CR ENCODER failure 2. Is the CR SCALE attached properly?
3. Replace the CR SCALE (See P.182) and CR
3. Is the CR ENCODER installed correctly?
Unexpected tension was applied to the
Is the resin film on the CR FFC attached properly? Attach the resin film properly.
tubes.
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the CR MOTOR. (See P.190)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Other Troubles 92

2.7 Trouble on Service Program

This section describes possible troubles on Service Program and their causes and remedies.
Table 2-6. Troubles on Service Program

Are you running the program on the following operating
Run the program on the supported operating
The operating system is not supported. systems?
systems.
 Supported OS: Windows XP SP3, Windows 7
The printer is not connected to the Is there any problem with the connection between the
Connect them properly.
computer properly. printer and computer?
If the program still does not start, the program files
There is something wrong with the Try with another computer. Does the program start
Service Program does not start may be broken. Download the set of program files
program file. normally?
again.
Did you get the program through the official channel?
Registration information of the program Download the program file including security files
Check it with the license agreement displayed at the start-
is wrong. through the official channel.
up screen.
More than one printers are connected to Is there any printer connected to the USB port on the Disconnect the printer which is not necessary for
the computer. computer other than the one for adjustment? the adjustment.
 The printer is turned off.
1. Is the printer powered on? 1. Turn the printer on.
 The printer is in a status that cannot
The printer does not react to the program 2. Is there any error occurring on the printer? 2. Correct the printer errors.
accept the program command.
command.
After the USB ID is changed, the 1. Is the printer powered on?
Select the printer (USB port) correctly.
printer has not been reselected. 2. Is there any error occurring on the printer?
The printer is connected with a USB
MAC address cannot be set. --- Connect the printer with a network cable.
cable.
The selected adjustment does not
“Remove paper” error require printing, but paper is loaded on --- Remove the paper from the printer.
the printer.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on Service Program 93

2.8 Trouble on NVRAM Viewer

This section describes possible troubles on NVRAM Viewer and their causes and remedies.
Table 2-7. Trouble on NVRAM Viewer

With a text editor, open the ini file (ServPrg.ini) in the
The button to open the NVRAM Viewer is NVRAM Viewer function is set to Adjust the setting according to the policy of each
“Common” folder of the Service Program, and check the
not displayed. Hide. local sales subsidiary.
setting status of the NVRAM Viewer. (0 = Hide, 1 = Show)
The contents and the items displayed in the
The Service Program you are running is
NVRAM Viewer do not match with each Are you running the Service Program for this product? Use the proper Service Program for this product.
different one.
other.
History of the error and the counter
Click the “Send as CSV” button on the lower right
History of the error and the counter reset reset are shown only as a CSV file. It
--- NVRAM Viewer screen to output the CSV file.
are not displayed on the NVRAM Viewer. will not be shown in the Viewer,
These histories are recorded in this file.
because they have too many items.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on NVRAM Viewer 94

CHAPTER
3
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY

3.1 Overview W A R N IN G  When the PRINTR COVER is opened, a safety-interlock

mechanism causes the CR MOTOR and the PF MOTOR to
This chapter describes procedures for disassembling the main components of products. stop. When the interlock function is disabled, be sure to take
Be sure to follow the steps when disassembling the unit. safety precautions and turn the function back to enabled after
Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be reassembled by the operation.
reversing the disassembly procedure.  This printer is equipped with a lithium battery. When handling
 WARNING the lithium battery, the following precautions should be
Procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury are followed.
described under the heading “WARNING”. • When replacing the battery, replace it only with a specified
type of battery. Using a different type of battery may cause
 CAUTION excess heat or explosion.
“CAUTION” signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to Recommended battery: CR2032 (Sony)
equipment. • Dispose of used batteries according to manufacture’s
 CHECK POINT instructions and local regulations. Contact your local
Important tips for procedures are described under the heading “CHECK POINT”. government agency for information about battery disposal
and recycling.
 REASSEMBLY
• When disposing of the battery, be sure to securely cover its
If the assembly procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure,
(+) end with tape to prevent combustion or explosion.
the correct procedure is described under the heading “REASSEMBLY”.
• Do not recharge the battery.
 ADJUSTMENT • Do not use the battery if it is discolored or damaged, or if any
Any adjustments required after reassembly of components or parts are described leakage of electrolyte is observed.
under the heading “ADJUSTMENT”. Be sure to perform the specified • Do not dismantle, solder or heat the battery. Doing so could
adjustments with reference to Chapter 4 “ADJUSTMENT”. result in leakage of electrolyte, heat generation, or explosion.
 LUBRICATION • Do not heat the battery or dispose of it in fire.
“LUBRICATION” signals that the part needs to be lubricated when replacing or • If the electrolyte leaked from the battery contacts with your
maintaining it after disassembling. skin or gets into your eyes, rinse it off with clean water and
see a doctor immediately.
C H E C K The disassembly/assembly procedures are provided based on SC-
P O IN T T7200/SC-T7200D series. The procedures for SC-T5200/SC-
T5200D series and SC-T3200 series are basically the same unless
otherwise specified.
3.1.1 Precautions Vorsicht

Before starting the disassembly or reassembly of the product, read the following Explosionsgefahr, wenn die Batterie durch einen
precautions given under the headings “WARNING” and “CAUTION”. falschen Typ ersetzt wird. Entsorgen Sie gebrauchte
Batterien gemäß den Anweisungen.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Overview 96

W A R N IN G  The power switch for this printer is installed on the secondary C A U T IO N  Locate the printer on a stable and flat surface.
side of the power circuit; therefore, the power is always  Use only recommended or s for disassembly, assembly or
supplied unless the AC Cable is unplugged. To prevent electric adjustment of the printer.
shock and circuit damage during servicing, make sure to follow  Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified.
the instructions below.  Be careful not to soil the printer or the floor with the leaked ink
• Before removing a circuit board, make sure to unplug the when removing the ink-path-related components or parts.
AC Cable from the AC outlet and confirm the LEDs are Spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the floor in advance.
turned off by pressing the Power button on the Operating  Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the
Panel. This operation discharges the residual charge in the elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily
printer. damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards
• Make sure not to place the removed circuit boards on the with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such
metal and such directly. as anti-static wrist straps.
 Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid  When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed,
injury from sharp metal edges. take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in
 Never touch the ink or wasted ink with bare hands. If ink comes moving parts.
into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap and water  When you have to remove any parts or components that are
immediately. If irritation occurs, contact a physician. provided as after-service-parts but are not described in this
 If ink gets in your eye, flush the eye with fresh water and see a chapter, carefully observe how they are installed and make
doctor immediately. sure to remember it before removing them.
 When replacing the MAIN BOARD, PSH BOARD, or Power  Disassembling the frame and some components (platen, PF
harnesses and such, make sure to check visually if any harness shaft) of the printer is prohibited because they are assembled
is caught in between or any wrong connection exists. with precise measurements in 1/100 mm unit at the factory.

3.1.2 Cautions after assembling 3.1.3 Orientation Definition

The terms used for indicating the orientation/direction throughout this chapter are as
C A U T IO N  The ink-path-related components or parts should be firmly and
follows.
securely reinstalled on the printer to prevent the ink from
leakage.
 When reassembling the printer, make sure to connect the Up
connectors of the electric components or parts correctly and
securely. Use extreme care when connecting FFCs (flexible flat
cables). Improper connection of the FFCs, such as inserting
them diagonally into the connectors, could cause short-
circuiting and lead to breakdown of the electric elements on the
boards.
 When reassembling the printer, make sure to route the FFCs Left Rear
and other cables as specified in this chapter. Failure to do so Full side
may cause an unexpected contact of the cables with sharp metal
edges, or lead to lower the noise immunity.
 When you removed any parts (especially cables) that are
Front
secured with acetate tape or two-sided tape, be sure to reinstall
and secure them with the tape as exactly the same as they were. Right
Home side
Down
Figure 3-1. Orientation Definition

3.1.4 Recommended Tools

To protect this product from damage, use the tools indicated in the following table. For
the tools required to perform the adjustment, refer to “Tools/Consumables for
Adjustments” in Chapter 4.
?
Table 3-1. Tools

Name Description Target Part
4 cm or longer shaft length (The
 PRINT HEAD
Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 one with a magnet is
 Some encoders/sensors
recommended)
25 cm or longer shaft length (The
Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 one with a magnet is Parts in general
recommended)
Tweezers Nothing in particular Parts in general
To secure the cable/harness, or for Parts in general (Use this tape
Acetate tape the protection against the sharp when it is removed or when
edge replacing the part)
 INKTUBE
 IC HOLDER
To prevent staining the printer
Waste cloth  DUMPER KIT
with ink during operation
 PRINT HEAD
 PUMP CAP UNIT

3.2 Parts Diagram

 REAR LEFT LOWER  PRINTER COVER (p. 125)
COVER (p. 137)
 UPPER LEFT COVER

(p. 133)  TOP COVER (p. 117)
 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT

ROLL COVER (p. 134)  REAR ROLL COVER FRAME (p. 138)
 LEFT LOWER COVER  UPPER SUPPORT R COVER (p. 126)

(p. 131)
 RIGHT UPPER COVER

& RIGHT ROLL
 LEFT BASE COVER (p. 135) COVER (p. 127)
 REAR RIGHT LOWER

 FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER COVER (p. 132)
(p. 136)
 LOWER PAPER GUIDE

(p. 119)
 RIGHT LOWER COVER
(p. 129)
 WASTE INK TANK COVER
(p. 124)
 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B  FRONT COVER  RIGHT BASE COVER (p. 130)
(p. 120) (p. 118)
 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B

(p. 120)  LOWER PAPER GUIDE
(p. 119)
 WASTE INK TANK COVER  IH COVER (p. 121)

(p. 124)
Figure 3-2. Housing
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Parts Diagram 100

 L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR

(p. 141)
Detects the Open/Closed status of the
WASTE INK TANK COVER (L).
 INTERLOCK SWITCH (p. 142)

PRINTER COVER.
 R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR

(p. 140)
WASTE INK TANK COVER (R).  CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR
(p. 139)
Cartridge Cover.
Figure 3-3. Cover sensors

 SUB-B BOARD (p. 149)

Relays the connection between the MAIN BOARD and electric parts
 SUB BOARD (p. 147) components. See "6.2 Connection Diagram (p399)" for specific connections
to the concerning parts/components.
Relays the connection between the MAIN BOARD and
electric parts/components. See "6.2 Connection Diagram
(p399)" for specific connections to the concerning parts/
components.
 PANEL BOARD (p. 152)
 MAIN BOARD (p. 144)

• Communicates with the computer.
• Processes received data.
• Controls the printer mechanism.
• Stores the correction values and
various counters.
 BOARD BOX FAN (p. 250)

Cools the air inside the Board Box.
 PW FAN (p. 251)

Cools the air inside the Board Box.
 HDD FAN (p. 252)  PSH BOARD (p. 150)

Cools the air inside the Board Box. Generates the DC voltage for this printer
from the AC power supply.
Figure 3-4. Electric Circuit Components

 PW SENSOR (p. 212)

 DAMPER KIT (p. 155)
Detects the width of paper on the platen. This is a reflective photo
interrupter and detects the difference of the amount of reflection between
paper (white) and the platen (black).
 IM SENSOR (p. 210)
Reads print patterns in the following adjustments.
•Auto Bi-D adjustment •IMS position adjustment
•Auto Uni-D adjustment •IMS inspection
•Roll paper remaining •Head inclination adjustment
amount detection •Head slant adjustment  CR SCALE (p. 182)
•Auto PF adjustment  HEAD FFC (p. 163) (x2)
•IMS sensitivity adjustment
 SHEET ASSY
 CR ENCODER (p. 187) (p. 174)
Detects the pattern of the CR
SCALE to control the position of
the CR UNIT.
 PG SENSOR (p. 195)  PRINT HEAD

Detects the origin position of the (p. 161)
platen gap.  CR TIMMING BELT
(p. 188)
 CR FFC (p. 173)

 CR COVER (p. 154)
 CR UNIT (p. 207)
 CR MOTOR (p. 190)  CR HP SENSOR (p. 192)

 APG UNIT (p. 193)
The motor to drive the CR UNIT. Detects the home position of the CR UNIT.
Figure 3-5. Carriage Mechanism

 PUMP CAP UNIT (p. 196)

Includes the wiper section and the
sucking section, and maintains the
PRINT HEAD.
 IC HOLDER (p. 199)

Stores ink cartridges and includes the
 INK TUBE (p. 203) following mechanism and parts.
•Pressure mechanism (Sensor/Motor)
•Ink Level Sensor
•CRCM Board
Figure 3-6. Ink System Mechanism

 PF ROLLER MIDDLE
 ATC MOTOR (p. 226) SUPPORT (p. 231)
Feeds forward (normal rotation) and
 CUTTER UNIT (p. 247)
rewinds (reverse rotation) the roll
paper to generate back tension.
* ATC: Auto Tension Control
 PRESSURE ROLLER (p. 221)
 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR

(p. 224)
Detects nipping/releasing status of
 PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR the PRESSURE ROLLER.
(p. 230)
Detects the thickness of roll paper
being inserted into the printer.  PF TIMING BELT (p. 219)
 PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER)

(p. 227)
Detects the roll paper and cut
sheet.
 PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER)

(p. 228)
Detects the thick paper.
 PF SCALE (p. 216)
 SUCTION FAN (p. 253)

 PF ENCODER (p. 217)
Sucks paper to the platen so as to stabilize the
position of paper when printing. Detects the PF Scale patterns to
control the paper feeding (operation of
the PF MOTOR).
 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR

(p. 222)
Makes the PRESSURE ROLLER
nip or release the media.
 PF MOTOR (p. 214)
The motor to drive the Feed Roller.
Figure 3-7. Paper Feed Mechanism / Cutter

 1st PPK ROLLER ASSY (p. 236)
 UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (p. 243)  1st PAPER GUIDE (p. 237)
 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR (p. 238)

 LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (p. 244)
 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR

(p. 240)
 LEFT COVER (p272)
 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B

(p. 241)
 LEFT LOWER COVER (p272)

 RIGHT REAR COVER (p. 275)
 REAR FRAME (p. 267)
 FRONT FRAME (p. 266)
 RIGHT COVER (p273)

 2nd PF SENSOR (p. 282)
 RIGHT LOWER COVER (p273)
 2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR (p. 270)
Figure 3-8. Paper Feed Mechanism (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only) (1)

 REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE (p. 242)

 REAR COVER (p. 234)
 REAR COVER SENSOR (p. 235)

 LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN
SENSOR (p. 268)
 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR (p. 278)

 2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY (p. 276)
 2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY (p. 287)
 2nd ATC GEAR ASSY (p. 286)
 2nd ATC MOTOR (p. 281)
 2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR (p. 284)

 RIGHT ROLL UNIT
OPEN SENSOR (p. 269)
 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR (p. 279)
 2nd PPK RELEASE

SENSOR A/B (p. 283)
 SUB-C BOARD (p. 277)
Figure 3-9. Paper Feed Mechanism (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only) (2)

 TAKE-UP REEL COVER (p. 254)
 TAKE-UP REEL
LED (p. 256)
 TAKE-UP REEL
SWITCH (p. 257)
 TAKE-UP REEL PS
 TAKE-UP REEL BOARD (p. 259)
SENSOR (p. 255)
 TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
(p. 263)
 TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR (p. 261)
Figure 3-10. Auto Take-up Reel

3.3 Disassembly Flowchart
HOUSING
Start
"3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER "3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B "3.4.2.7 PRINTER COVER (p125)" "3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R
(p133)" (p120)" COVER (p126)"
"3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R "3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE

COVER (p126)" (p119)"
"3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD (p152)" "3.4.2.6 WASTE INK TANK

COVER (p124)"
"3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p117)" "3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p118)"
"3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & "3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p118)"

RIGHT ROLL COVER (p127)"
"3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p118)" "3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER "3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER "3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER &
COVER (p132)" (p129)" LEFT ROLL COVER (p134)"
"3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER "3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE "3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN "3.4.2.11 RIGHT BASE COVER "3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER
(p129)" (p119)" (p250)" (p130)" COVER (p137)"
"3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p121)" "3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B "3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER "3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER
(p120)" (p129)" (p131)"
"3.4.2.20 CARTRIDGE COVER "3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER "3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p118)" "3.4.2.16 LEFT BASE COVER (p135)" "3.4.2.17 FRONT LEFT LOWER "3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE
SENSOR (p139)" (p129)" COVER (p136)" (p119)"
"3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p121)" "3.4.2.23 INTERLOCK SWITCH "3.4.2.22 L WASTE INK COVER
(p142)" SENSOR (p141)"
"3.4.2.21 R WASTE INK COVER

SENSOR (p140)"
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Disassembly Flowchart 109

ELECTRIC CIRCUIT COMPONENTS / FANS
Start
"3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER "3.4.7.4 SUCTION FAN (p253)" "3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R
(p133)" COVER (p126)"
"3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R "3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD (p152)"

COVER (p126)"
"3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD (p152)"
"3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p117)"

"3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER "3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER &

COVER (p132)" LEFT ROLL COVER (p134)"
"3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN "3.4.3.3 SUB-B BOARD (p149)" "3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER &
(p250)" RIGHT ROLL COVER (p127)"
"3.4.3.1 MAIN BOARD (p144)" "3.4.7.2 PW FAN (p251)" "3.4.7.3 HDD FAN (p252)" "3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit
(p115)"
"3.4.3.4 PSH BOARD (p150)" "3.4.4.1 CR COVER (p154)"
"3.4.3.2 SUB BOARD (p147)"

CARRIAGE MECHANISM / INK SYSTEM MECHANISM
Start
"3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p118)"
"3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER "3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER &

(p133)" LEFT ROLL COVER (p134)"
"3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R "3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER &

COVER (p126)" RIGHT ROLL COVER (p127)"
"3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD (p152)" "3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit

(p115)"
"3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p117)" "3.4.4.1 CR COVER (p154)" "3.4.4.7 CR SCALE (p182)" "3.4.4.6 SHEET ASSY (p174)"
"3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & "3.4.4.2 DAMPER KIT (p155)" "3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER
RIGHT ROLL COVER (p127)" (p129)"
"3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p118)" "3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER "3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit "3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER "3.4.4.3 PRINT HEAD (p161)" "3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER "3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p121)"
COVER (p132)" (p115)" (p129)" COVER (p132)"
"3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER "3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER "3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER "3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN "3.4.4.16 INK TUBE (p203)"
"3.4.4.11 CR HP SENSOR (p192)" "3.4.4.12 APG UNIT (p193)" (p250)"
(p129)" (p129)" (p129)"
"3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p121)" "3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit "3.4.4.12 APG UNIT (p193)" "3.4.4.12 APG UNIT (p193)" "3.4.4.4 HEAD FFC (p163)"
(p115)"
"3.4.5.13 REAR COVER (p234)" "3.4.4.14 PUMP CAP UNIT "3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit "3.4.4.10 CR MOTOR (p190)" "3.4.4.5 CR FFC (p173)"
(p196)" (p115)"
"3.4.5.14 REAR COVER SENSOR "3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & "3.4.4.7 CR SCALE (p182)"
(p235)" LEFT ROLL COVER (p134)"
"3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER "3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN "3.4.4.17 CR UNIT (p207)"
COVER (p137)" (p250)"
"3.4.5.20 REAR BOARD PAPER "3.4.5.21 UPPER 2nd PAPER "3.4.4.10 CR MOTOR (p190)" "3.4.4.8 CR ENCODER (p187)" "3.4.4.13 PG SENSOR (p195)" "3.4.4.18 IM SENSOR (p210)"
GUIDE (p242)" GUIDE (p243)"
"3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER "3.4.4.15 IC HOLDER (p199)" "3.4.4.9 CR TIMMING BELT "3.4.4.19 PW SENSOR (p212)"
GUIDE (p244)" (p188)"

PAPER FEED MECHANISM / CUTTER
Start
"3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER "3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER

(p133)" FRAME (p138)"
"3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R "3.4.5.9 PE SENSOR (ROLL

COVER (p126)" PAPER) (p227)"
"3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD (p152)"
"3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p117)"

"3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p118)" "3.4.5.8 ATC MOTOR (p226)" "3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & "3.4.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER "3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER
LEFT ROLL COVER (p134)" (p221)" FRAME (p138)"
"3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & "3.4.5.11 PAPER THICKNESS "3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER "3.4.5.13 REAR COVER (p234)"
LEFT ROLL COVER (p134)" SENSOR (p230)" COVER (p137)"
"3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER "3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER "3.4.5.14 REAR COVER SENSOR
(p131)" (p131)" (p235)"
"3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER "3.4.5.3 PF ENCODER (p217)" "3.4.5.6 PRESSURE ROLLER "3.4.5.1 PF MOTOR (p214)" "3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER
(p129)" MOTOR (p222)" COVER (p137)"
"3.4.2.17 FRONT LEFT LOWER "3.4.5.2 PF SCALE (p216)" "3.4.5.4 PF TIMING BELT (p219)" "3.4.5.7 PRESSURE ROLLER "3.4.5.20 REAR BOARD PAPER
COVER (p136)" SENSOR (p224)" GUIDE (p242)"
"3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p121)" "3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE "3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER
(p119)" GUIDE (p244)"
"3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B "3.4.5.21 UPPER 2nd PAPER

(p120)" "3.4.6.1 CUTTER UNIT (p247)"
GUIDE (p243)"
"3.4.5.10 PE SENSOR (THICK "3.4.5.12 PF ROLLER MIDDLE

PAPER) (p228)" SUPPORT (p231)"

PAPER FEED MECHANISM (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D SERIES ONLY)
Start
"3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER "3.4.5.14 REAR COVER SENSOR "3.4.5.13 REAR COVER (p234)"
(p133)" (p235)"
"3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R "3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER "3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER "3.4.5.14 REAR COVER SENSOR
COVER (p126)" COVER (p137)" GUIDE (p244)" (p235)"
"3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD (p152)" "3.4.5.20 REAR BOARD PAPER "3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER
GUIDE (p242)" COVER (p137)"
"3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p117)" "3.4.5.20 REAR BOARD PAPER

GUIDE (p242)"
"3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & "3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER

RIGHT ROLL COVER (p127)" GUIDE (p244)"
"3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & "3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER "3.4.5.19 1st PPK RELEASE "3.4.5.21 UPPER 2nd PAPER
LEFT ROLL COVER (p134)" FRAME (p138)" SENSOR A/B (p241)" GUIDE (p243)"
"3.4.5.19 1st PPK RELEASE "3.4.5.18 1st PPK RELEASE

SENSOR A/B (p241)" MOTOR (p240)"
"3.4.5.15 1st PPK ROLLER ASSY "3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER

(p236)" FRAME (p138)"
"3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER "3.4.5.17 1st PAPER FEED

FRAME (p138)" MOTOR (p238)"
"3.4.5.16 1st PAPER GUIDE

(p237)"
AUTO TAKE-UP REEL (SC-T7200 SERIES ONLY)
Start
"3.4.8.1 TAKE-UP REEL "3.4.8.2 TAKE-UP REEL

COVER (p254)" SENSOR (p255)"
"3.4.8.3 TAKE-UP REEL "3.4.8.4 TAKE-UP REEL "3.4.8.5 TAKE-UP REEL "3.4.8.6 TAKE-UP REEL "3.4.8.7 TAKE-UP REEL
LED (p256)" SWITCH (p257)" PS BOARD (p259)" MOTOR (p261)" MAIN BOARD (p263)"

2ND ROLL UNIT (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D SERIES ONLY)
Start
"3.4.9.7 RIGHT COVER/RIGHT "3.4.9.4 RIGHT ROLL UNIT "3.4.9.2 REAR FRAME (p267)" "3.4.9.6 LEFT COVER/LEFT "3.4.9.1 FRONT FRAME (p266)"
LOWER COVER (p273)" OPEN SENSOR (p269)" LOWER COVER (p272)"
"3.4.9.18 2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY "3.4.9.8 RIGHT REAR COVER "3.4.9.9 2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY "3.4.9.3 LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN "3.4.9.7 RIGHT COVER/RIGHT
(p275)" "3.4.9.14 2nd PF SENSOR (p282)"
(p287)" (p276)" SENSOR (p268)" LOWER COVER (p273)"
"3.4.9.13 2nd ATC MOTOR "3.4.9.5 2nd ROLL LOCK "3.4.9.15 2nd PPK RELEASE "3.4.5.13 REAR COVER (p234)" "3.4.9.10 SUB-C BOARD (p277)" "3.4.9.2 REAR FRAME (p267)"
(p281)" DETECTION SENSOR (p270)" SENSOR A/B (p283)"
"3.4.9.17 2nd ATC GEAR ASSY "3.4.9.12 2nd PPK RELEASE "3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER "3.4.9.8 RIGHT REAR COVER
(p286)" MOTOR (p279)" GUIDE (p244)" (p275)"
"3.4.9.16 2nd PAPER DETECTION "3.4.9.11 2nd PAPER FEED

SENSOR (p284)" MOTOR (p278)"

3.4 Disassembly and Assembly Procedure  Manual (1)
1. Remove the screw, and remove the cover from the RIGHT UPPER COVER.
This section describes procedures for disassembling the components allowed to be
disassembled. Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with captive washer: 1 pcs
reassembled by reversing the disassembly procedure. 2. Insert a screwdriver into the cover through the hole as shown in the figure.
3. Turn the white shaft of the PUMP CAP UNIT counterclockwise with the driver
3.4.1 Preparation for servicing until click sound when the CR is unlocked occurs.
3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit
C A U T IO N
No clock
rotation!
C A U T IO N When you have unlocked the CR Unit and finished your

reassembly work, move the CR Unit (Print Head) over the platen
Cover A
and turn the printer on to let it perform the initialization sequence.
(By this sequence, the CR Unit is locked and Print Head is capped.)
If the initialization is performed on or over the Cap, the Print Head
may be damaged.
 Automatic
1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Figure 3-11. Unlocking the CR Unit (1)
Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu], [Back] and [OK] buttons together.
C A U T IO N Do not turn the white shaft clockwise with the driver.
2. Select Mecha Adjustment - CR Un Cap.
3. Press the [OK] button while [Enter] Un Cap is displayed.
The carriage unit is unlocked.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Procedure 115

 Manual (2) C A U T IO N
No clock
rotation!
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133)
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p126)
3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p152)
PUMP CAP
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p117) UNIT
5. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p127)
6. Insert a screwdriver into the cover through the hole as shown in the figure.
7. While viewing the CR Lock Lever status from the front of the printer, turn the Screwdrive
white shaft of the Pump Cap Unit counterclockwise with the driver.
8. The CR Lock Lever is lowered. Check that the lever reaches the CR unlock
position, and stop turning the white shaft.
Insert driver here
C A U T IO N Do not turn the white shaft clockwise with the driver.
Figure 3-12. Unlocking the CR Unit (2)
CR Lock Lever
C H E C K  When the CR is unlocked, it clicks.

P O IN T  Use a screwdriver with a 170 mm or longer shaft.
CR unlocked CR locked
(The Lever is lowered) (The lever is raised)
Figure 3-13. Status of the CR Lock Lever

3.4.2 Housing
Positioning point
3.4.2.1 TOP COVER
A
3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p152) Upper Support
Frame
4. Remove the screw, and remove the TOP COVER.
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
TOP COVER
5. Remove the PRINTER COVER. (p125)
Pay attention to the positioning points (See Figure 3-14).
Figure 3-14. Removing the TOP COVER

3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER

1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) PRINTER COVER
4. Open the PRINTER COVER. A A A A A
5. Remove the seven screws, and remove the FRONT COVER.

To ensure the INTERLOCK SWITCH can detect the flag of

PRINTER COVE, tighten the screws which secure the FRONT FRONT COVER
COVER while pulling the Front Frame toward you.
Figure 3-15. Removing the FRONT COVER
Front Frame
INTERLOCK SWITCH

3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE

1. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B. (p120)
2. Open the WASTE INK TANK COVER. LOWER PAPER GUIDE
3. Remove the three screws, and remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE.
 To ensure the tab of WASTE INK TANK COVER is inserted

in the groove of the Sensor Frame, install the LOWER PAPER
GUIDE with the WASTE INK TANK COVER opened.
 When installing the LOWER PAPER GUIDE, take care not to
damage the L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR or R WASTE
INK COVER SENSOR.
Groove of the
Sensor Frame
A A
A
L WASTE INK COVER R WASTE INK COVER WASTE INK TANK COVER
SENSOR SENSOR
Figure 3-16. Removing the LOWER PAPER GUIDE

3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B

1. Remove the two screws, and remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B.
A A
A A
LOWER PAPER GUIDE B
Figure 3-17. Removing the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B

3.4.2.5 IH COVER 10. Open the Cartridge Cover.
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) 11. Remove the four screws that secure the IH COVER.
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p126) A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 4 pcs

4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p117)
IH COVER
6. Remove the FRONT COVER. (p118)
7. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p129)
8. Release the cable from the four clamps. A A
9. Disconnect the cable from the relay connector (No.1), and release the cable of the
CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR.
A
Clamps
A
Cartridge Cover
Clamp
Figure 3-19. Removing the IH COVER

Cable of the
CARTRIDGE
COVER
SENSOR
Relay Connector (No.1)
Figure 3-18. Releasing the Cable

C A U T IO N Do not take off the IH COVER strongly too far in the following
steps because the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR is attached to CARTRIDGE
the IH COVER. COVER SENSOR
Cable
12. Pull out the IH COVER.
When installing the IH COVER, insert the rib under the LOWER
PAPER GUIDE. IH COVER
IH COVER
Rib
LOWER PAPER GUIDE
Figure 3-20. Removing the IH COVER

13. Disengage the two hooks that secure the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR, and
remove the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR from the IH COVER.
Inside of IH COVER
Hole
CARTRIDGE
COVER SENSOR Positioning point
Hook
Positioning point
Figure 3-21. Removing the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR

3.4.2.6 WASTE INK TANK COVER

1. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B. (p120) LOWER
PAPER GUIDE
2. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE. (p119)
3. Disengage the two hooks on the WASTE INK TANK COVER from the two shafts
of the LOWER PAPER GUIDE using a tool such as a slotted-head screwdriver,
then remove the WASTE INK TANK COVER.
WASTE INK TANK
COVER
Shafts
Back side
Hooks
Figure 3-22. Removing the WASTE INK TANK COVER

3.4.2.7 PRINTER COVER

1. Disengage the three hinges of the PRINTER COVER from the bearings, and
remove the PRINTER COVER.
Bearing
Hinge
PRINTER COVER
Figure 3-23. Removing the PRINTER COVER

3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R COVER

1. Remove the two screws, and remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER.
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs UPPER SUPPORT R
COVER
Pay attention to the positioning points. (See below figure)
A
Panel Housing
Positioning points
UPPER SUPPORT R
COVER
RIGHT LOWER
COVER
Figure 3-24. Removing the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER
Positioning points
TOP COVER

3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER

B
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p117) Positioning point
5. Remove the six screws, and remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT
ROLL COVER. A
A) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs
B) Silver M3x10 P-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs RIGHT UPPER
COVER & RIGHT
C) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs ROLL COVER
C H E C K If an optional MFP Scanner stand is installed, remove the screw

P O IN T shown below and remove it by separating the RIGHT UPPER
COVER and RIGHT ROLL COVER.
C
RIGHT ROLL COVER
B
Screw
RIGHT UPPER COVER
IH COVER
Figure 3-25. Removing the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER

Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure, Figure

3-25).
Inside
Positioning points RIGHT LOWER

COVER

3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER

1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) RIGHT LOWER COVER

3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p152) B

6. Remove the three screws, and remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER.
B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
B
 Insert the two tabs of the IH COVER to the two holes on the A
RIGHT LOWER COVER.
 Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure).
IH COVER
Tabs
Figure 3-26. Removing the RIGHT LOWER COVER
RIGHT BASE COVER
Positioning points
RIGHT LOWER
COVER

3.4.2.11 RIGHT BASE COVER

RIGHT BASE COVER
7. Remove the two screws, and remove the RIGHT BASE COVER. A A
Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure).
RIGHT BASE COVER

Positioning point
Positioning point
Figure 3-27. Removing the RIGHT BASE COVER

3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER

1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) Upper side

B
6. Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p134)
LEFT LOWER COVER
7. Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p137)
8. Remove the two screws, and LEFT LOWER COVER.
B) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs
 Insert the two tabs of the FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER to

the two holes on the LEFT LOWER COVER.
 Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure).
FRONT LEFT
LOWER COVER
Tabs
LEFT BASE COVER
Figure 3-28. Removing the LEFT LOWER COVER
Positioning points
LEFT LOWER
COVER

3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER

REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER
Inner
D
B
5. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p127) B
6. Remove the three screws, and remove the Right Cap Cover.
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 3 pcs C
B
7. Remove the fourteen screws, and remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. B
C
B) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 9 pcs C B
C) Silver M3x6 machine screw: 4 pcs C
B
D) Silver M3x20 Bind machine screw: 1 pcs A
B
B
Right Cap Cover
A A
Figure 3-29. Removing the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER

3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER

1. Open the PRINTER COVER.
2. Remove the five screws, and remove the UPPER LEFT COVER.
A
PRINTER COVER
UPPER LEFT COVER

A
A
A
Figure 3-30. Removing the UPPER LEFT COVER

3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER
C A U T IO N If the optional Large Format Scanner Stand is attached, take care

not to drop screws inside the stand because there are holes for
accessing screws.
B B
Positioning point
A
6. Remove the six screws, and remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL
COVER. LEFT UPPER COVER
& LEFT ROLL COVER
A) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 2 pcs

3-31).
A
Inside
Positioning points LEFT LOWER FRONT LEFT

COVER LOWER COVER
Figure 3-31. Removing the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER

3.4.2.16 LEFT BASE COVER

LEFT BASE COVER
7. Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p137) A A
8. Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p131)

9. Remove the two screws, and remove the LEFT BASE COVER.
LEFT BASE COVER

Positioning point Figure 3-32. Removing the LEFT BASE COVER
Positioning point

3.4.2.17 FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER

FRONT LEFT
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p126) LOWER COVER

9. Remove the four screws, and remove the FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER.
FRONT LEFT Left side Front side

LOWER COVER
A
Positioning points
A
A
Figure 3-33. Removing the FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER
Positioning points

3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER COVER

4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p117) REAR LEFT LOWER COVER

7. Loosen the screw that secures the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. A
8. Remove the three screws, and remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER.
C
B) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs B
C) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
C
Figure 3-34. Removing the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER

3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER FRAME

Front side
1. Remove the nine screws, and remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME.
A) Silver M4x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 6 pcs B B B
B) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs
Place the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME so that it will come on all
the four tabs of the R Side Roll Frame and L Side Roll Frame.
Back side
REAR ROLL COVER FRAME
A A
A A
Tabs R Side Roll L Side Roll Tabs

Frame Frame
Figure 3-35. Removing the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME

3.4.2.20 CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR

Clamps
8. Remove the IH COVER. (p121)
9. Release the cable from the four clamps.
10. Disconnect the cable from the Relay Connector (No.1), and remove the
CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR.
CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR
Clamp
Figure 3-36. Removing the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR

3.4.2.21 R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR

Right side
Clamps
6. Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p132)
Maintenance Box
7. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE. (p119) Holder
8. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B. (p120)
Clamp Hooks
10. Remove the IH COVER. (p121) R WASTE INK
COVER SENSOR
12. Remove the screw that secures the R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR.
A) Silver M1.7x6 Pan machine screw with S.W: 1 pcs Clamp
13. Pull out the cable from the groove of the Maintenance Box Holder.
14. Release the cable from the four clamps at front side. Acetate tape CR Spacer
Groove
15. Remove the pieces of acetate tape, and release the cable.
16. Release the cable from the two hooks of the CR Spacer. Cable
17. Release the cable from the three clamps at right side. Bottom side
18. Disconnect the Cable from the Relay Connector (No.9), and remove the R
WASTE INK COVER SENSOR.
A
Figure 3-37. Removing the R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR

3.4.2.22 L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR

1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) SUB-B BOARD

4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p117) Clamp
CN8
8. Remove the BOARD BOX FAN. (p250)
Maintenance Box
10. Remove the Lower Paper Guide (Left) (p119) Holder
L WASTE INK
11. Remove the screw that secures the L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR. COVER SENSOR
A) Silver M1.7x6 Pan machine screw with S.W: 1 pcs Clamp
12. Pull out the cable from the groove of the Maintenance Box Holder.
13. Release the cable from the nine clamps.
14. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN8) of the SUB-B BOARD.
Groove
Cable
Bottom side
Figure 3-38. Removing the L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR

3.4.2.23 INTERLOCK SWITCH

INTERLOCK SWITCH
Clamp
9. Remove the screw, and remove the INTERLOCK SWITCH.
Front side
10. Release the cable from the four clamps at front side.
Insert the hook of the INTERLOCK SWITCH to the hole on the

Front Support Frame.
A
Back side
Hook
Front Support Frame
Figure 3-39. Removing the INTERLOCK SWITCH

11. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN20) of the MAIN BOARD.
Right side
12. Release the cable of the INTERLOCK SWITCH from 12 clamps. Clamp
Back side
Clamps
MAIN BOARD Cable
Cable
CN20
Figure 3-40. Releasing the Cable (MAIN BOARD)

Figure 3-42. Releasing the Cable (Right side)
Clamps
Board Box
Cable
Figure 3-41. Releasing the Cable (Top of the Board Box)

3.4.3 Electric Circuit Components 10. Remove the two screws, and remove the Fan Frame.
A) Silver M3x6 Cup S-tite screw: 2 pcs
3.4.3.1 MAIN BOARD
A D J U S T M E N T When replacing/removing this part, refer to "4.1.2 Adjustment MAIN BOARD
R E Q U IR E D Clamp Cable
Items and the Order by Repaired Part" (p290) and make sure to
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. CN25
Wire saddle

2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p126) A

A
Fan Frame
9. Release the cable from the clamp and the wire saddle.
Figure 3-43. Removing the Fan Frame
Wrap the cable one turn counterclockwise through the clamp.
Clamp
Cable

11. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN500) of the MAIN BOARD. 14. Remove the two screws, and remove the Lower Option Fixing Plate.
12. Release the cable from the clamp. C) Silver M3x6 Cup S-tite screw: 1 pcs
13. Remove the five screws, and remove the Option Fixing Plate. D) Silver M3x6 Cup S-tite screw: 1 pcs
B) Silver M3x6 Cup S-tite screw: 5 pcs Use a stubby screwdriver when removing the screw C.
C H E C K
P O IN T
CN500 Cable
Clamp
Align the dowel on the MAIN BOARD with the positioning hole on
the Lower Option Fixing Plate. (Figure 3-45)
Option Fixing Plate
MAIN BORAD
Tab and positioning hole
C
Lower Option Fixing Plate
B
B B
D
B
B
Figure 3-45. Removing the Lower Option Fixing Plate
Figure 3-44. Removing the Option Fixing Plate

15. Disconnect the all FFCs and the cables from the connectors of the MAIN BORAD.
16. Remove the fourteen screws, and remove the MAIN BOARD and the LAN
Connector Cover.
E) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw: 9 pcs
F) Silver M3x6 Bind machine screw: 2 pcs
G) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw: 1 pcs
H) Silver M2.5x6 Bind machine screw: 2 pcs
LAN Connector Cover E E E
F
E
E E
F MAIN BOARD
E E E
H
Figure 3-46. Removing the MAIN BOARD
Refer to "3.4.6 Cutter Mechanism" (Page 247) when reassembling.

Regarding the printers which have films to extend the life, perform
"4.14.7 Flag for extending life" (Page 372) after reassembling.

3.4.3.2 SUB BOARD

CR Front Frame
A
Positioning point
7. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p127) CR UNIT
8. Unlock the CR UNIT. (p115) A
9. Remove the CR COVER. (p154)

10. Move the CR UNIT to the left end. Positioning point
Front Support Frame
11. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR Front Frame.
Figure 3-47. Removing the CR Front Frame
3-47).
CR Front Frame
Positioning point
Positioning point
Front Support Frame

12. Disengage the two hooks of the Upper EJ Holder, and remove the Upper EJ 13. Disconnect all cables and FFCs connected to the SUB BOARD.
Holder. 14. Remove the four screws, and remove the SUB BOARD.
B) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw: 4 pcs
Hooks
A A SUB BOARD
Upper EJ Holder
A A
Figure 3-48. Removing the Upper EJ Holder
Positioning points
Upper Support Frame

Figure 3-49. Removing the SUB BOARD
Upper EJ Holder
Positioning point

3.4.3.3 SUB-B BOARD

7. Disconnect all cables and FFCs connected to the SUB-B BOARD.
8. Remove the four screws, and remove the SUB-B BOARD.
A A SUB-B BOARD
A A
Figure 3-50. Removing the SUB-B BOARD

3.4.3.4 PSH BOARD

A D J U S T M E N T When replacing/removing this part, refer to "4.1.2 Adjustment
R E Q U IR E D
Items and the Order by Repaired Part" (p290) and make sure to Lower Board Frame
perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
A
A
accessing screws.
A A

6. Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p132) Figure 3-51. Removing the Lower Board Frame
8. Remove the MAIN BOARD. (p144)
9. Remove the four screws, and remove the Lower Board Frame.

10. Remove the two screws that secure the PS Plate, and pull the PS Plate slightly 12. Remove the six screws, and remove the PSH BOARD from the PS Plate.
toward you.
C) Silver M3x6 screw: 6 pcs
B) Silver M3x6 screw: 2 pcs
11. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN1, CN51) of the PSH BOARD, and PS Plate PSH BOARD
remove the PS Plate.
D D D
Cable
PSH BOARD
CN1
Cable
CN51 D D D
PS Plate
B B
Figure 3-53. Removing the PSH BOARD
Figure 3-52. Removing the PS Plate

3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD

PANEL BOARD
2. Remove the two screws that secure the Panel Housing.
CN1
3. Disconnect the cable and FFC from the connector (CN1) of the PANEL BOARD.
Positioning points
FFC
RIGHT UPPER
COVER
Panel Housing
A
Panel Housing
Positioning point
Figure 3-54. Removing the Panel Housing

4. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN3) of the PANEL BOARD.
5. Remove the six screws that secure the PANEL BOARD.
B) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw: 6 pcs
6. Disengage the two hooks of the Panel Housing, and remove the PANEL BOARD.
FFC
CN3
B B
B
PANEL BOARD
B
Hook
Hook
B B
Panel Housing
Figure 3-55. Removing the PANEL BOARD

3.4.4 Carriage Mechanism / Ink System Mechanism

3.4.4.1 CR COVER
CR COVER
5. Remove the FRONT COVER. (p118) CR UNIT
8. Unlock the CR UNIT.(p115) A A
9. Move the CR UNIT on the Platen.

10. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR COVER.
A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
Figure 3-56. Removing the CR COVER

3.4.4.2 DAMPER KIT

R E Q U IR E D
1. Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p342)

9. Unlock the CR UNIT. (p115)

11. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR Rear Frame.
When installing the CR Rear Frame, check the following.
A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs  Align the two positioning points (upper) and secure with two
screws while pulling toward you.
 Make sure that two positioning points (lower) are engaged with
Positioning point (upper)
the holes on the Rear Tube Guide.
A CR Rear Frame
Positioning CR Rear Frame Positioning
point (upper) point (upper)
Positioning
point (lower) A
Positioning
point (lower)
Positioning points must be

engaged with the holes.
Rear Tube Guide  Move the CR UNIT from the left end of the Rear Frame to the
full side and check from the side to make sure that FFC
Protection Sheet and Rear Tube Guide are not interfering with
each other.
Figure 3-57. Removing the CR Rear Frame
Full side Left edge of the Rear Frame
Rear Frame
CR UNIT


Left side view
Rear Tube Guide
FFC Protection Sheet 13. Remove the six screws, and remove the CR Sub Fixing Plate.
B) Silver M3x10 Machine screw: 4 pcs
CR UNIT C) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
 Secure the Grounding wire and the plate with the same screw
shown in the below figure.
 Pay attention to the positioning points (See Figure 3-58).
Positioning points
B CR Sub Tube Frame
B
C
CR Sub Fixing Plate
C
Screw
together
Grounding wire
DAMPER KIT
CR UNIT
Figure 3-58. Removing the CR Sub Fixing Plate

14. Remove the FFC Clamp.

Install the FFC Protection Sheet as follows. (Colored parts are used
15. Remove the FFC Protection Sheet. here to make explanation easier.)
1. Slide the FFC Protection Sheet under the four hooks on the CR
UNIT.
2. Slide the FFC Protection Sheet under the two flat clamps.
(Make sure that the grounding wire is routed under the FFC
Protection Sheet.)
FFC Clamp 3. Secure the FFC Protection Sheet with the FFC Clamp. (Take
care not to damage the FFC Clamp.)
FFC Protection Sheet Hooks

Hooks
Figure 3-59. Removing the FFC Protection Sheet
FFC Clamp
Hook
FFC Protection
Sheet
Flat clamp
Hook
Grounding wire

16. Disconnect the CR FFC from the connector (CN100) of the SUB BOARD.
When reassembling, secure the CR FFC and the grounding wire
17. Remove the two flat clamps. with the hook and clamps.
18. Release the CR FFC from the four hooks of the CR UNIT, and place the CR FFC
Hooks
over the rear of the printer temporarily.
Clamps
Flat clamp
Double faced tape

Grounding wire
CR FFC
CR FFC
Hooks
CN100
x
C A U T IO N  Do not remove the ink tube from damper kit when you do the
SUB BOARD PRINT HEAD, HEAD FFC and CR FFC exchange work.
 When the INK TUBE is removed at the following step, ink may
drip off from the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in
Figure 3-60. Releasing the CR FFC advance and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
Put CR FFC on the double-faced tape of the CR UNIT top surface.

(To prevent the CR FFC from loosening and rubbing with a metal
plate.)

19. Remove the two screws, and remove the INK TUBE from the DAMPER KIT. 20. Remove the three screws, and remove the DAMPER KIT.
D) Silver M2.5x16 screw: 2 pcs E) Silver M3x10 Machine screw: 3 pcs
CR FFC  Before installing the joint, make sure the Joint Rubbers are
attached to it.
INK TUBE  Before attaching the Joint Rubber, let it get wet with cleaning
liquid.
 Secure the screws that secure the Ink Supply Tube with
tightening torque about 0.39±0.05 Nm.
DAMPER KIT
Joint Rubber
D
Figure 3-61. Removing the INK TUBE

Upper side
E
E
DAMPER KIT
Figure 3-62. Removing the DAMPER KIT

3.4.4.3 PRINT HEAD

R E Q U IR E D HEAD FFC
Ferrite Core
(with sheet)
C A U T IO N Be careful not to touch the nozzle surface of the PRINT HEAD.

Connector Connector
PRINT HEAD

3. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p126) Figure 3-63. Removing the HEAD FFC

11. Remove the DAMPER KIT. (p155)
12. Disconnect the HEAD FFCs from the four connectors of the PRINT HEAD.
13. Remove the Ferrite Core (with sheet).
C H E C K Recording the Head ID (p343) in advance will make installation of

P O IN T the new Printhead easier. (It is recommended to use a digital
camera.)

14. Remove the three screws, and remove the PRINT HEAD.
4. Secure the HEAD FFC with the four hooks of the CR UNIT.
A) Silver M2.6x8 Machine screw: 3 pcs
Upper side
Hooks Hooks
A A
PRINT HEAD
HEAD FFC
A 5. Route the CR FFC on the HEAD FFC, and secure the CR FFC
with the four hooks of the CR UNIT.
6. Secure the CR FFC with two clamps.
7. Secure the CR FFC with clamp.

Figure 3-64. Removing the PRINT HEAD
Install the PRINT HEAD following procedures. Clamp

(Step7)
1. Through the HEAD FFC into the ferrite core (with sheet). (see Sheet
Figure 3-63)
2. Connect the HEAD FFC to the connectors of the PRINT
HEAD. (see Figure 3-63) CR FFC
3. Secure the PRINT HEAD with three screws. (see Figure 3-64)
x
Hooks Hooks
Clamps
(Step6)

3.4.4.4 HEAD FFC 13. Disconnect the HEAD FFCs from the four connectors of the PRINT HEAD.
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) 14. Pull out the HEAD FFC from the Ferrite Core.
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p126) 15. Release the HEAD FFC from the four hooks of the CR UNIT.
3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p152) 16. Remove the Ferrite Core (with sheet).

5. Remove the FRONT COVER. (p118) Hooks Hooks
HEAD FFC
Ferrite Core
8. Unlock the CR UNIT. (p115) (with sheet)

10. Remove the DAMPER KIT (Do not remove the INK TUBE). (p155)
Connector Connector
PRINT HEAD
C H E C K Engaging the DUMPER KIT into the groove on the frame will
P O IN T make the work easier.
Figure 3-65. Removing the HEAD FFC

DUMPER KIT
Groove of the frame

17. Remove the three screws, and remove the Upper Reinforce Plate. 18. Remove the three screws, and remove the FFC Guide Assy.
(SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series/SC-T3200 series only)
Screwing the Upper Reinforce Plate in the order of (1) => (2) => (3)
as shown in Figure 3-66. FFC Guide Assy C
. C
Rear Main Frame

C
Upper Reinforce Plate
B
B
2 Figure 3-67. Removing the FFC (Top of the Rear Main Frame)
1
3
A
Figure 3-66. Removing the Upper Reinforce Plate

19. Disengage the four joints from the two each holes on the Sheet Guide FFC 20. Remove the two FFC clamps.
(SC-T3200 series: 3 joints, 21. Remove the screw that secures the Shield Plate FFC.
SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series/SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series: 4 joints).
D) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
 Attach the HEAD FFC, CR FFC, and Shield Plate FFC (Upper/
Joints and Lower) to the Carriage Main Assy as follows.
holes
HEAD FFC,
CR FFC
FFC Shield Plate

(Upper/Lower)
shown in the below figure.
Figure 3-68. Releasing the FFC (1)
x

22. Pull out the CR FFC and HAED FFC from the two Ferrite Cores. 24. Peel off the acetate tape.
25. Remove the four FFC Clamps on the side of the Rear Main Frame.
Screw
together
Positioning points
Shield Plate FFC Grounding wire Rear Main Frame
D
Carriage Ferrite Cores
Main Assy
CR FFC
Acetate tape
FFC Clamps
FFC Clamps
HEAD FFC
Figure 3-69. Removing the HEAD FFC (Top of the CR UNIT) Figure 3-71. Releasing the FFC (2)
23. Remove the Sheet Guide FFC Lower and the two Shield Plate FFC (SC-T3200 26. Remove the FFC Clamp from the APG Frame.
series: 1pcs) from the HEAD FFC and the CR FFC.
APG Frame
Sheet Guide FFC Lower/

Shield Plate FFC
FFC Clamp
HEAD FFC/
CR FFC
Figure 3-72. Releasing the FFC (3)

Figure 3-70. Removing the Sheet Guide FFC Lower/Shield Plate FFC

27. Remove the two FFC Clamps from the top of the Board Box.
 Applying the HEAD FFC
28. Disconnect the HAED FFC and the CR FFC from the connectors (CN100, CN101, To prevent noises caused by the contact between the SHEET ASSY
CN102) of the MAIN BOARD. and the frame.
• Apply double-sided tape on the HEAD FFC as follows.
29. Pull out the HAED FFC and the CR FFC from the Ferrite Core on the Board Box.
(Double-sided tape: NITTO 5000NS)
30. Remove the HEAD FFC. • For new HEAD FFC, use the pre-applied double-sided tape
on the new FFC.
• When replacing the HEAD FFC, start the procedure from
Step 3.
FFC Clamps
Ferrite Core
HEAD FFC
Gap
CN102
CN101
CN100
1. Peel off the acetate tape.

HEAD FFC
CR FFC
SHEET ASSY
MAIN BOARD
Acetate tape
HEAD FFC
Figure 3-73. Removing the HEAD FFC (Around the Board Box)

2. Peel off the HEAD FFC from the frame. 4. Apply the HEAD FFC (outer) to the HEAD FFC (inner).
5. Apply double-sided tape (10 mm x 35 mm) on the HEAD FFC
HEAD FFC (inner) at the point shown in the figure below.
Double-sided tape
HEAD FFC (outer)
Double-sided tape
(10 mm × 35 mm)
HEAD FFC (inner)
Frame
6. Apply double-sided tape (20 mm x 40 mm) on the HEAD FFC
3. Apply double-sided tape (10 mm x 35 mm) on the HEAD FFC (inner) at the point shown in the figure below. (Do not peel off
(outer) at the point shown in the figure below. the currently applied double-sided tape because doing so may
damage the FFC.)
HEAD FFC (outer)
Double-sided tape (old) Double-sided tape (new)
(20 mm × 40 mm)
Double-
sided tape
Double-sided tape
(10 mm × 35 mm)
HEAD FFC (inner)

7. Measure the distance using a scale from the fourth clamp from Table 3-2. Attachment point (SC-T3200 series)
the home (the third clamp for SC-T3200 series) to the fold line
of the HEAD FFC. After service parts Distance from
Remark
name/code the home side
8. Peel off the two pieces of back paper of the double-sided tape HARNESS (549)/
and apply it on the application point on the frame determined 2142133 (Old part)
by measuring the HEAD FFC. (For the details of application HARNESS (550)/
76 ± 1mm
points, see table 3-2 to table 3-4.) 2142135 (Old part)
HARNESS (551)/
2148219 (Old part)  Measure the distance between
the third clamp from the home
HARNESS (549)/
to the fold line of the HEAD
Fold line Clamp 2170115 (New part)
FFC.
HARNESS (550)/  Application points varies
2170116 (New part) depending on the after service
Object HARNESS (551)/ parts code of the HEAD FFC.
distance 101 ± 1mm
2170117 (New part)
HARNESS HEAD
ASSY.,ASP (three
Attachment pieces of sets)/
point 1663525
Table 3-3. Attachment point (SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series)

After service parts Distance from
Remark
x
HARNESS (549)/
2142134
Measure the distance between the
HARNESS (550)/
90 ± 1mm fourth clamp from the home to the
2142136
fold line of the HEAD FFC.
HARNESS (551)/
2148220

9. Secure the HEAD FFC to the frame with the acetate tape.
Table 3-4. Attachment point (SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series) (Start application on the outside of the frame 5 mm away from
the edge.)
After service parts Distance from
Remark
HARNESS (549)/
2142134
Measure the distance between the
HARNESS (550)/
122 ± 1mm fourth clamp from the home to the
2142136 5 mm
fold line of the HEAD FFC.
HARNESS (551)/
2148220
Acetate tape
Frame
10. Confirm the gap between the edge of the frame roll roller and
the edge of the HEAD FFC is 4 mm or more.
Frame Roll Roller
4 mm or more
HEAD FFC

 Installation check for the shield plate FFC and HEAD FFC 2. Confirm the gap between the HEAD FFC and the Shield Plate
1. Move the CR UNIT back and forth from the home side to the FFC (Shield Plate FFC B for SC-T3200 series) falls within the
full side two times. (When moving the CR UNIT, support the standard range. (The gap between the HEAD FFC and the
SHEET ASSY with your hand to prevent the assy from Shield Plate FFC (Shield Plate FFC B) must be 15 mm or less.)
touching the protrusion.)
Shield Plate FFC
(Shield Plate FFCB)
Protrusion
SHEET ASSY
Gap
(15 mm or less)
Full side Home side
CR UNIT HEAD FFC
3. Otherwise, pull the slacked parts in the directions of the arrows

to eliminate the excess gap. (If the gap is still more than 15 mm
after this adjustment, re-apply the Sheet Guide FFC Upper and
try again.)

4. Move the CR UNIT back and forth from the home side to the
full side two times once again, and confirm the SHEET ASSY
does not come in contact with the frame. (If they are in contact
with each other, re-apply the Shield Plate FFC (Shield Plate
FFC B for SC-T3200 series). When re-applying the FFC, make
sure the FFC is in parallel with the standard line.) (Figure 3-93)
SHEET ASSY
Frame
Do not come
into contact.

3.4.4.5 CR FFC
CR FFC
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p117) Double-sided tape

11. Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p132) Figure 3-74. Removing the CR FFC

13. Remove the HEAD FFC. (p163)
14. Peel off the CR FFC, and remove the CR FFC.

3.4.4.6 SHEET ASSY 9. Slide the Upper Reinforce Plate as shown below.

2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p126) Upper Reinforce Plate

8. Remove the three screws, and remove the Upper Reinforce Plate.
Figure 3-76. Sliding the Upper Reinforce Plate
Screwing the Upper Reinforce Plate in the order of (1) => (2) => (3)
as shown in Figure 3-75. 10. Move the CR UNIT to the full side.
11. Remove the three screws, and remove the FFC Guide (right).
.
B FFC Guide (right)

B
2
1
C C C
3
A
Figure 3-77. Removing the FFC Guide (right)
Figure 3-75. Removing the Upper Reinforce Plate

12. Move the CR UNIT to the home side. 14. Remove the FFC clamp.
13. Disengage the four hooks of the Sheet Guide FFC Lower (SC-T3200 series: three 15. Remove the screw that secures the SHEET ASSY.
hooks).
Hooks FFC Clamp D
Sheet Guide FFC Lower
Figure 3-78. Releasing the Sheet Guide FFC Lower
Figure 3-79. Removing the SHEET ASSY

16. Remove the following parts.

After removing
 Sheet Guide FFC Lower: 1 pcs
 Sheet Guide FFC Upper: 1 pcs (SC-T3200 series: Shield Plate FFC B)
 Shield Plate FFC: 2 pcs (SC-T3200 series: 1 pcs) HEAD FFC
 Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower: 1 pcs
Sheet Guide FFC Upper (Shield Plate FFC B)
Shield Plate FFC

Figure 3-81. Removing the Shield Plate Assy (After disassembling)
Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower
Figure 3-80. Removing the Shield Plate Assy (Before disassembling)

 Installation procedure 4. Apply the following parts.
1. Clean the application point for the sheet FFC guide support lower shown in the Table 3-5. Parts correspondence table
figure below with alcohol. Parts name in this manual Product name After Service Parts name Qty.
2. Peel off the liner of the double-sided tape on the Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower. SC-T3200 series Sheet Guide FFC Lower 24
SC-T5200/SC-
Sheet Guide FFC Lower 36
Double-sided tape Sheet Guide FFC Lower T5200D series 1
Apply point SC-T7200/SC-
Sheet Guide FFC Lower 44
T7200D series
SC-T3200 series --- ---
SC-T5200/SC-
Sheet Guide FFC Upper 36
Sheet Guide FFC Upper T5200D series
1
SC-T7200/SC-
Sheet FFC guide support lower Sheet Guide FFC Upper 44
T7200D series
SC-T3200 series Shield Plate FFC 24 1
Figure 3-82. Applying the Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower (1) SC-T5200/SC-
Shield Plate FFC 36
Shield Plate FFC T5200D series
3. Apply the Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower. 2
SC-T7200/SC-
Shield Plate FFC 44
T7200D series
C H E C K Apply the Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower straight on the
SC-T3200 series Shield Plate FFC B 24 1
P O IN T application point.
SC-T5200/SC-
--- ---
Shield Plate FFC B T5200D series
SC-T7200/SC-
--- ---
T7200D series
x
Align the
edge
Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower
Figure 3-83. Applying the Sheet FFC Guide Support Lower (2)

6. Move the CR UNIT to the full side.

Sheet Guide FFC Upper (Shield Plate FFC B)
7. Place the Shield Plate FFC and the Sheet Guide FFC Lower in order on the HEAD
FFC.
C H E C K Install the Sheet Guide FFC Lower with the hooks down.
P O IN T
Shield Plate FFC Check orientation
Figure 3-84. Applying the Shield Plate Assy (1) Sheet Guide FFC Lower
5. Place the Sheet Guide FFC Upper (Shield Plate FFC B for SC-T3200 series) and
the Shield Plate FFC in order under the HEAD FFC. Hooks
C H E C K Set the Sheet Guide FFC Upper (Shield Plate FFC B) with the side
P O IN T with double-sided tape down.
HEAD FFC HEAD FFC

Shield Plate FFC Shield Plate FFC
Figure 3-86. Applying the Shield Plate Assy (3)
Sheet Guide FFC Upper

(Shield Plate FFC B)

8. Route the Shield Plate FFC between the CR UNIT and the HEAD FFC, and secure 11. Confirm the protrusions on the Sheet Guide FFC Lower and on the two Shield
it with the two hooks on the CR UNIT. Plate FFC are aligned and located in the position shown in the figure below.
(Shield plate FFC B and Shield Plate FFC for SC-T3000 series)
9. Set the protrusion of the Sheet Guide FFC Lower at the point in the figure below.
Protrusions
Protrusion Sheet Guide FFC Lower
Hooks
HEAD FFC
Shield plate FFC

12. Apply the FFC clamp.
13. Secure the grounding wire with the screw.
10. Place the other Shield Plate FFC (Shield Plate FFC B for SC-T3200 series) over
the HEAD FFC and secure it with the two hooks on the CR UNIT.
FFC clamp
.
HEAD FFC
Screw
Hook
Shield Plate FFC Grounding wire


14. Secure the Sheet Guide FFC Upper together with the two Shield Plate FFC with 15. Move the CR UNIT to the full side.
the four hooks on the Sheet Guide FFC Lower (Do the same for SC-T3200 series, 16. Mark the frame at the point shown on the table below.
secure the Shield Plate FFC together with the Shield Plate FFC B with the hooks
on the Sheet Guide FFC Lower). Table 3-6. Marking
Gap from
C H E C K Align the end of the Sheet Guide FFC Upper with the second hook Product name Distance from the home side
the edge
P O IN T from the home side on the Sheet Guide FFC Lower.
 142 ± 1mm (HEAD FFC ASP code: up to
2142133, 2142135, 2148219)
SC-T3200 series 6 mm
 162 ± 1mm (HEAD FFC ASP code: 2170115,
x
2170116, 2170117, 1663525 or later)
SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series 265 ± 1 mm 6 mm
Hook
SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series 392 ± 1 mm 6 mm
Second hook from

the home side Distance from the home side
Start measuring here
Shield Plate FFC

Sheet Guide FFC Upper
Gap from the edge

6 mm
Marking
Figure 3-92. Applying the Shield PlateAssy (9)

17. Mark the frame at the point 80 mm away (to the full side) from the point marked in 19. Align the end of the Sheet Guide FFC Upper (Shield Plate FFC B for SC-T3200
Step 16. series) with the point marked in Step 17.
20. Align the convex section of the Sheet Guide FFC Upper (Shield Plate FFC B for
C H E C K  Mark it while keeping the same gap (6 mm) from the edge.
P O IN T
SC-T3200 series) with the reference line.
 Do not use the guide lines on the frame because they are for the
assembly process in the factory. 21. Peel off the liner of the double-sided tape on the Sheet Guide FFC Upper (Shield
Plate FFC B for SC-T3200 series), and apply it.
18. Draw a 100-mm long reference line from the point marked in Step 17 to the full
side in parallel to the edge (keep the same gap (6 mm) from the edge).
Mark (Step 16)
Mark (Step 17) Sheet Guide FFC Upper
Reference line (100 mm) (Shield Plate FFC B)
Mark (Step 17) Mark (Step 16)
Mark (Step 17) Reference line (100 mm)
80 mm Convex section

Edge
Double-sided tape
22. Perform the "Applying the HEAD FFC" (p167).
23. Perform the "Installation check for the shield plate FFC and HEAD FFC" (p171).

3.4.4.7 CR SCALE
R E Q U IR E D


9. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR Rear Frame.

When installing the CR Rear Frame, check the following.
A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs  Align the two positioning points and secure with two screws
while pulling toward you.
Positioning point CR Rear Frame Positioning point
A CR Rear Frame

Positioning
point (lower) A
Positioning
point (lower)
 Move the CR UNIT from the left end of the Rear Frame to the
full side and check from the side to make sure that FFC
Rear Tube Guide
Protection Sheet and Rear Tube Guide are not interfering with
each other.
Full side Left edge of the Rear Frame

Figure 3-95. Removing the CR Rear Frame Rear Frame
CR UNIT

10. Remove the five screws, and remove the Rear Tube Guide.
Left side view
Rear Tube Guide
FFC Protection Sheet A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 4 pcs
CR UNIT
Left side Right side

L Reinforce Plate B
R Reinforce Plate
Positioning point
A A
A
Positioning points
Positioning point
Rear Tube Guide
Figure 3-96. Removing the Rear Tube Guide

11. Remove the Tension spring. 14. Remove the CR SCALE from the hook of the CR Scale Holder.
12. Remove the CR SCALE from the hook of the CR Scale Holder B.
Right side
CR Scale Holder
CR SCALE
Left side
Tension spring CR Scale Holder B
CR SCALE
Hook
Hook
Figure 3-97. Removing the CR SCALE (Left side)
13. Remove the CR SCALE from the two each hooks on the two CR Scale Holder.
Figure 3-99. Removing the CR SCALE (Right)
15. Remove the CR SCALE from the CR UNIT.
CR Scale Holder
 Since the CR SCALE has a specific orientation, install it in the
Hook Hook
direction so that you can read the letters L/R correctly from the
front.
 Route the CR SCALE through the detection point on the CR
ENCODER on the rear of the CR UNIT when installing it.
CR SCALE
Figure 3-98. Removing the CR SCALE (Center)

Side view
CR SCALE
CR ENCODER
Detection point
CR UNIT
Figure 3-100. Removing the CR SCALE

3.4.4.8 CR ENCODER
R E Q U IR E D
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. CR ENCODER
Connector
1. Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p342) A A

FFC
8. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p127) Figure 3-101. Removing the CR ENCODER
12. Remove the PRINT HEAD. (p161)
14. Remove the APG UNIT. (p193)
15. Remove the CR MOTOR. (p190)
16. Remove the CR SCALE. (p182)
17. Remove the CR UNIT. (p207)
18. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR ENCODER.
19. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the CR ENCODER.

3.4.4.9 CR TIMMING BELT In the next step, the two plastic washers at the both ends of the
C A U T IO N
pulley shaft will come off. Be careful not to lose them.
R E Q U IR E D
19. Remove the Pulley, Shaft, and Belt together from the Pulley Holder.
Pulley Cover A Shaft Pulley
7. Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p134) CR TIMMING BELT
Pulley Holder Plastic washer
9. Unlock the CR UNIT. (p115) Back side Shaft Plastic washer

15. Remove the CR MOTOR. (p190) Figure 3-102. Disassembling the Pulley Holder

18. Remove the two screws, and remove the Pulley Cover.
B) Silver M3x12 Machine screw: 1 pcs

20. Remove the CR TIMING BELT from the Belt Holder on the back side of the CR
UNIT.
CR UNIT
CR TIMING BELT
Belt Holder
Figure 3-103. Removing the CR TIMING BELT

3.4.4.10 CR MOTOR Left side

Screws
Pulley Holder
R E Q U IR E D
Belt tension screw

CR TIMMING BELT
Figure 3-104. Loosening the CR TIMMING BELT tension
14. Remove the CR TIMING BELT from the pinion gear of the CR MOTOR.
15. Remove the two screws that secure the CR MOTOR.
A) Silver M4x10 Machine screw: 2 pcs
Right side
CR MOTOR
11. Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p134) CR TIMMING BELT
Pinion gear
12. Loosen the two screws that secure the Pulley Holder.
A A
C H E C K Before loosening the tension at the next step, mark the position of
P O IN T the Pulley Holder to make the required adjustment easier.
13. Rotate the Belt tension screw counterclockwise to loosen the tension of the CR
TIMING BELT. Figure 3-105. Removing the CR TIMMING BELT

16. Disconnect the cable of the CR MOTOR from the connector (CN19) of the MAIN 18. Cut the cable tie that secures the cable, and remove the CR MOTOR.
BOARD.
17. Release the cable from five clamps.
CR MOTOR
Cable tie
Clamps
Clamp
Cable
MAIN BOARD
Figure 3-107. Removing the CR MOTOR
CN19

3.4.4.11 CR HP SENSOR
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) Hook

CR HP SENSOR
8. Disengage the hooks, and remove the CR HP SENSOR.
9. Disconnect the cable from the CR HP SENSOR.
Cable
Connector
Figure 3-108. Removing the CR HP SENSOR

3.4.4.12 APG UNIT

R E Q U IR E D
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. APG UNIT
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) Rear Tube Guide

B
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p126) B
Positioning point
3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p152) R Reinforce Plate
A
C A U T IO N When removing the R Reinforce Plate in the next step, take care
A
not to remove the Upper Reinforce Plate together. A
7. Remove the five screws, and remove the R Reinforce Plate.

B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs 1
 Pay attention to the positioning point (See Figure 3-109).

 Tighten three screws A of R Reinforce Plate as follows. 2 3
1. Temporarily tighten screw (1) in Figure 3-109.
2. Tighten screws (2) and (3) in order.
3. Tighten screw (1) fully.
R Reinforce Plate
Figure 3-109. Removing the R Reinforce Plate

8. Remove the three screws that secure the APG UNIT. 9. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the APG Motor, and remove the APG
UNIT.
APG Motor APG UNIT

Connector
Cable
APG UNIT
Positioning point
C Figure 3-111. Removing the Cable
C
Positioning point
CR MOTOR HOLDER
Figure 3-110. Removing the APG UNIT

3.4.4.13 PG SENSOR
2. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) PG SENSOR
Hook
12. Remove the PRINT HEAD. (p161) Figure 3-112. Removing the PG SENSOR
13. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p129) 19. Disconnect the Cable from the PG SENSOR.

Cable
Connector PG SENSOR
18. Disengage the hooks, and remove the PG SENSOR.
Figure 3-113. Removing the Cable

3.4.4.14 PUMP CAP UNIT C H E C K Refer to "3.4.6 Cutter Mechanism" (Page 247), make sure whether
P O IN T the printer has films to extend life.
R E Q U IR E D  the printer has films to extend life: perform from Step 11.
perform the specified operations including required adjustment.  the printer doesn’t have films to extend life: perform from Step
13.
11. Remove the film from the plate.
8. Unlock the CR UNIT.(p115)
C A U T IO N When removing the R Reinforce Plate in the next step, take care
not to remove the Upper Reinforce Plate together.
10. Remove the R Reinforce Plate. (p193)
When installing the R Reinforce Plate, make sure to tighten the Figure 3-114. Remove the film
screws on the R Reinforce Plate in the specified order following the
procedure (p193).

12. Flip the film and release 2 clamps. Then pull the Relay Connector forward.
Regarding the printers which have films to extend life, pass the
(No.7, No.11, No.34). edge of the film under the plate when setting the film. (To set the
film with sloping away from forward direction to perspective
direction.)
Clamp
Figure 3-115. Preparation of removing the Relay Connector
Plate
Edge of Film
C A U T IO N Regarding the printers which have films to extend life, there is

danger of smoking accident or firing accident by ink - leaking if you
don’t perform above procedures.

13. Disconnect the cables from the Relay Connector (No.7, No.11, No.34).
Upper side
14. Remove the three screws that secure the PUMP CAP UNIT.
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs A
A
C A U T IO N In the next step, waste ink may spill from the Waste Ink Tube if the PUMP CAP UNIT
tube is disconnected from the PUMP CAP UNIT. Prepare a waste
cloth or the like in advance and be careful not to contaminate the
surroundings.
A
15. Remove the Waste Ink Tube from the PUMP CAP UNIT. PUMP CAP UNIT
16. Remove the PUMP CAP UNIT in the direction of the arrow.
Relay Connector
(No.7, No.11, No.34)
Waste Ink
Tube
PUMP CAP UNIT
Figure 3-116. Removing the PUMP CAP UNIT

3.4.4.15 IC HOLDER C H E C K Refer to "3.4.6 Cutter Mechanism" (Page 247), make sure whether
P O IN T the printer has films to extend life.
R E Q U IR E D  the printer has films to extend life: perform from Step 17.
perform the specified operations including required adjustment.  the printer doesn’t have films to extend life: perform from Step
19.
17. Remove the film from the plate.

1. Perform the Ink eject. (p354)
11. Remove the REAR COVER
(SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only). (p234)
12. Remove the REAR COVER SENSOR
Figure 3-117. Remove the film
13. Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER
(SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p137)
14. Remove the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE
15. Remove the LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE
16. Remove the UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE

18. Flip the film and release 2 clamps. Then pull the Relay Connector forward.
C A U T IO N Regarding the printers which have films to extend life, there is
(No.2, No.8, No.10). danger of smoking accident or firing accident by ink - leaking if you
don’t perform above procedures.
Also, there is danger of mechanical errors due to noise.
19. Disconnect the cable from the Relay Connector (No.2, No.8, No.10).
Clamp
20. Remove the FFC from the back side of the IC HOLDER.
IC HOLDER
Relay Connector
(No.2, No.8, No.10)
FFC
Figure 3-118. Preparation of removing the Relay Connector
Regarding the printers which have films to extend life, perform the
procedures below.
 Dispose the Omega clamp. (due to change the wiring.)
Right side Zoomed
 Wire the cables as follows.

1. Pass the cable from the Main Board into the clamp.
Figure 3-119. Disconnecting the Relay connectors and FFC
2. Pass the clamp with making loop like figure below (right),
then lock the clamp. (To avoid the noise.)
 Pass the films under the plate when setting the film. (see p197)

21. Remove the screw that secures the Rear Cover 23. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the Maintenance Box Holder.
(SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series only). 24. Peel of the FFC from the frame and insert it into the edging saddle.
Back side
22. Disengage the boss of the Rear Cover, and remove the Rear Cover Double-sided tape
(SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series only).
Double-sided tape
Boss
FFC
Back side
Rear Cover
Edging saddle
A Maintenance Box Holder Connector
Figure 3-121. Releasing the FFC
Figure 3-120. Removing the Rear Cover

25. Remove the four screws that secure the IC HOLDER.

IC HOLDER
26. Pull the IC holder slightly toward you.
INK TUBE
Front side
C
C
B B
B B
Figure 3-123. Removing the IC HOLDER (2)

IC HOLDER
 Before installing the joint, make sure the Joint Rubber are
Figure 3-122. Removing the IC HOLDER (1) attached to it.
 Before attaching the Joint Rubber, let it get wet with cleaning
C A U T IO N When the INK TUBE is removed at the following step, ink may liquid.
drip off from the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance
and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
tightening torque about 0.39±0.05 Nm
27. Remove the two screws, and remove the INK TUBE from the IC HOLDER. Joint Rubber
C) Silver M2.5x16 Machine screw: 2 pcs

28. Remove the IC HOLDER while pulling out the FFC.

3.4.4.16 INK TUBE

R E Q U IR E D
INK TUBE
DAMPER KIT
1. Perform the Ink eject. (p354) A
3. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) A

Figure 3-124. Removing the INK TUBE (1)
9. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p127)  Before installing the joint, make sure the Joint Rubber are
attached to it.
10. Unlock the CR UNIT. (p115)  Before attaching the Joint Rubber, let it get wet with cleaning
11. Remove the CR COVER. (p154) liquid.
12. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p129) tightening torque about 0.39±0.05 Nm
14. Remove the CR Sub Fixing Plate. (p157) Joint Rubber
C A U T IO N When the INK TUBE is removed at the following step, ink may
drip off from the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance
and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
15. Remove the two screws, and remove the INK TUBE from the DAMPER KIT.

16. Disengage the two each hooks on the five (SC-T3200 series: four) Tube Holders, When mounting the Tube Holders, attach the following points:
and release the INK TUBE.  Move the INK TUBE to the position shown in Fig 3-103 before
reassembling.
Tube Holder  Work on installation with a turn from No.1 holder which is the
nearest to CR Unit to No.5 holder.
 Only No.1 holder, mounting direction is upside down of the
other holders. Projection of a holder is mounted upward only
No.1. (purpose: prevent noise during CR movement)
Hooks
Holder No.1: Projection is in the upside.
Tube Holders
INK TUBE
5 Holder No.2-5: Projection is in the downside.
4
3  After attaching holders, adjust digit position of them in the
2 center of mark holes on the Tube Guide Plate.
1
Figure 3-125. Removing the INK TUBE (Left side)
Holder No.2-5 Holder No.1

Adjust in the center of holes Adjust in the center of holes

17. Remove the screw and release the INK TUBE by lifting the Front Tube fixing 18. Disengage the hooks, and remove the three Tube Holders.
Plate.
B) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs Back side
Tube Holder
Take care not to press the INK TUBE flat with the Front Tube Hook
fixing Plate.
Back side Front Tube fixing

Plate
INK TUBE
Tube Holders
Figure 3-127. Removing the Tube Holder

Front Tube fixing Plate
Figure 3-126. Releasing the INK TUBE (Front side)

19. Remove the two screws, and remove the INK TUBE from the IC HOLDER.
 When installing the INK TUBE, attach it with the red line
C) Silver M2.5x16 screw: 2 pcs facing down.
 Before installing the joint, make sure the Joint Rubber are
C H E C K If you find it difficult to remove the INK TUBE, remove the four attached to it.
P O IN T screws that secure the IC HOLDER and pull the holder slightly  Before attaching the Joint Rubber, let it get wet with cleaning
toward you when working on it. (p.199) liquid.
Joint Rubber
IC HOLDER
INK TUBE
C
C
Figure 3-128. Removing the INK TUBE (3)

3.4.4.17 CR UNIT
R E Q U IR E D
Items and the Order by Repaired Part" (p290) and make sure to A
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. A
1. Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p342) Belt tension screw

Pulley Holder Assy
Figure 3-129. Removing the Pulley Holder Assy
17. Remove the Belt tension screw and the two screws on the upper part of the Pulley
Holder Assy, then remove the Pulley Holder Assy.

18. Pull out the HEAD FFC from the Ferrite Core. 20. Remove the two FFC clamps from the top of the CR UNIT.
19. Release the HEAD FFC from the two hooks of the CR UNIT. 21. Remove the screw that secures the FFC Shield Plate.
Hook shown in the below figure.
Hook
Ferrite Core HEAD FFC

22. Pull out the HEAD FFC and CR FFC from the two Ferrite Cores.
Screw
together
FFC Shield Plate and Positioning points
Lower FFC Sheet Guide Grounding wire
B
Carriage Ferrite Core
Main Assy
CR FFC
Figure 3-130. Removing the HEAD FFC
FFC Clamps
HEAD FFC
Figure 3-131. Removing the HAED FFC and CR FFC (Top of the CR UNIT)

23. Remove the Wiper Cleaner. 26. Remove the CR UNIT while sliding in the direction of the arrow.
24. Remove the five screws, and remove the CR Motor Holder.
CR UNIT
25. Remove the screw, and remove the CR Scale Holder.
CR Motor Holder
C
C
D
Wiper Cleaner
C
C
CR Scale
Holder
Figure 3-133. Removing the CR UNIT
Figure 3-132. Removing the CR Scale Holder

3.4.4.18 IM SENSOR
R E Q U IR E D

A
6. Remove the FRONT COVER. (p118) Sensor Cover
CR UNIT
8. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p127) Hooks
Sensor Cover
Figure 3-134. Removing the Sensor Cover
18. Remove the screw that secures the Sensor Cover.
19. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the Sensor Cover.

20. Disconnect the FFC from the IM SENSOR, and remove the IM SENSOR.
Make sure that you can see the light emitter/receiver of the IM
SENSOR through the hole on the Sensor Cover. IM SENSOR
FFC
IM SENSOR
(Light emitter/receiver)
Hole
Connector
Sensor Cover
Figure 3-135. Removing the IM SENSOR

3.4.4.19 PW SENSOR
R E Q U IR E D

A
Sensor Cover
CR UNIT
Hooks
Sensor Cover
18. Remove the screw that secures the Sensor Cover.
19. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the Sensor Cover.

20. Disconnect the FFC from the PW SENSOR, and remove the PW SENSOR.
Make sure that you can see the light emitter/receiver of the PW
SENSOR through the hole on the Sensor Cover.
PW SENSOR
(Light emitter/receiver)
PW SENSOR
FFC
Sensor Cover Connector
Hole
Figure 3-137. Removing the PW SENSOR

3.4.5 Paper Feed Mechanism

Tension Spring
3.4.5.1 PF MOTOR
R E Q U IR E D
Items and the Order by Repaired Part" (p290) and make sure to A
PF MOTOR
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) PF Motor

Mounting Plate
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p117) A

6. Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p134) Positioning point

Figure 3-138. Removing the PF Motor Mounting Plate
9. Remove the Tension Spring.
10. Remove the two screws, and remove the PF Motor Mounting Plate.
Pay attention to the positioning point (See Figure 3-138).

11. Remove the two screws, and remove the PF MOTOR from the PF Motor 13. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN1) of the SUB-B BOARD.
Mounting Plate. 14. Release the cable from the four clamps, and remove the PF MOTOR.
A) Silver M3x5 Machine screw: 2 pcs
12. Release the cable from the Edging Saddle. SUB-B BOARD
PF MOTOR
Edging Saddle
PF Motor
Mounting Plate
CN1
PF MOTOR
B
B Cable
Clamp
Cable
Figure 3-139. Removing the PF MOTOR

3.4.5.2 PF SCALE
A D J U S T M E N T When replacing this part, refer to "4.1.2 Adjustment Items and
R E Q U IR E D PF SCALE
the Order by Repaired Part" (p290) and make sure to perform the
specified operations including required adjustment.

9. Remove the PF ENCODER. (p217)
Figure 3-141. Removing the PF SCALE
10. Remove the PF SCALE.

3.4.5.3 PF ENCODER
R E Q U IR E D
PF Encoder Assy
Hooks
A
9. Remove the screw that secures the PF Encoder Assy.
Figure 3-142. Removing the PF Encoder Assy
10. Disengage the two hooks of the PF Encoder Assy, and remove the PF Encoder
Assy.
Engage the two hooks on the PF Encoder Assy under the PF Roller
Frame by sliding the assy.
PF Encoder Assy
Hooks
PF Roller Frame

11. Remove the screw, and remove the PF ENCODER.

B) Silver M2.5x6 P-tite screw: 1 pcs
12. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the PF ENCODER.
FFC
Connector
PF ENCODER
Figure 3-143. Removing the PF ENCODER

3.4.5.4 PF TIMING BELT  Pay attention to the positioning point (See Figure 3-144).
 Engage the hook on the PF Shade Cover into the hole on the
R E Q U IR E D Left Frame.
Inside
Left Frame
PF Shade Cover
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) Hook

PF Shade Cover
9. Remove the PF ENCODER. (p217)
10. Remove the Tension Spring. (p214)
11. Remove the PF TIMING BELT from the pinion gear of the PF MOTOR.
12. Remove the screw, and remove the PF Shade Cover. PF TIMING BELT

Pinion gear
A Left Frame
Positioning point
Figure 3-144. Removing the PF Shade Cover

13. Remove the PF TIMING BELT.
PF TIMING BELT
Figure 3-145. Removing the PF TIMING BELT

3.4.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER 7. Remove the Pressure Roller Shaft from the four grooves of the Release Roller
Assy.
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p126) Release Roller Assy
Pressure Roller Shaft
6. Rotate the Combination Gear 18.4, 37.6 counterclockwise to set the PRESSURE
ROLLER in the release position.
Grooves
Combination Gear 18.4, 37.6

Grooves
Figure 3-147. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER (1)

8. Pull out the Pressure Roller Shaft from the three PRESSURE ROLLERs.
PRESSURE ROLLER
Figure 3-146. Rotate the Combination Gear 18.4, 37.6

Pressure Roller Shaft
Figure 3-148. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER (2)

3.4.5.6 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR 10. Remove the two Plastic washers, and remove the Combination gear 26, 12.8 and
Combination gear 18.4, 37.6.
11. Remove the two screws, and remove the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR.
A) Silver M2.6x4 machine screw: 2 pcs
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p117) Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR
A
8. Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p131) A
9. Remove the Rear Cover Cap while sliding in the direction of the arrow.
Pay attention to the positioning point (See Figure 3-149).
Plastic washers
Combination gear 26, 12.8
Figure 3-150. Removing the Combination gear 26, 12.8 and Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
Rear Cover Cap
Positioning point
L Roll Side Frame
Figure 3-149. Removing the Rear Cover Cup

12. Remove the Motor Cover.

13. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR,
and remove the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR.
PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR

Cable
Connector
Motor Cover
Figure 3-151. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR

3.4.5.7 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR

PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR
9. Remove the PF MOTOR. (p214)
10. Rotate the Combination gear 18.4, 37.6 counterclockwise to set the PRESSURE
ROLLER in the release position (The sensor is in the transmissive state.).
C H E C K Confirm the status of the PRESSURE ROLLER with the relative

Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
P O IN T positions of the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR and Spur Gear 43
as shown below.
Figure 3-152. Rotate the Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
Spur Gear 43
PRESSURE ROLLER: Release PRESSURE ROLLER: Nip

Sensor: Transmissive Sensor: Shaded

11. Remove the Plastic washer of the Combination gear 29, 59.2, and pull the 14. Disconnect the cable from the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR.
Combination gear 29, 59.2 slightly toward you.
12. Loosen the screw that secures the Spur gear 43, and pull the Spur gear 43 slightly PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR
toward you.
Combination gear 29, 59.2 Connector

Spur gear 43
Cable
Screw Figure 3-155. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR (3)

Plastic washer
Figure 3-153. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR (1)

13. Disengage the hooks, and remove the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR.
Hook
Figure 3-154. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR (2)

3.4.5.8 ATC MOTOR 7. Remove the Motor Cover from the ATC MOTOR.

R E Q U IR E D ATC MOTOR
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. Motor Cover

6. Remove the two screws, and remove the ATC MOTOR
A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs Figure 3-157. Removing the Motor Cover
8. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the ATC MOTOR.
ATC MOTOR
A
A
Cable
ATC MOTOR
Figure 3-158. Removing the Cable
Figure 3-156. Removing the ATC MOTOR

3.4.5.9 PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER) 3. Disengage the hook, and remove the PE SENSOR.
1. Remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME. (p138) 4. Release the cable from the hook of the Holder.
2. Remove the two screws, and remove the PE Sensor Assy. 5. Disconnect the cable from the PE SENSOR.

Back side
Hook
Back side
PE Sensor Assy
A
A
Connector
PE SENSOR
Holder
Cable
Figure 3-159. Removing the PE Sensor Assy Hook
Figure 3-160. Removing the PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER)

3.4.5.10 PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER) Back side

1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) Rear Paper Guide
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p117) A
A
6. Remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME. (p138)
(SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p137) Rear Paper Guide

13. Remove the two screws, and remove the Rear Paper Guide in the direction of the
arrow (SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series only).
Figure 3-161. Removing the Rear Paper Guide

14. Release the two hooks on the PE Sensor Assy, and remove the PE Sensor Assy to
the back side.
PE Sensor Assy
Hooks
Figure 3-162. Removing the PE Sensor Assy

15. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the Sensor Cap.
16. Disconnect the FFC from the PE SENSOR.
Back side
Hooks PE SENSOR
Connector
FFC
Sensor Cap
Figure 3-163. Removing the PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER)

3.4.5.11 PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR

Paper Thickness Sensor Assy
R E Q U IR E D
A
A
5. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p127) Figure 3-164. Removing the Paper Thickness Sensor Assy
6. Remove the two screws, and remove the Paper Thickness Sensor Assy while 7. Disengage the hook, and remove the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR.
sliding in the direction of the arrow. 8. Disconnect the cable from the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR.
A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs 9. Release the cable from the hook of the Sensor Holder.
Installing the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR following standard.

Connector Hook Hooks
Paper Thickness Sensor Hook

Sensor Holder
Connector
5 mm +/- 1 mm
Cable
PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR

5 mm +/- 1 mm
Figure 3-165. Removing the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR

3.4.5.12 PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT 14. Remove the eight screws, and remove the four Rear Paper Guide in the direction
of the arrow
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p117) Back side
5. Remove the FRONT COVER. (p118) Rear Paper Guide

(SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only). (p234) A
A
(SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p244) Rear Paper Guide
13. Remove the four Platen Adjust Cam Cover.
Back side Platen Adjust Cam Cover
Figure 3-167. Removing the Rear Paper Guide
Figure 3-166. Removing the Platen Adjust Cam Cover

15. Rotate the Combination gear 18.4, 37.6 three turns counterclockwise to set the 16. Remove the eight screws that secure the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT using
PRESSURE ROLLER in the release state. the ratchet driver.
A A
Back side
Disk part Do not remove this screw
Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
Figure 3-168. Rotate the Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT
C A U T IO N In the next step, do not remove the screw and touch the disk part as
Figure 3-169. Removing the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT (1)
shown Figure 3-169.

17. Disengage the tab of the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT using the flat-head
screwdriver or the similar tool, and slide it to the left.
18. Lift the PF Roller and loosen the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT.
19. Slide the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT in the direction of the arrow to
release the two hooks, and remove it toward you.
PF Roller
Hook
PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT
Hook
Tab
Step 19
Step 17
Figure 3-170. Removing the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT (2)

3.4.5.13 REAR COVER 2. Remove the four screws, and remove the REAR COVER.
C H E C K This section applies to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only.
P O IN T
1. Loosen the three Plastic screw, and open the REAR COVER.
REAR COVER REAR COVER
Plastic screw Plastic screw Plastic screw
C A U T IO N
Do not remove
A
Figure 3-171. Removing the REAR COVER (1)
C A U T IO N In the next step, do not remove the screw as shown Figure 3-172.
Figure 3-172. Removing the REAR COVER (2)

3.4.5.14 REAR COVER SENSOR 3. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the REAR COVER SENSOR.
4. Disconnect the cable from the connector.
P O IN T
Route the cable through the two grooves on the REAR BOARD
PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (Figure 3-174)
1. Remove the REAR COVER. (p234)

2. Remove the two screws, and remove the Rear Cover Fixing Plate.
A) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 2 pcs Groove Cable Connector
REAR BOARD
PAPER GUIDE ASSY
Rear Cover Fixing Plate
Hook
A Hook
A
REAR COVER SENSOR
Figure 3-174. Removing the REAR COVER SENSOR
Figure 3-173. Removing the Rear Cover Fixing Plate

3.4.5.15 1st PPK ROLLER ASSY

Release Assy Home side
This section applies to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only. Guide
C H E C K
P O IN T
Full side
A
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) Extension
Spring
5. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p127) Extension Spring
1st PPK ROLLER ASSY
7. Remove the 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B. (p241)
8. At the full side, remove the Extension spring.
9. Remove the Sensor Holder. (p238)
10. At the home side, remove the Extension Spring.
11. Remove the screw, and remove the Release Assy Guide.
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 1 pcs Shaft
Shaft
12. Remove the 1st PPK ROLLER ASSY from the shafts of the frame.
1st PPK ROLLER ASSY
Figure 3-175. Remove the 1st PPK ROLLER ASSY
Lubrication When replaced with a new part, make sure to lubricate the new one
referring to "5.6 Lubrication" (p393).

3.4.5.16 1st PAPER GUIDE

.

P O IN T
Back side
A A A A A A A A

A A A A A A A A A A A
8. Remove the 1st PAPER PARK ROLLER ASSY. (p236)
10. Remove the nineteen screws.
1st PAPER GUIDE
Figure 3-176. Removing the 1st PAPER GUIDE
11. Remove the four 1st PAPER GUIDE from the full side.

3.4.5.17 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR

P O IN T Sensor Holder

Cable
accessing screws. A
A
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) Clamp

Figure 3-177. Removing the Sensor Holder
9. Release the cable from the clamp of the Sensor Holder.
10. Remove the two screws, and remove the Sensor Holder.

11. Remove the two screws.

B) Silver M2.6x4 S-tite screw: 2 pcs
C A U T IO N So as not to let the motor drop, hold the motor when removing it.

Motor Cover
Cables
Connector
B
1st PAPER FEED MOTOR
Figure 3-178. Removing the 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR

3.4.5.18 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR

P O IN T
A

A
5. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p127) Cable
6. Remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME. (p138) Connector
7. Remove the two screws.

1st PPK RELEASE
A) Silver M2.6x4 S-tite screw: 2 pcs MOTOR
C A U T IO N So as not to let the motor drop, hold the motor when removing it.

Motor Cover
Figure 3-179. Removing the 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR

3.4.5.19 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B

Hole
P O IN T Sensor Cover

Plastic ring
6. Rotate the Sensor Cover until the hole comes on the top.
7. Remove the Plastic ring, and remove the Sensor Cover and the parallel pin.
8. Disengage the four hooks, and remove the 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B.
C A U T IO N Be careful not to drop the parallel pin.
9. Disconnect the cables from the connectors.
Parallel pin
1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR B
Hooks Hooks
Connector
Connector
Cable
Hooks Hooks
Cable
Figure 3-181. Removing the 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B

3.4.5.20 REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE

P O IN T
Full side A Adjustment
Screw
1. Open the REAR COVER. (p234) Home side A

A
2. Remove the REAR COVER SENSOR. (p235)

Adjustment
3. Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p137) Screw
4. Loosen the two Adjustment Screw.

A A
5. Remove the five screws that secure the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE ASSY.
Rear Cover
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 5 pcs Cap
6. Pull out the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE at home side.

7. Pull out the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE from the full side taking care not to
let it come in contact with the Rear Cover Cap.
REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE
Figure 3-182. Removing the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE

3.4.5.21 UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE

P O IN T
A A A A A A A A
1. Open the REAR COVER. (p234)

2. Remove the REAR COVER SENSOR. (p235)
4. Remove the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE. (p242)
UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE
5. Remove the LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE. (p244) (Full side)
6. Remove the eight screws, and remove the four UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE.
Figure 3-183. Removing the UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE
Tighten the screws in the order shown in below.
7 8 5 6 3 4 1 2

3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE 3. Pull the 2nd Roll Unit frontward.
4. Remove the four LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE by pulling them downward.
P O IN T
LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE

2. Remove the fourteen screws.
Tighten the screws in the order shown in below. 2nd Roll Unit
14 13 10 9 6 5 2
12 11 8 7 4 3 1
Figure 3-185. Removing the LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (2)
A A A A A A A
A A A A A A A
LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE

(Full side)
Figure 3-184. Removing the LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (1)

3.4.5.23 PLATEN BASE ASP  Tighten Cup S-tite screw (Silver) from 1 to 4.
1. Remove the sub platens and platens. (p384)
IN CASE OF REPLACEMENT OF PLATEN BASE

2. Remove the Platen base from full side (Order of Part D, C, B, A).
D C B A
 Tighten Bending washer S-tite screw (Black) from 1 to 14.
Figure 3-186. Removing the platen bases
 Part D
Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 4 pcs
Black M3 Bending washer S-tite screw: 7 pcs
 Part C
Black M3 Bending washer S-tite screw: 12 pcs  Parts B, C and D are same as Part A. First tighten Cup S-tite
 Part B screw (Silver), then tighten Bending washer S-tite screw
Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 4 pcs (Black).
Black M3 Bending washer S-tite screw: 14 pcs (In case of SC-T3x00 case 12
pcs) IN CASE IT'S POSSIBLE TO CLEAN THE INSIDE OF PLATEN BASE
 Part A
Clean the Platen base full of waste ink with waste clothes or the like, then attach the ink
absorbing pad and the gutter film to same place of the Platen base.
Black M3 Bending washer S-tite screw: 14 pcs
3. Attach the new Platen base ASP from Home side.
2. Insert the gutter film between
paper guide base and ink
absorbing pad.
1. Insert the film under the ink

absorbing pad.
Figure 3-187. Transferring the ink absorbing pad and gutter film

If ink is sucked to suction hole of the Platen base, ink might reach the suction fan, so
please consider to replace the printer in order to avoid ink leakage from the suction fan.
4. Remove the contaminated ink pad from the platen and replace it with a new one.
5. Make sure to insert the legs of the ink pad into the holes on the platen base, then
install the five platens (install the one on the home side first).
6. Install the four sub platen.
7. Install the TOP COVER.
8. Install the PANEL BOARD.
9. Install the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER.
10. Install the UPPER LEFT COVER.

3.4.6 Cutter Mechanism 8. Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p131)

C H E C K Regarding to this printer, there are 2 types of the printers;
P O IN T One is the printer which have films to extend the life and the Other 10. Remove the FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER. (p136)
is the printer which doesn’t have films not to extend the life. 11. Remove the IH COVER. (p121)
You can find out which type is matched to make sure whether the
film is set on the Cutter Motor with opening the cover and taking a 12. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B. (p120)
look. 13. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE. (p119)
 Printers which have films to extend the life:
The film is set on the Cutter Motor. 14. Disconnect the sensor cable from the Relay Connector (No.27).
 Printers which don’t have films not to extend the life: 15. Release the sensor cable from the four clamps.
The film is Not set on the Cutter Motor.
16. Remove the pieces of acetate tape, and release the sensor cable.
Film 17. Release the sensor cable from the hook of the CR Spacer.
CUTTER UNIT
Sensor cable
CR Spacer
Front of Full side Cutter Motor
3.4.6.1 CUTTER UNIT

Clamp
R E Q U IR E D
Items and the Order by Repaired Part" (p290) and make sure to Hook
perform the specified operations including required adjustment. Acetate tape
Clamps

Relay Connector
4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p117) (No.27)
5. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p127) Figure 3-188. Releasing the Sensor Cable

C H E C K Regarding the printers which have films to extend the life, Perform Regarding the printers which have films to extend life, pass the hole
P O IN T follows before Step 18. of film into the plate.
 Remove the two screws.
Hole

19. Disconnect the motor cable from the connector of the Cutter Motor.
Cutter Motor
 Remove the film and Lift the plate. Motor Cover
Motor cable
Connector
Figure 3-189. Releasing the Motor Cable

20. Remove the two screws, and remove the CUTTER UNIT.
A) Silver M3x6 screw: 2 pcs
CUTTER UNIT
Positioning
Positioning point
point Positioning point
A
A
Bottom Frame
Figure 3-190. Removing the CUTTER UNIT

3.4.7 Fans
3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p126) BOARD BOX FAN

7. Remove the two screws, and remove the Fan Frame.
9. Release the cable from the clamp.
Figure 3-192. Removing the BOARD BOX FAN
Fan Frame Clamp
Cable
CN24
Figure 3-191. Removing the Fan Frame

10. Remove the screw, and remove the BOARD BOX FAN.
B) Silver M3x20 Bind machine screw: 1 pcs

3.4.7.2 PW FAN
1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) MAIN BOARD
2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p126) CN29
3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p152) Clamp

5. Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p127) PW FAN
Cable
8. Remove the Fan Frame. (p144) A
A
9. Remove the Option Fixing Plate. (p144)
11. Release the cable from the clamp
12. Remove the two screws, and remove the PW FAN.
A) Silver M3x20 Bind machine screw: 2 pcs
Figure 3-193. Removing the PW FAN

3.4.7.3 HDD FAN

1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133) Option Fixing Plate

HDD FAN
A
8. Remove the Fan Frame. (p144)
9. Remove the Option Fixing Plate. (p144)
10. Remove the two screws, and remove the HDD FAN.
A) Silver M3x20 Bind machine screw: 2 pcs
A
Figure 3-194. Removing the HDD FAN

3.4.7.4 SUCTION FAN 3. Disconnect the cable from the Relay Connector.
4. Remove the two sewers, and remove the SUCTION FAN.
R E Q U IR E D
Items and the Order by Repaired Part" (p290) and make sure to B) Silver M3x40 screw: 2 pcs
Bottom side SUCTION FAN
1. Remove the screw that secures the Fan Cover.

2. Slide the Fan Covers in the direction of the arrows to engage the two each hooks,
and remove the two Fan Covers.
Bottom side
Fan Cover
Hooks Hooks
SUCTION FAN
A A
Figure 3-195. Removing the Fan Cover Relay Connector
Figure 3-196. Removing the SUCTION FAN

3.4.8 Auto Take-up Reel Hook TAKE-UP REEL COVER Auto Take-up Reel
3.4.8.1 TAKE-UP REEL COVER

1. Remove the two screws that secure the Auto Take-up Reel.
A) Silver, Phillips, Pan S-tite with S.W & P.W. M4x10: 2 pcs
2. Hold up the Auto Take-up Reel to disengage the hook, and remove the Auto Take-
up Reel.
3. Remove the four screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL COVER, and remove
the TAKE-UP REEL COVER from the Auto Take-up Reel.
B) Black, Phillips, Pan P-tite M3x10: 4 pcs
4. Disengage the six hooks that secure the Panel Cover from inside, and remove the
Panel Cover from the TAKE-UP REEL COVER.
A
B
Figure 3-197. Removing the Auto Take-up Reel
TAKE-UP REEL COVER
Panel Cover
Hook
Figure 3-198. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL COVER

3.4.8.2 TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR

1. Remove the screw that secures the TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR.
A) Black, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x10: 1 pcs
2. Remove the TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR from the Auto Take-up Reel.
3. Disconnect the connector from the TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR.
Auto Take-up Reel

TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR
Figure 3-199. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR

3.4.8.3 TAKE-UP REEL LED A

1. Remove the Flange from the Auto Take-up Reel.
2. Remove the TAKE-UP REEL COVER. (p254) TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
A
A
3. Disconnect the connector (CN1) on the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD.
Power Supply Unit
4. Remove the four screws that secure the Power Supply Unit, and remove the Power
Supply Unit.
A) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6: four pieces: 4 pcs
5. Disconnect the connector (CN23) on the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD. CN1
6. Release the harness from the cable guide, and remove the TAKE-UP REEL LED.
A
Auto Take-up Reel
Flange
Figure 3-201. Removing the Power Supply Unit
TAKE-UP REEL LED
TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
Cable guide CN23
Figure 3-200. Removing the Flange
Figure 3-202. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL LED

3.4.8.4 TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH

Flange Auto Take-up Reel
1. Remove the Flange from the Auto Take-up Reel.
2. Remove the TAKE-UP REEL COVER. (p254)
Supply Unit.
A) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6: 4 pcs
A TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD

A
Power Supply Unit
CN1


Panel Cover
6. Remove the four screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH, and remove the
TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH from the Panel Cover. TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH
B) Black, Phillips, Bind P-tite screw M2x7 (bit: No.1): 4 pcs TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
B
Install the TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH with the “ON/OFF/ON”
inscription to the right. And install the TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH
with “M” inscription to the Manual side.
CN17
B
Inscription Figure 3-205. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH

3.4.8.5 TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD

1. Remove the Flange from the Auto Take-up Reel. Flange Auto Take-up Reel
3. Remove the two screws that secure the Plate A, and remove the Plate A.
4. Remove the two screws that secure the Plate B, and remove the Plate B.
B) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6: 1 pcs
C) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M4x8: 1 pcs
Plate B
C
Plate A
B A
Figure 3-207. Removing the Plate A/B

5. Remove the six screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD, and remove the
TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD.
D) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6: 6 pcs TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD
6. Disconnect the connectors (CN1, CN2) on the TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD. CN2
CN1
Figure 3-208. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD

3.4.8.6 TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR


Supply Unit.

A
Power Supply Unit
CN1

5. Remove the two screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD Unit.

6. Disconnect the connector from the TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR, and remove the TAKE-
UP REEL MAIN BOARD Unit.
C
7. Remove the C-Ring.
8. Remove the four screws that secure the Motor Mounting Plate, and remove the Motor
Mounting Plate.
C) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M4x8: 4 pcs Motor Mounting Plate
9. Remove the two gears from the Motor Mounting Plate.

10. Remove the two screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR, and remove the
TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR.
C-Ring
D) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite with S.W & P.W. M3x6: 2 pcs
Figure 3-212. Removing the Motor Mounting Plate

TAKE-UP REEL
MAIN BOARD Unit
B
TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR
Motor Mounting Plate

Connector
Gear
Figure 3-211. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD Unit
Gear
Figure 3-213. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR

3.4.8.7 TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD


Supply Unit.

A
Power Supply Unit
CN1

5. Remove the four screws that secure the Shield Plate, and remove the three clamps and CN1 CN24* CN23 CN17 CN19* CN18
the Shield Plate. CN14*

6. Disconnect all the connectors on the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD.
CN4*
7. Remove the three screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD, and
CN11* CN2*
remove the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD.
C) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6: 3 pcs CN10* CN15*
CN3
CN8* CN26*
Clamps
Clamp
CN22 CN28
CN7* CN29
*: Unused connectors
Figure 3-217. Connector location
C
TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
C
Shield Plate
Figure 3-216. Removing the Removing the Shield Plate
Figure 3-218. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD

Connector assignment:
Connector
Color Destination
assignment:
CN1 White TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD (CN2)
CN2* White Unused
CN3 - USB-A
CN4* - Unused
CN7* Black Unused
CN8* Blue Unused
CN10* Yellow Unused
CN11* Black Unused
CN14* Blue Unused
CN15* Red Unused
CN17 White TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH
CN18 Black TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR
CN19* Black Unused
CN22 Yellow TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR
CN23 Black TAKE-UP REEL LED
CN24* (FFC) Unused
CN26* Red Unused
CN28 Red TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR
CN29 White TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR

3.4.9 2nd Roll Unit (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only)

3.4.9.1 FRONT FRAME
1. Remove the Left Paper Check Hole and the Right Paper Check Hole.
2. Remove the three screws, and remove the FRONT FRAME.
Insert the three ribs on the FRONT FRAME under the frame.
(Figure 3-219)
Frame Rib
A A
Left Paper Right Paper

Check Hole FRONT FRAME Check Hole
Figure 3-219. Removing the FRONT FRAME

3.4.9.2 REAR FRAME 4. Remove the REAR FRAME from the two hooks of the frame.
C A U T IO N If the optional Large Format Scanner Stand is attached, take care Left Sensor Fixing Plate
not to drop screws inside the stand because there are holes for Right Sensor Fixing Plate
accessing screws.
Hook Hook
1. Remove the two screws, and remove the Left Sensor Fixing Plate and the Right A A
Sensor Fixing Plate.
2. Release the cables from the clamp.
3. Remove the seven screws. B B
B) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 6 pcs
C B B
C) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 1 pcs
B B
Tighten the screws in the order shown in below.

Clamp
REAR FRAME
1 4 Cable REAR FRAME
7 3 6 Figure 3-220. Removing the REAR FRAME

2 5

3.4.9.3 LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR

1. Remove the LEFT COVER. (p272)
2. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the sensor.
LEFT ROLL UNIT

OPEN SENSOR
Hooks
Cable
Connector
Figure 3-221. Removing the LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR

3.4.9.4 RIGHT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR 3. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the sensor.
1. Remove the Right Sensor Fixing Plate. (p267) 4. Disconnect the cable from the connector.
2. Remove the two screws, and remove the Right Upper Frame.
Hooks
RIGHT ROLL UNIT
OPEN SENSOR
Right Upper Frame
A Connector
Cable
Figure 3-223. Removing the RIGHT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR

Figure 3-222. Removing the Right Upper Frame

3.4.9.5 2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR In the following step, do not pull the ATC Lever Cover carelessly
C A U T IO N
1. Remove the RIGHT COVER/RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p273) too far because the sensor cable is connected.
2. Remove the 2nd ATC MOTOR ASSY. (p287)

3. Remove the two screws that secure the ATC Lever Cover.
4. Disengage the three hooks, and remove the ATC Lever Cover.
A) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 2 pcs
ATC Lever Cover
ATC Lever Cover
Hook
A
Hook
Hook
Figure 3-225. Removing the ATC Lever Cover (2)

Figure 3-224. Removing the ATC Lever Cover (1)

5. Remove the screw, and remove the Sensor Cover. 6. Disengage the four hooks, and remove the sensor.
B) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 1 pcs 7. Disconnect the cable from the connector.
Sensor Cover
2nd ROLL LOCK
DETECTION SENSOR
B Cable
Connector
Back side
Hooks
Hooks
Figure 3-227. Removing the 2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR (2)
Figure 3-226. Removing the 2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR (1)

3.4.9.6 LEFT COVER/LEFT LOWER COVER 2. Remove the two screws, and remove the LEFT LOWER COVER.
1. Remove the five screw, and remove the LEFT COVER. C) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 2 pcs

B) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 2 pcs
LEFT LOWER COVER
Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 3-228.
C
B
5
LEFT COVER
A
2
A
1 Figure 3-229. Removing the LEFT LOWER COVER
A
3
B
4
Figure 3-228. Removing the LEFT COVER

3.4.9.7 RIGHT COVER/RIGHT LOWER COVER 2. Remove the three screws, and remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER.
B) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 2 pcs
C A U T IO N Do not remove the Left Flange Guide.
C) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 1 pcs
1. Remove the two screws, and remove the Right Flange Guide.
RIGHT LOWER COVER
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw: 2 pcs
Screw the Right Flange Guide while pressing it to the rear.

C
B
B
Right Flange Guide
Figure 3-231. Removing the RIGHT LOWER COVER
Left Flange Guide
Figure 3-230. Removing the Right Flange Guide

3. Remove the four screws that secure the LIGHT COVER.

D) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 4 pcs RIGHT REAR COVER
RIGHT COVER
D
2
4. Remove the RIGHT COVER while pressing the RIGHT REAR COVER to the D
1
rear. D
3
C H E C K If you find it difficult to remove the cover, remove the two Hex
P O IN T screws beforehand.
D
Hex screws 4
Figure 3-232. Removing the RIGHT COVER

3.4.9.8 RIGHT REAR COVER

1. Remove the REAR FRAME. (p267)
2. Remove the three screws, and remove the RIGHT REAR COVER.
RIGHT REAR COVER
A A
1 2
A
3
Figure 3-233. Removing the RIGHT REAR COVER

3.4.9.9 2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY

2. Remove the two Extension Spring.
3. Remove the 2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY toward you.
Extension
Spring Extension
Spring
2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY
Figure 3-234. Removing the 2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY

3.4.9.10 SUB-C BOARD

2. Remove the RIGHT REAR COVER. (p275)
3. Disconnect the all cables from the connectors of the SUB-C BOARD.
4. Remove the four screws, and remove the SUB-C BOARD.
Screw
together SUB-C BOARD
A A
A A
Figure 3-235. Removing the SUB-C BOARD

3.4.9.11 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR

1. Remove the FRONT FRAME. (p266)
2. Remove the RIGHT COVER/RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p273)
A
4. Remove the RIGHT REAR COVER. (p275) A
5. Remove the two screws, and remove the 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR.
A) Silver M2.6x4 S-tite screw: 2 pcs
2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR
Motor Cover
Cable
Connector
Figure 3-236. Removing the 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR

3.4.9.12 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR 6. Remove the two screws, and remove the Sensor Holder.
1. Remove the REAR FRAME. (p267) B) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 2 pcs
2. Remove the RIGHT REAR COVER. (p275) 7. Remove the Motor Cover.
3. Remove the 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B. (p283)

4. Remove the screw that secures the Motor Frame.
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 1 pcs Sensor Holder
5. Disengage the Motor Frame from the hook, and remove the Motor Frame. B
Motor Frame Motor Cover

A
2nd PPK RELEASE

MOTOR
Figure 3-238. Removing the Sensor Holder
Hook
Figure 3-237. Removing the Motor Frame

8. Remove the two screws, and remove 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR.
C) Silver M2.6x4 S-tite screw: 2 pcs
2nd PPK RELEASE

MOTOR
Cable
Connector
Figure 3-239. Removing the 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR

3.4.9.13 2nd ATC MOTOR

3. Remove the two screws, and remove the 2nd ATC MOTOR.
A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in spring washer: 2 pcs
2nd ATC MOTOR
A
A
Figure 3-240. Removing the 2nd ATC MOTOR

3.4.9.14 2nd PF SENSOR 3. Disengage the four hooks, and remove the sensor.
1. Remove the FRONT FRAME. (p266) 4. Disconnect the cable from the connector.
2. Remove the two screws, and remove the Sensor Cover.

2nd PF SENSOR
Connector
Cable
Sensor Cover
Back side Hooks

A
Hooks
Figure 3-242. Removing the 2nd PF SENSOR

3.4.9.15 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B 5. Disengage the eight hooks (four each), and remove the 2nd PPK RELEASE
SENSOR A/B.
3. Rotate the Sensor Cover until the hole comes on the top. Hooks
Connector 2nd PPK RELEASE
4. Remove the Plastic ring, and remove the Sensor Cover and the parallel pin. Hooks SENSOR B
Cable
Be careful not to drop the parallel pin. Connector
C A U T IO N
Cable
Hooks
Parallel pin Hooks
2nd PPK RELEASE

SENSOR A
Figure 3-244. Removing the 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B
Hole
Sensor Cover
Plastic ring

3.4.9.16 2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR

Lower Paper Guide
accessing screws.
A A
2. Remove the LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (Full side). (p244)
C A U T IO N In the following step, do not pull the Lower Paper Guide carelessly
too far because the sensor cable is connected.
Figure 3-245. Removing the Lower Paper Guide
5. Remove the two screws, and remove the Lower Paper Guide.
Lower Paper Guide

Positioning points
Positioning points

6. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN7) of the SUB-C BOARD. 7. Disconnect the cable from the connector.
8. Disengage the four hooks, and remove the sensor.
Cable
CN1
CN7
2nd PAPER
SUB-C BOARD
DETECTION SENSOR
Cable
Connector
Figure 3-246. Removing the 2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR (1)
Back side
Hooks
Hooks
Figure 3-247. Removing the 2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR (2)

3.4.9.17 2nd ATC GEAR ASSY

3. Remove the 2nd ATC MOTOR. (p281)
2nd ATC GEAR ASSY
Figure 3-248. Removing the 2nd ATC GEAR ASSY

3.4.9.18 2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY

2nd ATC MOTOR ASSY
2. Move the ATC Lever in the direction of the arrow.
ATC Lever
A A
Connector
Motor Cover
C A U T IO N So as not to let the 2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY, hold the 2nd ATC
SHAFT ASSY when removing it.
Cable 2nd ATC

SHAFT ASSY
3. Remove the two screws, and remove the 2nd ATC MOTOR ASSY and the 2nd
SHAFT ASSY.
2nd ATC MOTOR
5. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the 2nd ATC MOTOR ASSY.
2nd ATC
MOTOR ASSY
Figure 3-249. Removing the 2nd ATC MOTOR ASSY/2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY

CHAPTER
4
ADJUSTMENT

4.1 Overview
This chapter describes the Service Program software utility and the adjustment
procedures required after repairing or replacing certain parts.
4.1.1 Precautions
Always observe the following cautions whenever making an adjustment on the printer.
C A U T IO N  Always refer to "4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by

Repaired Part" (p.290) and make sure to perform all the
adjustments listed in the table in the given order.
 Always read and follow the precautions given in each section
that explains each adjustment. Ignoring the precautions can
result in malfunction of the printer.
ADJUSTMENT Overview 289

4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part

The following table shows the required adjustments by repaired or replaced part and the order in which the adjustments must be performed.
Note "*1": The adjustments required for the MAIN BOARD differs depending on whether the NVRAM on the old board can be backed up or not.
"*2": When the firmware update is required, first check the version of firmware currently installed on the printer, then update the firmware if necessary.
"*3": PGPP: Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
Matte Paper: Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper
"*4": Perform only after performing the following adjustments.
• Head inclination adjustment (CR direction)
• Head slant adjustment (PF direction)
• PG adjustment
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Service
Class Required Operations Jig Media Replaced Reattached Page
Part/Unit Program
Replacement 1 p. 190
2 Turn the power on in serviceman mode. --- √ ---
3 Reset the motor counter. √ √ --- p. 324
4 Power off --- √ ---
5 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ √
6 CR Belt Tension Check √ Tensimeter U-507 √ √ p. 328
CR MOTOR CR Motor Measurement & Automatic

After 7 √ √ --- p. 377
Adjustment
CR related replacement
8 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ --- p. 334
parts/units
9 Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 332
10 Auto Uni-d adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 335
Auto Bi-D adjustment, acceleration and
11 √ PGPP √ --- p. 336
deceleration correction
12 PW + T&B&S check and adjustment √ Matte paper √ --- p. 337
CR SCALE After 2 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ √
replacement 3 CR Scale Check √ √ √ p. 333


Part/Unit Program
Tensimeter
3 CR Belt Tension Check √ √ √ p. 328
U-507
4 APG function check √ √ √ p. 331
5 CR Scale Check √ √ √ p. 333
6 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ √ p. 334
Head inclination check & adjustment (CR
7 √ √ √ p. 347
CR TIMING BELT/ direction)
CR related CR ENCODER/ 8 Head slant check & adjustment (PF direction) √ √ √ p. 350
parts/units PW SENSOR/ After
IM SENSOR replacement 9 Power off --- √ √
10 PG check & adjustment --- Thickness gauge √ √ p. 339
11 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √*4 √*4
12 Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment √ PGPP √*4 √*4 p. 332
13 Auto Uni-d adjustment √ PGPP √*4 √*4 p. 335
14 √ PGPP √*4 √*4 p. 336
15 PW + T&B&S check and adjustment √ Matte paper √*4 √*4 p. 337
16 Cut Position Check & Adjustment √ PGPP √*4 √*4 p. 361


Part/Unit Program
Tensimeter
3 CR Belt Tension Check √ √ √ p. 328
U-507
4 APG function check √ √ √ p. 331
5 CR Scale Check √ √ √ p. 333
6 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ √ p. 334
7 √ √ √ p. 347
direction)
CR UNIT 8 Head slant check & adjustment (PF direction) √ √ √ p. 350

After
replacement 9 Power off --- √ √
CR related 11 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ √*4
parts/units
12 Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment √ PGPP √ √*4 p. 332
13 Auto Uni-d adjustment √ PGPP √ √*4 p. 335
14 √ PGPP √ √*4 p. 336
15 PW + T&B&S check and adjustment √ Matte paper √ √*4 p. 337
16 Cut Position Check & Adjustment √ PGPP √ √*4 p. 361
APG UNIT (APG Motor) After
4 Power off --- √ ---
replacement
5 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ ---
6 APG function check √ √ --- p. 331


Part/Unit Program
Before 2 Tube inner pressure reduction √ √ √ p. 342
replacement Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column
3 √ √ √
side & power off
6 Reset the Print Head Counter. √ √ --- p. 324
7 Head ID Input & power off √ √ --- p. 343
Head 9 Cleaning √ √ √ p. 346
PRINT HEAD
related 10 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ √ p. 345
After 11 √ √ √ p. 347
direction)
replacement
12 Head slant check & adjustment (PF direction) √ √ √ p. 350
13 Power off --- √ √
15 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ √*4
16 Auto Uni-d adjustment √ PGPP √ √*4 p. 335
17 √ PGPP √ √*4 p. 336
Ink supply 3 Reset the unit counter. √ √ --- p. 324
related PUMP CAP UNIT After 4 Power off --- √ ---
parts/units replacement 5 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ ---
Pump Cap Unit Measurement & Automatic
6 √ √ --- p. 377
Adjustment


Part/Unit Program
2 Reset the IC Holder counter. √ √ --- p. 324
Before 3 Power off --- √ ---
replacement 4 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ √
5 Ink eject & pressure reduction √ √ √ p. 354
IC HOLDER 6 Power off --- √ √
After 9 Initial ink charge √ √ √ p. 356
replacement 10 Cleaning √ √ √ p. 346
Ink supply 11 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ √ p. 345
related 1 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ ---
parts/units
2 Reset the tube counter. √ √ --- p. 324
3 Power off --- √ ---
Before
5 Ink eject & pressure reduction √ √ √ p. 354
Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column
INK TUBE 6 --- √ √
side & power off
Replacement 7 --- p. 203
After 9 Initial ink charge √ √ √ p. 356
replacement 10 Cleaning √ √ √ p. 346
11 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ √ p. 345


Part/Unit Program
2 Reset the damper kit counter. √ √ --- p. 324
3 Power off --- √ ---
Before
Ink supply 5 Tube inner pressure reduction √ √ √ p. 342
related DAMPER KIT Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column
parts/units 6 √ √ √
side & power off
After
9 Cleaning √ √ √ p. 346
replacement
10 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ √ p. 345
3 PF Belt Tension check √ Tensimeter U-507 √ √ p. 357
PF TIMING BELT After
4 Media Feed Auto Adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 360
replacement
6 Cut Position Check & Adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 361
Paper feed 2 Turn the power on in serviceman mode. --- √ ---
related 3 Reset the motor counter. √ √ --- p. 324
parts/units
4 Power off --- √ ---
PF MOTOR After 6 PF Belt Tension check √ Tensimeter U-507 √ √ p. 357
replacement PF Motor Measurement & Automatic
7 √ √ --- p. 377
Adjustment


Part/Unit Program
PF ENCODER/
After 2 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ √
PF SCALE
replacement 3 PC Scale Check √ √ √ p. 359
CUTTER UNIT (cutter motor) After 4 Power off --- √ ---
replacement 5 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ ---
Paper feed 6 Cutter motor measurement √ √ p. 377
---
related
parts/units 7 Cut Position Check & Adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 361
ATC MOTOR (1st) After
replacement
4 Power off --- √ ---
ATC MOTOR (2nd) After
replacement
4 Power off --- √ ---


Part/Unit Program
1 Print Cover Open --- √ ---
2 Remove ink cartridges / maintenance boxes. --- √ ---
Before
3 Turn the power on in Serviceman mode. --- √ ---
replacement
4 NVRAM Backup tool (Read) √ √ --- p. 314
5 Power off --- √ ---
7 Turn the power on in Firmware update mode. --- √ ---
8 Model Selection (at service program) √ √ ---
Update the firmware.*2 (automatically power
9 √ √ --- p. 322
off)
Board 10 Turn the power on in serviceman mode. √
Main Board (NVRAM backup --- ---
related
OK & HDD/PS none)*1 11 NVRAM Clear OK --- √ ---
parts/units
Main Board initial setting (automatically
12 √ √ --- p. 366
power off)
After
replacement 13 Turn the power on in Firmware update mode. --- √ ---
14 NVRAM Backup tool (Write) √ √ --- p. 314
15 Turn the power off. --- √ ---
16 Print Cover Close --- √ ---
19 RTC check & adjustment. √ √ --- p. 367
20 Reset the Main Board exchange counter. √ √ --- p. 371


Part/Unit Program
Before
replacement
Update the firmware.*2(automatically power
5 √ √ --- p. 322
off)
7 NVRAM Clear OK --- √ ---
8 √ √ --- p. 366
power off)
10 Initial Ink Charge Flag off. √ √ --- p. 327
11 Rear AD Adjustment --- √ --- p. 365
Board Head ID check & input (automatically power
Main Board (NVRAM backup 12 √ √ --- p. 343
related off)
NG & HDD/PS none)*1
parts/units After 13 Turn the power on in serviceman mode. --- √ ---
replacement
14 RTC check & adjustment √ √ --- p. 367
15 MAC Address Input √ √ --- p. 368
16 Serial Number & USB ID check & input √ √ --- p. 369
18 Print Cover Close. --- √ ---
20 I/C Installation --- √ ---
21 FW Version Check √ √ ---
22 Flag for extending life √ √ --- p. 372
23 Suction Fan Adjustment √ √ --- p. 373
PF Motor Measurement & Automatic
25 √ √ --- p. 377
Adjustment


Part/Unit Program
CR Motor Measurement & Automatic
26 √ √ --- p. 377
Adjustment
27 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ ---
28 √ √ --- p. 377
Adjustment
29 Cleaning √ √ --- p. 346
30 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ --- p. 345
Main Board (NVRAM backup After 31 Media Feed Auto Adjustment √ √ --- p. 360
NG & HDD/PS none)*1 replacement 32 Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 332
33 Auto Uni-d adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 335
34 √ PGPP √ --- p. 336
36 CUT Motor Measurement √ √ --- p. 377
Board 38 Reset the Main Board exchange counter. √ √ --- p. 371
related
parts/units
Before 2 Turn the power on in serviceman mode. --- √ ---
replacement 3 NVRAM Backup tool (Read) √ √ --- p. 314
Main Board (NVRAM backup Update the firmware.*2(automatically power
OK & HDD/PS exist)*1 8 √ √ --- p. 322
off)
After
10 NVRAM Clear OK --- √ ---
replacement
11 √ √ --- p. 366
power off)
13 NVRAM Backup tool (Write) √ √ --- p. 314


Part/Unit Program
15 HDD Unit/PS Unit connection --- √ ---
Main Board (NVRAM backup After 17 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ ---
OK & HDD/PS exist)*1 replacement 18 Model Selection (at service program) √ √ ---
Before
replacement
Update the firmware.*2(automatically power
5 √ √ --- p. 322
off)
Board 7 NVRAM Clear OK √
--- ---
related
parts/units Main Board initial setting (automatically
8 √ √ --- p. 366
power off)
Main Board (NVRAM backup
NG & HDD/PS exist)*1 Option HDD/PS Unit S/N information write
10 √ √ --- p. 370
After to NVRAM
replacement 11 Initial Ink Charge Flag off √ √ p. 327
---
12 Rear AD Adjustment --- √ --- p. 365
13 Head ID Input (automatically power off) √ √ --- p. 343
16 MAC Address Input √ √ --- p. 368
17 Serial Number & USB ID check & input √ √ --- p. 369


Part/Unit Program
21 I/C Installation --- √ ---
22 FW Version Check √ √ ---
23 Flag for extending life √ √ --- p. 372
24 Suction Fan Adjustment √ √ --- p. 373
PF Motor Measurement & Automatic
26 √ √ --- p. 377
Adjustment
27 √ √ --- p. 377
Adjustment
28 CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic) √ √ --- p. 334
Main Board (NVRAM backup After 29 √ √ --- p. 377
Adjustment
NG & HDD exist)*1 replacement
30 Cleaning √ √ --- p. 346
31 Nozzle Check √ PGPP √ --- p. 345
Board 33 Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 332
related 34 Auto Uni-d adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 335
parts/units
35 √ PGPP √ --- p. 336
38 Cut Position check & adjustment √ PGPP √ --- p. 361
3 √ √ --- p. 377
Adjustment
PSH BOARD (Power Supply PF Motor Measurement & Automatic
After 4 √ √ --- p. 377
Board) Adjustment
replacement
5 √ √ --- p. 377
Adjustment
7 Make the replacement date & time setting. √ √ --- p. 371


Part/Unit Program
Others SUCTION FAN After 2 Turn the power on in normal mode. --- √ ---
replacement 3 Suction Fan Adjustment √ √ --- p. 373

4.1.3 Adjustment Items

The following table describes the general outline of the adjustments.
Table 4-2. Adjustment Items

Service
Class Adjustment Items Overview Symptoms that the Adjustment is Needed Printer Mode Jig Media Page
Program
When the belt tension is out of standards, the
following symptoms may occur.
 Belt tension is high: The life of the belt will be
shortened. High load applied to the carriage
causes frequent wait control over the carriage
Apply a specified tension to the CR TIMING
movements to prevent overheating. If the
BELT. Measure the tension of the belt using the Normal Tensimeter
CR Belt Tension Check tension is too high, the shaft of the motor leans √ p. 328
sonic tensimeter to check if it is within standards. mode U-507
and the brush in the motor becomes worn, and
If not, adjust the tension.
will result in CR overload error.
 Belt tension is low: The belt teeth slip and the
carriage swings. The correction by the active
damper does not work and the bands (vertical
bands) occur near the side edges of paper.
Rotates the APG motor to change the PG, and see When the PG is not switched properly responding
Normal
APG function check if the PG is correctly set to its home position to the print setting, low image quality or CL √ p. 331
mode
(TYP). operation abnormality may occur.
 Checks if the IM SENSOR has any trouble/
CR related
connection failure.
 Executes IMS Position Auto Correction
Premium
(pattern detecting position correction).
If the IMS does not work properly, automatic Glossy
Ink Mark Sensor check Corrects the detecting position of the print Normal
adjustments such as Auto Bi-D Adjustment cannot √ Photo p. 332
& Auto Adjustment pattern in the sub scan direction and the main mode
be executed normally. Paper
scan direction.
(250)
 Runs the nozzle check to check if the IM
SENSOR detects the nozzle clogging
properly.
Checks the CR SCALE for any abnormality such
When the CR SCALE is not read properly, the Normal
CR Scale Check as damage or dirt and checks if the scale can be √ p. 333
carriage will not operate normally. mode
properly read by the encoder.
Calibrates the active damper.
CR Active Damper * Active damper is a function to reduce the Because the motor vibration/carriage vibration
Normal
Adjustment carriage vibration which causes vertical bands cannot be reduced, vertical bands may appear on √ p. 334
mode
(Automatic) on prints by outputting waveforms which have prints.
phases opposite to the motor vibration.


Service
Program
If this adjustment is not made, the estimation of
The CR MOTOR is designed to stop when the the motor temperature cannot be made properly
amount of heat generation (motor temperature) and may cause the following symptoms.
during motor operation reaches a predetermined
 Even though there is no problem with the
limit. The amount of heat generation is estimated
CR Motor Measurement motor temperature, the printer pauses during
based on the electrical characteristics of the Normal
& Automatic printing because it judges that the motor is in √ p. 377
motor, which vary by motor and power supply of mode
Adjustment high-temperature state.
the printer. Therefore, to get the motor control to
 Despite the motor is in a high-temperature
work properly, the electrical characteristics
values of the motor need to be measured and state, a lower motor temperature is estimated
stored in the memory on the MAIN BOARD. and the printer does not stop. This may cause
the printer to malfunction.
Premium
If this adjustment is not made, print quality Glossy
Reduces misalignment of ink droplets fired to Normal
Auto Uni-d adjustment problems such as misaligned lines, grainy image, √ Photo p. 335
paper during unidirectional printing. mode
banding may occur. Paper
(250)
 Auto Bi-d adjustment: Reduces misalignment
 Auto Bi-d adjustment: If this adjustment is not
CR related of ink droplets fired to paper during Premium
made, print quality problems such as
Auto Bi-D adjustment, bidirectional printing. Glossy
misaligned lines, grainy image, banding may Normal
acceleration and  Acceleration and deceleration correction: To √ Photo p. 336
occur. mode
deceleration correction improve print quality for bidirectional Paper
 If this adjustment is not made, print quality
printing, corrects the movement speed of the (250)
problems may occur.
CR UNIT.
 PW: Checks that the PW sensor detects the
edges of paper correctly. Feed A4 matte paper
from the paper cassette and perform the
detection operation using the Service
Archival
Program. If this adjustment is not made, the width or length
Matte
 T&B&S: Adjusts the print start position of the of paper cannot be detected correctly. As the
PW + T&B&S check Normal Paper/
top, bottom, right and left edges of paper. result, misaligned print position or insufficient √ p. 337
and adjustment mode Enhanced
Feed A4 matte paper from the paper cassette blank space may occur, or printed images may be
Matte
and print the adjustment patterns using the broken.
Paper
Service Program. Measure the adjustment
patterns then input the measurement result.
The print start position is automatically
adjusted.


Service
Program
When the PG is out of standards, the following
symptoms may occur.
 Gap is too wide: Unstable ink droplet paths or
Adjust the platen gap of the CR UNIT using the Normal Thickness
CR related PG check & adjustment misaligned dots occur, and it causes low --- p. 339
thickness gauge. mode gauge
printing quality such as banding, printing
misalignment, or grainy image.
 Gap is too narrow: The head rubs paper.
Reduce the pressure in the ink flow paths. Doing this Removing a part or a unit which is needed to
Tube inner pressure Normal
prevents ink leakage that can occur when removing the reduce the pressure without reducing causes ink √ p. 342
reduction mode
PRINT HEAD or other ink related parts/units. leakage.
If the new ID is not registered after replacing the
head, the head ID of the older head is used and the
Register the head rank ID to the printer using the proper drive voltage cannot be set. The following
Service Program or check the currently registered symptoms may occur.
head rank ID. Head rank ID is information
 Since the amount of ink droplets is not proper, Normal
Head ID Input needed to drive the PRINT HEAD with proper √ p. 343
the color and density abnormalities are found mode
voltages so that proper amount of ink droplets are
on prints.
fired. The ID is assigned to each head and listed
 Since the amount of ink droplets turns to be
on the label on the head.
unstable, dot missing or misaligned dots occur
while printing or flushing.
When the Nozzle Check is not executed and the
nozzle is clogging, the following symptoms may
Head related Premium
occur.
Print the pattern on which the nozzle discharging Glossy
 The adjustment pattern is not printed properly Normal
Nozzle Check condition can be checked from the Service √ Photo p. 345
and it causes a trouble for the automatic and mode
Program. Paper
visual check/adjustment.
(250)
 The automatic adjustments may fail or end
with an error.
When the cleaning is not executed, the following
symptoms may occur.
 Nozzle clogging is not solved and the printing
cannot be executed properly.
Specify the power and the color from the Service Normal
Cleaning  Ink droplets are not fired and nothing is printed mode √ p. 346
Program and execute the head cleaning.
after the PRINT HEAD is replaced to a new
one. (Executing Initial ink charge may solve
this problem but it takes time and consumes
lots of ink.)


Service
Program
APG function check Refer to CR related.
Corrects inclination of the PRINT HEAD in the
CR direction.
 Auto adjustment
An adjustment pattern is printed and the IM
Premium
SENSOR scans the pattern. Based on the scanned If this adjustment is not made, print quality
Head inclination check Glossy
result, a number of steps to move the cam for the problems such as misaligned lines, grainy image, Normal
& adjustment (CR √ Photo p. 347
adjustment is displayed. Turn the cam the banding, or color unevenness may occur in the mode
direction) Paper
number of steps to correct the head inclination. scale of PRINT HEAD surface area.
(250)
 Manual adjustment
Print an adjustment pattern, and visually check
the pattern to see if the adjustment is needed. To
correct the head inclination, turn the cam.
Corrects slant of the PRINT HEAD in the PF
Head related direction.
 Auto adjustment
If this adjustment is not made, the gap between the
An adjustment pattern is printed and the IM
PRINT HEAD surface and paper is kept uneven Premium
SENSOR scans the pattern. Based on the scanned
Head slant check & (e.g.: the gap at the front side is wider than that at Glossy
result, a number of steps to move the lever for the Normal
adjustment (PF the rear side), and causes irregularity in size and √ Photo p. 350
adjustment is displayed. Move the lever the mode
direction) position of printed dots. This may be observed as Paper
number of steps to correct the head slant.
print quality problems such as grainy image, (250)
 Manual adjustment banding, or color unevenness.
Print an adjustment pattern, and visually check
the pattern to see if the adjustment is needed. To
correct the head slant, move the lever.
Auto Uni-d adjustment Refer to CR related.
Auto Bi-D adjustment,
acceleration and Refer to CR related.


Service
Program
If ink is not discharged when instructed to do so
Ink eject & pressure Serviceman
Discharge ink from the printer. before removing parts or units, ink may leak from √ p. 354
reduction Mode
the printer and contaminate surroundings.
Clean the ink flow paths to resolve the solidified
ink in the paths and clogging of nozzles of the If the printer is left unused for a long period
 Cleaning
PRINT HEAD. Or, when leaving the printer without doing this after discharging ink, the ink
Normal cartridge
Tube inner cleaning unused for a long period, doing this in advance left in the ink flow paths may get solidified. Once √ p. 355
mode  Maintenance
can prevent ink from getting solidified. Use the the ink becomes solidified, charging new ink may
Box
Cleaning Cartridge for service and the Service become impossible or dot missing may occur.
Program.
If this is not executed after discharging ink, air
Charge ink in the ink flow paths. Execute from Serviceman
Ink supply Initial ink charge bubbles will remain in the ink tubes and may √ p. 356
the Service Program. Mode
related cause dot missing.
The pump cap motor is designed to stop when the the motor temperature cannot be made properly
Main Unit motor temperature, the printer pauses during
Measurement & printing because it judges that the motor is in √ p. 377
Automatic Adjustment high-temperature state.
 Despite the motor is in a high-temperature
work properly, the electrical characteristics
When the belt tension is out of standards, the
following symptoms may occur.
 Belt tension is high: The life of the belt will be
shortened. High load applied to the PF
Apply a specified tension to the PF TIMING
MOTOR causes frequent wait controls during
Media Feed BELT. Measure the tension of the belt using the Normal Tensimeter
PF Belt Tension check paper feeding to prevent overheating. If the √ p. 357
related sonic tensimeter to check if it is within standards. mode U-507
tension is too high, the shaft of the motor leans
If not, adjust the tension.
and the brush in the motor becomes worn, and
will result in PF motor overload error.
 Belt tension is low: The belt teeth slip and
paper cannot be fed properly.


Service
Program
Check the PF SCALE for any abnormality such
When the PF SCALE is not read properly, paper
as damage or dirt and check if the scale can be Normal
PC Scale Check feeding may become impossible and an error may √ p. 359
properly read by the encoder using the Service mode
occur.
Program.
Premium
Glossy
Media Feed Auto Adjust the paper feeding amount which varies by If paper feeding accuracy lowers, print quality Normal
√ Photo p. 360
Adjustment printer. The adjustment is made automatically. problems such as banding may occur. mode
Paper
(250)
The PF MOTOR is designed to stop when the the motor temperature cannot be made properly
Media Feed  Even though there is no problem with the
related PF Motor Measurement motor temperature, the printer pauses during
& Automatic printing because it judges that the motor is in √ p. 377
Adjustment high-temperature state.
work properly, the electrical characteristics  Despite the motor is in a high-temperature
Adjust the auto cut with the auto cutter to cut
paper at the proper position. Feed the roll paper
and execute printing and cutting of the
Cut Position Check & Normal
adjustment pattern using the Service Program. The cut position may be misaligned. √ p. 361
Adjustment mode
Measuring the gap between the bottom edge of
the printed paper and the pattern and inputting the
measurement result adjusts the cut position.


Service
Program
PW + T&B&S check
Refer to CR related.
and adjustment
The cutter motor is designed to stop when the the motor temperature cannot be made properly
motor temperature, the printer pauses during
CUT Motor based on the electrical characteristics of the Normal
printing because it judges that the motor is in √ p. 377
Measurement motor, which vary by motor and power supply of mode
high-temperature state.
work properly, the electrical characteristics  Despite the motor is in a high-temperature
If this adjustment is not made, the thickness of the
Media Feed paper cannot be detected correctly. As the result,
related Adjust the installation position of the sensor so the PG is not set correctly against the paper Adjustment
that the Paper thickness sensor detects the paper thickness which is actually inserted. jig for
Paper thickness sensor Serviceman
thickness correctly. Adjust the paper thickness --- paper p. 363
adjustment  When the PG becomes wider: Low print Mode
sensor using the jig for paper thickness thickness
quality such as unstable ink droplet paths or
adjustment. sensor
misaligned dots
 When the PG becomes narrower: Head rubbing
Adjust the detection sensitivity of the PE
SENSOR so that it can recognize the paper
inserted in the printer correctly. Let the sensor
If the adjustment is not executed, paper
detect the Standard Sheet (translucent media)
recognition failures may occur (e.g. paper empty Serviceman Standard
Rear AD Adjustment which is hard to recognize to check the result on --- p. 365
error occurs even with paper inserted, some media Mode Sheet
the Control Panel. (By using the media which is
are not recognized).
hard to recognize, paper can be recognized
regardless of the environmental condition or the
media)


Service
Program
NVRAM Backup/ Make a backup of data stored in the NVRAM or Serviceman
--- √ p. 314
Restore restore the data from a backup. Mode
RTC check & Check the current setting of the RTC. Write the If the adjustment is not executed, a maintenance Serviceman
√ p. 367
adjustment correct information as needed. error (RTC setting error). Mode
Read and check the MAC address of the printer. If the address is not input or a wrong address is Serviceman
MAC Address Input √ p. 368
Write a new MAC address as needed. set, a network connection trouble occurs. Mode
 Check the serial number and the USB ID  If the serial number is not input or a wrong
Serial Number & USB currently set to the printer. Write the correct number is set, it makes service management Serviceman
√ p. 369
Boards ID check & adjustment information as needed. (such as the print/NVRAM) harder. Mode
Related  Sets the USB ID automatically.  USB recognition error occurs.
Option HDD/PS Unit S/ If the serial number of the Option Unit is not
Writes the serial numbers of the HDD Option Serviceman
N information Write to written in the new MAIN BOARD, the user is √ p. 370
Unit and PC Option Unit in the NVRAM. Mode
NVRAM prompted to initialize the hard disk.
Main Board Exchange Write the date and time when the MAIN BOARD If this is not made, correct service history is not Normal
√ p. 371
Counter is replaced to the NVRAM. recorded. mode
Power Supply Unit
Write the date and time when the Power Supply If this is not made, correct service history is not Normal
Replacement Date & √ p. 371
Board is replaced to the NVRAM. recorded. mode
Time setting
Normal
Suction Fan Adjustment Run an operation check of the SUCTION FAN. --- √ p. 373
mode
Normal
Reset the panel settings to their defaults. --- ---
Panel Setting Reset & mode
p. 374
Job History Reset Normal
Reset the user job history. --- √
mode
Others Move the PPK Rollers on the 1st Roll Unit and
The roller may be deteriorated when the printer is Normal
Roll Unit Nip Release 2nd Roll Unit to the release positions and release √ p. 375
stored for a long time. mode
nipping.
Check if the LCD on the Control Panel functions Serviceman
LCD operation check --- --- p. 376
normally. Mode
Check if the buttons on the Control Panel Serviceman
Buttons operation check --- --- p. 376
function normally. Mode

4.1.4 List of Tools/Software/Consumables for Adjustments

The tables below show the tools required for adjusting this printer.
 Hardware Tools
Table 4-3. Hardware Tools
Jig Name Part Number Target Adjustment Remarks
 CR Belt Tension Adjustment
Sonic tensimeter U-507 1294120 ---
 PF Belt Tension Adjustment
P-THICK sensor adjustment jig 1424364
 Paper thickness sensor adjustment 0.5/0.6/0.8/1.0
Paper thickness sensor adjustment jig 1282355
Thickness Gauge ---  PG Adjustment 2.5/2.8
Standard Sheet (JETRAS JP-D300S) 1476228  Rear AD Adjustment ---
Cleaning Cartridge ---  Tube Cleaning ---
 CR & PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment
Calibrated Loupe --- ---
 Cut Position Check & Adjustment
 PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment
Ruler --- ---
 Cut Position Check & Adjustment
 Software Tools
Table 4-4. Software Tools
Software Name Part Number Explanation Remarks
Supplied
Service Program Used for almost all of the required adjustments. Use the latest program.
separately
Unless the Printer Driver is installed, the Service Program does
Printer Driver --- ---
not operate.
Firmware --- --- ---
 Consumables
Table 4-5. Consumables
Consumable Name Part Number Explanation Remarks
Used for adjustments that require paper. (For more details, see
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) --- ---
4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part).
Used for adjustments that require paper. (For more details, see
Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper --- ---
4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part).
Ink Cartridge --- --- ---
Maintenance Box --- --- ---

C A U T IO N Bring back the following brought and used items, then dispose of
them based on the local regulations in your country, please.
 Ink cartridges
 Cleaning cartridges
 Draining cartridges
Especially in case of ink cartridges in Europe, please refer to the

following web site to confirm the regulation in detail.
ECO Info: http://www.epson.eu/weee (available from July 2015)
x

4.1.5 Service Program Basic Operations

This section describes the basic operations of the Service Program.
C A U T IO N Save the Service Program on the desktop or directly under the C

drive. If the storage location is deep in the hierarchy, some
program tools may not work correctly.
 System Requirements
 OS: Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8, 10
 Interface: USB, Network
 Startup
1. Install the Printer Driver.
2. Double-click the "servprog.exe". A screen that asks if you want to carry out
the NVRAM Backup appears.
3. Select Yes to start the NVRAM Backup tool, or select No to display the
Service Program Menu screen.
4. Select the printer you want to adjust from Model Selection, and start the
adjustment.
Figure 4-1. Service Program

4.2 NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer 4.2.2 NVRAM Write Procedure

1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing
Parameters stored in the NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD are read/stored and written
[Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
onto the other NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD using this menu. Also, the exported
parameter information is displayed on the computer screen.
C A U T IO N When the MAIN board are exchanged (NVRAM back up OK &
HDD none / NVRAM back up OK & HDD exist), turn the printer
4.2.1 NVRAM Read Procedure ON in the F/W Update Mode.
1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing Turn the power ON while pressing [Load] + [Feed] +
[Menu] + [Back] + [OK]. [Maintenance]
2. Select the printer you want to adjust from the Model selection box. 2. Remove all the ink cartridges.
3. Click [Get Information] on the NVRAM Read field to start reading the 3. Start the Service Program and select NV-RAM BACKUP from the main menu.
parameters. 4. Select the printer you want to adjust from the Model selection box.
4. To view the NVRAM information: Click [Display Information] to display 5. Click [Open File] on the NVRAM Write field.
another screen of the NVRAM Viewer.
To store the NVRAM information: Click [Save]. The file is named as "serial 6. Select the NVRAM file to write on the printer.
number + acquisition date" automatically. 7. Click [Write File] to start writing the parameters.
8. When the writing is completed, exit the NV-RAM BACKUP tool.
9. Turn the printer OFF.
Figure 4-2. [NV-RAM BACKUP] Screen
ADJUSTMENT NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer 314

4.2.3 NVRAM Viewer Basic Operation DESCRIPTION

The following functions are provided.  Life Parts Operation History
1. Displays the Life Parts Operation History
1
2. Displays the history how the printer has been used (Utilization History)
3. Displays the Error History saved in the NVRAM
4. Displays the Basic Information of the printer (such as the serial No. or the
setting values)
PROCEDURE
1. Click [Display Information] on the NVRAM Read field of the NV-RAM

BACKUP screen. Another screen of the NVRAM Viewer will be displayed.
2. Select the tab you want to check.
3. Click [Save as CSV] to save the information shown in the selected tab as CSV
2 3 4 5 6
file.
4. Click [Print] to print the information shown in the selected tab.
5. Click [Close] to close the screen.
Figure 4-3. [Life Parts Operation History] Screen
1 Total Print Dimension Total printed area. The unit is m2.

2 Items ---
3 Current Value Displays current values for each part or unit.
4 Limit Displays the life limit of the part if it has.
Displays the percentage of Current Value (3) considering
5 Situation
the Limit (4) as 100%.
End of Life Estimation (YY/ The estimated date when the part or unit reaches the end of
6
MM/DD) its service life.

 Utilization History  Error History
1 5
2 3 4
6 7 8
1 2
Figure 4-4. [Utilization History] Screen Figure 4-5. [Error History] Screen
1 Items --- 1 Number of Normal Errors The number of occurrences of normal errors.
2 Current Value Displays the current value per item. Displays the types of the most recent six normal
2 Type
errors saved in the NVRAM.
3 Error Content Information of the error.
Displays the time stamps of the currently displayed
4 Time Stamp
errors.
5 Number of Service Calls The number of occurrences of service call errors.
Displays the types of the most recent six service call
6 Type
errors saved in the NVRAM.
7 Error Content Information of the error.
Displays the time stamps of the currently displayed
8 Time Stamp
errors.

 Basic Information INFORMATION SAVED TO CSV FILES
1 2  Life Parts Operation History
Table 4-6. Life Parts Operation History

Item Description
Total Print Dimension Total printed area. The unit is m2.
PRINT HEAD Number of Shots/Line
Operation history (the following
DAMPER KIT Buffer Counter
information is displayed for each of
INK TUBE (CR pass count) the items.)
Number of I/C Replacements  Current Value
IC HOLDER Pump Counter (Operation  Limit
Times)  Situation
 End of Life Estimation (YY/MM/
Pump cap unit life counter
DD)
Cut counter
 Utilization History
Table 4-7. Utilization History

Item Description
3 4
Print Head CL1s (Times) ---
Figure 4-6. [Basic Information] Screen
Cleanings (Counter to be Print Head CL2s (Times) ---
1 Serial Number Product serial number. reset) Print Head CL3s (Times) ---
2 Data Acquisition Date The date and time when NVRAM data is acquired. Print Head SSCLs (Times) ---
3 Items --- Print Head CL1s (Times) ---
4 Current Value The current value of the item. Cumulative CL Times (non Print Head CL2s (Times) ---
rewritable) Print Head CL3s (Times) ---
Print Head SSCLs (Times) ---

Table 4-7. Utilization History Table 4-7. Utilization History

Item Description Item Description
Consumed Ink Amount Power Saving Mode (Number
--- ---
<Epson Genuine> (per 110ml) of Times)
Consumed Ink Amount <Non Power ON Time Print Ratio Time of Power Saving Mode ---
---
Genuine> (per 110ml) Distance of CR Movements
---
Ink Cartridge Replacement (non rewritable)
---
History Paper Size (Paper Width) ---
Maintenance tank (Home) PW Detection (Graph) Print Pages in PW Detector
--- ---
exchange count (New) OFF
Maintenance tank (Home) APG Motor Replacement
exchange count --- ---
Times
(Accumulation)
Cartridges APG Motor Replacement Date
Maintenance tank (Home) ---
--- & Time
exchange history
ATC (Roll) Motor
Maintenance tank (Full) ---
--- Replacement Times (Normal)
exchange count (New)
ATC (Roll) Motor
Maintenance tank (Full) ---
Replacement Date & Time
exchange count ---
(Accumulation) CR Motor Replacement Times ---
Maintenance tank (Full) CR Motor Replacement Date
--- ---
exchange history & Time
Cutter blade exchange history --- CR Motor Counter when
---
Parts Replacement Date Previous Replacement
Cut count (non rewritable) ---
Tube Replacement Times ---
Total Power ON Time (min) ---
Tube Replacement Date &
Total Print Time --- ---
Time
Continuous Power ON Time Tube Counter when
--- ---
(Max.) Replacement
Print Time (Max.) --- PF Motor Replacement Times ---
Power ON Time Print Ratio Power ON - OFF Times --- PF Motor Replacement Date
---
Ratio of Print in Power ON - & Times
---
OFF hours (Power ON hours) PF Motor Counter when
---
Power On - OFF Interval Previous Replacement
(broken down by Power OFF --- PrintHead 1 (Full)
Time) ---
Replacement Times
Power OFF Time (Max.) ---

Table 4-7. Utilization History  Error History

Item Description Table 4-8. Error History
Cutter Unit Replacement
--- Item Description
Times
Number of Normal Errors Displays the most recent six errors and their time stamps.
Cutter Unit Replacement Date
--- Displays the most recent six service call errors and their time
& Times Number of Service Calls
stamps.
Damper Kit Replacement
--- Error History Displays the number of occurrences of each service call error.
Times
Damper Kit Replacement Date Displays the number of occurrences of normal errors and
--- Number of Errors
& Time service call errors.
Damper Kit Previous Counter  Basic Information
---
when Replacement
Ink Holder Ink Flow Pump Table 4-9. Basic Information
(Pressure pump motor) Drive --- Item Description
Counter Reset
Model Product name
Parts Replacement Date Ink Holder Ink Flow Pump
(Pressure pump motor) Drive Printer Serial No. Serial number of the printer.
---
Counter Replacement Date & Printer Firmware Version The version of the firmware installed on the printer.
Times
Initial Ink Charge Date & Time Date and time when the initial ink charge was done.
Pump Cap Unit Replacement
--- Setting Data Displays the settings made by the control panel menus.
Times
Pump Cap Unit Replacement
---
Date & Times
Suction Pump Counter when
---
Replacement
Main Board Replacement
---
Times
Power Supply Unit
---
Replacement Times

4.3 ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)

This mode executes the adjustment required for the repair individually.
PROCEDURE
1. Click [ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)] from the main menu.

2. Select the adjustment item that you want to execute and click [OK].
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to execute the adjustment.
4. Click [Back] to return to the main menu.
Figure 4-7. ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)
ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENTS (Individual) 320

4.4 ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)

This mode displays the required adjustments per replaced part and executes the
adjustments in order.
PROCEDURE
1. Click [ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)] from the main menu.

2. Select the name of the replaced part and click [OK].
3. Select the adjustment item that you want to execute and click [OK].
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to execute the adjustment.
5. Click [Back] to return to the adjustment item list per part after the adjustment.
6. Click [Back] to return to the main menu.
C H E C K The text of the executed adjustment is colored to be distinguished.

P O IN T The colored text gets back to normal by returning to the main
menu once.
Figure 4-8. ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)
ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence) 321

4.5 Installing Firmware

This section explains how to update the firmware. The firmware of this printer is
written in the Flash ROM on the MAIN BOARD. If the MAIN BOARD is replaced or
the firmware needs to be updated, follow the procedure below to write the firmware to
the Flash ROM.
Following three kinds of firmware are provided.

 Main firmware (Printer and Network integrated firmware)
 PS Option firmware / resource
 Reel Option firmware
Figure 4-9. FIRMWARE UPDATE TOOL
C A U T IO N When Initial ink charge is not needed when replacing the MAIN 6. Click [Browse] of the F/W Update list to select the firmware data to be installed.
BOARD with a new one, make sure to turn “Initial Ink Charge 7. Click [Update] to transfer the firmware data.
Flag” to off (P. 327) before updating the firmware. (The printer is
rebooted automatically right after uploading the firmware. Since
the parameter does not exist on the new MAIN BOARD, the initial C A U T IO N When updating starts, a progress bar is displayed on the Control
ink charge starts automatically.) Panel of the printer. After updating is complete, the printer restarts
automatically. Make sure not to turn off the printer until updating
is complete. Otherwise, the printer may not operate normally
C H E C K To check the current firmware version, start the printer in the
P O IN T
afterward.
normal mode and click [Get Information].
8. When writing the firmware is completed, the printer will be turned OFF.
9. Click [Exit].
10. Turn the printer on in the normal mode.
PROCEDURE
11. “NVRAM CLEAR OK” is displayed on the panel. (only when replacing the
1. Turn both the printer and computer OFF and connect them with a USB cable. MAIN BOARD)
2. Open the Front Cover. 12. Click [OK].
3. Pull out all the ink cartridges. 13. A cover open error will occur.
4. Turn the printer ON in the F/W update mode. Turn the power ON while pressing 14. Turn the printer OFF.
[Load] + [Feed] + [Maintenance] buttons together.
5. Start the Service Program and select [FIRMWARE UPDATE TOOL] from the
main menu.
ADJUSTMENT Installing Firmware 322

4.6 Image Print

The following functions are provided.
 Prints an image file
 Transfers the PRN. file
PROCEDURE
1. Click [IMAGE PRINT] from the main menu.

2. Click [References] and specify a file to print.
3. Click [Print].
Figure 4-10. [IMAGE PRINT] Screen
C A U T IO N Make the file name of an image file or PRN. file in half size less
than 80 characters.
ADJUSTMENT Image Print 323

4.7 Counter Reset Table 4-10. Clear Counter Menu List

Class Item Clear Menu Name
Whenever the parts/units which have life counter are replaced, the corresponding life Main unit PF MOTOR PF Motor Counter
counter must be reset. This is important to replace those parts/units at the correct counter (Motor) APG Motor APG motor counter reset
timing.
ATC MOTOR (1) ATC Motor (1) Counter Reset
EXECUTION MODE ATC MOTOR (2) ATC Motor (2) Counter Reset
Cutter motor Cutter motor counter reset
Normal mode Main unit PRINT HEAD Print Head Counter
counter (Ink DAMPER KIT Damper Kit Counter
PROCEDURE system)
PUMP CAP UNIT Pump Cap Unit Counter
1. Turn the printer ON. IC HOLDER Ink Holder Counter
2. Start the Service Program and click [FLAG CHANGE & COUNTER RESET] INK TUBE Ink tube counter
from the main menu. Main unit MAIN BOARD Main Board Exchange Counter
counter (Board) Power Supply Unit Replacement Date &
3. Choose one of the counter reset menus to be reset. POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PSH)
Time Setting
4. Click [Run] to reset the counter.
Change Flag
Initial Ink Charge Flag Initial Ink Charge Flag
5. Click [Finish]. Status
6. Restart the printer. Administrator

Administrator Password Administrator Password Reset
Password
7. With NVRAM Viewer, verify that the counter has been reset to "0".
C H E C K The history of the Counter Clear can be checked per counter on the
P O IN T NVRAM Viewer (P. 315).
Table 4-10. Clear Counter Menu List

Class Item Clear Menu Name
Main unit
CR MOTOR CR Motor Counter
counter (Motor)
ADJUSTMENT Counter Reset 324

Figure 4-11. [FLAG CHANGE & COUNTER RESET] Screen
ADJUSTMENT Counter Reset 325

4.8 References
This function allows you to view the following information (PDF files).
 Control panel menus in the Normal mode
 Control panel menus in the Serviceman Mode
 Wiring diagrams
PROCEDURE
1. Click [References] from the main menu.

2. Select Panel Menu Map or Wiring Diagrams and click [Open].
Figure 4-12. References
ADJUSTMENT References 326

4.9 Initial Ink Charge Flag

This function allows you to set whether or not to execute the Initial Charge when the
printer is turned ON. To execute the Initial Charge, set the flag to ON.
PROCEDURE
2. Start the Service Program and click [FLAG CHANGE & COUNTER RESET]
from the main menu.
3. Select Initial Ink Charge Flag.
4. Select ON or OFF and click [Run].
Figure 4-13. [Initial Ink Charge Flag] Screen
ADJUSTMENT Initial Ink Charge Flag 327

4.10 CR Related Adjustments
4.10.1 CR Belt Tension Check

REQUIRED TOOLS
 Sonic tensimeter U-507

 Something to flip the belt
STANDARD VALUE
 SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series/SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series

23 ± 2 N
 SC-T3200 series
13 ± 2 N
Figure 4-14. [CR Belt Tension Check] Screen
EXECUTION MODE 6. Input the following values to the tensimeter.
Normal mode  SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series/SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series

 MASS: 1.0 g/m
PROCEDURE  WIDTH: 8.0 mm/R
 SPAN: 300 mm
1. Remove the following part in advance.
 SC-T3200 series
 RIGHT UPPER COVER (P. 127)
 MASS: 1.0 g/m
 LEFT UPPER COVER (P. 134)  WIDTH: 5.5 mm/R
2. Turn the printer ON.  SPAN: 300 mm
7. Bring the microphone of the tensimeter closer to the position shown in Figure
3. When any paper is loaded, remove it.
4-16.
4. Start the Service Program and select CR Belt Tension Check.
C H E C K Bring the microphone within 5 mm from the belt but do not let it
5. Click [Run]. The CR UNIT moves left and right three times, and then moves to
P O IN T touch the belt.
the adjustment position.
ADJUSTMENT CR Related Adjustments 328

8. Press [MEASURE] on the tensimeter and flip the belt with tweezers or a similar
tool.
Measuring microphone
C A U T IO N  Be sure to measure the tension of the belt on the upper side. If

you measure the tension of the belt on the lower side, the
measuring value may be inaccurate. Upper timing belt
 Flip the belt as weak as the tensimeter can measure it.
 Be careful not to let the microphone touch the belt when
flipping the belt.
9. Measure the belt tension for three times, and check if the average is within the
standards. CR UNIT Center
(Measurement Driven pulley
 Within the standards: Click [Yes]. point)
 Out of the standards: After performing the adjustment from Step 13, click [No].
And then go back to Step 7.
Figure 4-16. Measuring the belt tension
Figure 4-15. Adjustment message

10. Click [Finish].
11. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.

12. Click [No] on the program screen.
Screws
Figure 4-17. Adjustment message

13. Loosen the two screws that secure the driven pulley holder.
14. Turn the adjustment screw to adjust the belt tension. Driven pulley holder
 If larger than standard value: Turn the screw counterclockwise.

Tension adjustment
 If smaller than standard value: Turn the screw clockwise. screw (black)
After adjusting the tension, tighten the screws loosened in Step 12, and then back Figure 4-18. Tension adjustment screw
to Step 7.
C H E C K The tension is changed about 1.5N by turning the adjusting screw

P O IN T for a quarter turn.

4.10.2 APG Function Check

EXECUTION MODE
Mark on the top
Normal mode
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following part in advance. --

2. Turn the printer ON.
3. Start the Service Program and select APG function check.
4. Click [Run].
APG cam
The APG mechanism will move.
Figure 4-20. Checking the APG cam

6. Since the APG is not switched correctly, execute the following remedy responding
to the symptom.
Symptom Remedy
The CR UNIT does not move to the APG Since the CR UNIT may not move smoothly,
switch position (home position). lubricate the CR UNIT. (P. 393)
Since the APG Motor may not operate, check the
The CR UNIT moves to the APG switch
wiring of the APG Motor. If there is no trouble
position but the APG mechanism does not
for the wiring, replace the APG Motor (APG
operate.
unit). (P. 193)
Since the APG mechanism on the CR UNIT may
The APG mechanism operates but the APG
not have been installed correctly, replace the CR
is not switched correctly.
UNIT. (P. 207)
After taking the above measure, return to Step 4 to check again.

Figure 4-19. [APG function check] Screen
7. Click [Finish].
5. Check that the mark on the top of the APG cam is "--". Run the check two times
and check the mark. 8. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
 “--” is on the top: Go to Step 7

 “--” is not on the top: Go to Step 6

4.10.3 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Auto Adjustment

PAPER USED
 Type: Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)

 Size: 16 inches or longer
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Load the paper into the printer.
3. Start the Service Program and select Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto
Adjustment. Figure 4-21. [Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto Adjustment] Screen
4. Click [Run].
The adjustment pattern will be printed.
5. The printed pattern is scanned by the IM SENSOR and the adjustment is made
automatically. If the adjustment failed, clean the IM SENSOR or replace it.
6. Click [Finish].
DS:<-1> Dm:<2> Dm’ :<-8> A/D:<203> D/A:<71>
0 5
Check1 = OK, Check2 = OK

Figure 4-22. Adjustment Pattern

4.10.4 CR Scale Check 4. Since the CR SCALE is not scanned correctly, clean the scale using ethanol. If the
scale still cannot be read properly, replace the CR ENCODER (P. 187) or the CR
EXECUTION MODE SCALE (P. 182). After replacing the part, return to Step 3 and check again.
5. Click [Finish].
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select CR Scale Check.
3. Click [Run].
The CR UNIT moves left and right five times, and then the CR ENCODER starts CR ENCODER
to read the scale. CR SCALE
 The result is OK: Go to Step 5

 The result is NG: Go to Step 4
Figure 4-24. CR Encoder and Scale Check
Figure 4-23. [CR Scale Check] Screen

4.10.5 CR Active Damper Auto Adjustment

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

3. Start the Service Program and select CR Active Damper Adjustment
(Automatic).
4. Click [Run] to execute the calibration of the CR active damper.
5. If a completion message appears, press [OK].
6. Click [Finish].
7. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment. Figure 4-25. [CR Active Damper Adjustment] Screen

4.10.6 Auto Uni-D Adjustment

PAPER USED

 Size:
 SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series: 44 inches
 SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series: 36 inches
 SC-T3200 series: 24 inches
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE
Figure 4-26. [Auto Uni-d adjustment] Screen
3. Start the Service Program and select Auto Uni-d adjustment.
4. Click [Run].
5. After the pattern is printed, the printer will automatically scan the pattern and carry
out the adjustment (no manual adjustment is needed).
6. Click [Finish].

4.10.7 Auto Bi-D Adjustment, acceleration/deceleration

print correction
PAPER USED

 Size: The maximum paper width which can be set
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

Figure 4-28. [Auto Bi-D Adjustment] Screen
3. Start the Service Program and select Auto Bi-D adjustment, acceleration and
deceleration correction.
4. Select All rows adjust or 5 rows adjust and click [Run].
C H E C K  All rows adjust

P O IN T "All rows adjustment" results high accuracy adjustment, but it
takes a long time.
 5 rows adjust
Adjustment accuracy becomes slightly lower with "5 rows
adjustment" since colors used for this adjustment are limited;
Figure 4-29. Adjustment Pattern (all rows)
however, the adjustment time can be shorten.
6. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-30. Adjustment Pattern (5 rows)

4.10.8 PW + T&B&S check and adjustment  Size: A4
4.10.8.1 PW Adjustment STANDARD VALUE
 Top margin: 10 ± 0.4 mm

PAPER USED
 Bottom margin: 14 ± 0.6 mm
 Type: Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper
 Side margin: 10 ± 0.4 mm
 Size: A4
PROCEDURE
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE 3. Start the Service Program and select PW + T&B&S check and adjustment.
1. Turn the printer ON. 4. Click [Print]. The adjustment pattern will be printed.
2. Load the paper into the printer. 5. Measure the distance for the positions shown in Figure 4-31.
3. Start the Service Program and select PW + T&B&S check and adjustment.  Within the standards: Go to Step 9
4. Click [PW Adjustment]. Check the displayed message.  Out of the standards: Go to Step 4
 When the adjustment is complete normally: Go to Step 6

C A U T IO N Make sure to place the adjustment pattern on a flat place to
 Data written in NVRAM and acquired data have mismatch. Please try again.: measure the distances.
Go to Step 4
 Failed adjustment. Check printer condition.: Go to Step 5
5. Since the PW sensor may not be attached properly, attach it again properly. (P.
212) After attachment, check it again performing Step 4. If the same error still
occurs after the recheck, check if the sensor operates properly or not carrying out
Sensor check (P. 377). If any error was found by carrying out Sensor check,
replace the PW sensor.
6. Click [Finish].
4.10.8.2 T&B&S Adjustment
PAPER USED
 Type: Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper

6. Remove paper from the paper cassette, and carry out Step 5 feeding paper from the
rear by hand.
 Within the standards: Go to Step 9
 Out of the standards: Go to Step 7
7. Input the value which was measured in Step 5 and is out of the standards.
8. Click [Write] and return to Step 4.
9. Click [Finish].
Bottom margin (14 ± 0.6 mm)
Paper feed
direction
Side margin Full Side margin Home

side (10 ± 0.4 mm) side (10 ± 0.4 mm)
Top margin (10 ± 0.4mm)

4.10.9 PG Check & Adjustment

Mark on the top
REQUIRED TOOLS
Thickness Gauge
STANDARD VALUE ++
 2.5 go
 2.8 no-go
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE Figure 4-32. APG cam position checking point

2. Turn OFF the printer.
3. Remove the following parts in advance.
4. Unlock the CR UNIT MANUALLY. (P. 116)
5. Check that the mark on the top of the APG cam is "++".

<PG check>  SC-T3200 series
6. Place the thickness gauge on the specified position as follows, and check PG at the
both left and right of the PRINT HEAD. If the result is NG, adjust PG carrying out
Step 7 and the following steps.
C A U T IO N When moving the CR UNIT, make sure to do it by pulling the CR

TIMING BELT.
 SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series When measuring the left side of the Head When measuring the right side of the Head
Figure 4-35. The measurement position for SC-T3200 series
When measuring the left side of the Head When measuring the right side of the Head
Figure 4-33. The measurement position for SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series

 SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series
When measuring the left side of the Head When measuring the right side of the Head
Figure 4-34. The measurement position for SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series

<Adjustment>
PG adjustment
7. Move the CR UNIT to the left end. lever
8. Remove the CR COVER. (P. 154)
9. Remove the following two plate.
Plates
PG adjustment screw
Figure 4-36. Removing the plate

10. Loosen the PG adjustment screws that secure the PG adjustment levers.
11. Move the PG adjustment levers up and down to change the gap (PG).
 If “2.8 no-go” is NG: Lower the lever
 If “2.5 go” is NG: Raise the lever
Figure 4-37. PG Adjustment Levers and PG Adjustment Screws
12. Adjust all the measurement points to become within the standard.
13. Measure all the points again after adjustment to confirm all of them are within the
standard.
14. Attach the removed parts.

4.11 Head Related Checks and Adjustments
4.11.1 Tube Inner Pressure Reduction

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Tube inner pressure reduction.
3. Click [Run]. The pressure inside the ink flow paths will be reduced.
Figure 4-38. [Tube inner pressure reduction] Screen

4. Click [Finish].
ADJUSTMENT Head Related Checks and Adjustments 342

4.11.2 Head ID Input

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE
1. Write down the Head Rank ID (31 digits) that is printed on the ID label on the
PRINT HEAD (on a new PRINT HEAD when replaced with a new one.).
C H E C K
P O IN T
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10
Figure 4-39. [Head ID Input] Screen
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
QR code
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31
2. Assemble the printer.

4. Start the Service Program and select Head ID Input.
5. Enter the 31-digit ID into the edit boxes in the same way as indicated on the label.
(Enter the digits continuously without pressing the Space, Enter, or Tab key.)

6. Click [Write].
7. Click [Finish].
C A U T IO N After clicking [Finish], make sure to turn the printer off. Turning
the printer on again enables the head rank ID setting.
Input
ID label
Figure 4-40. Head rank ID

4.11.3 Nozzle Check

PAPER USED

 Size: 16 inches
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Nozzle Check.
3. Select Nozzle Check Pattern Print or Alignment Check Pattern Print. Figure 4-41. [Nozzle Check] Screen
4. Click [Run].
The nozzle check pattern or alignment check pattern is printed.
5. Examine the patterns for any missing segments, broken lines, or misaligned lines.
6. If any of the above symptoms is observed, run the cleaning and print the pattern
again to see if the problem is solved.
Figure 4-42. Nozzle check pattern

4.11.4 Cleaning
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K Please perform 1 time CL3 and repeatedly CL1 until all nozzles are
P O IN T discharged if PRINT HEAD is replaced.

2. Start the Service Program and select Cleaning.
3. Select the adjustment item that you want to execute and click [Run].
Cleaning is executed.
4. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-43. [Cleaning] Screen

4.11.5 Head Inclination Check & Adjustment (CR

direction)
The following two methods are provided.
 Automatic adjustment: An adjustment pattern is printed and scanned by the IM
SENSOR, and required adjustment level is displayed.
 Manual adjustment: Visually check the printed adjustment pattern, and determine
the required adjustment level.
The way to actually correct the head inclination according to the result obtained by any
of the above methods is the same.
PAPER USED

Figure 4-44. [Head Inclination check & adjustment (CR direction)] Screen
EXECUTION MODE
4. Select [Automatic], and click [Next].
Normal mode 5. Click [Run].
4.11.5.1 Head Inclination Auto Adjustment (CR direction)
6. The printed pattern is scanned by the IM SENSOR and the required adjustment
1. Turn the printer ON. level (how much the adjustment knob should be turned) is displayed when the
2. Load the paper into the printer. adjustment is required.
3. Start the Service Program and select Head inclination check & adjustment (CR 7. Make the adjustment referring to 4.11.5.3 Correcting Head Inclination (CR
direction). direction) (Page 348).
Figure 4-45. Auto adjustment pattern

4.11.5.2 Head Inclination Manual Adjustment (CR direction) 4.11.5.3 Correcting Head Inclination (CR direction)
1. Turn the printer ON. 1. Press the F11 key of the keyboard to unlock the CR UNIT.
2. Load the paper into the printer. 2. Move the CR UNIT to the left end of the printer.
3. Start the Service Program and select Head inclination check & adjustment (CR 3. Remove the CR COVER. (P. 154)
direction).
4. Loosen the three screws (A, B, C) that secure the DAMPER KIT.
4. Select [Manual], and click [Next]. 5. Loosen the three screws (D, E, F) that secure the head holder.
5. Click [Run]. 6. Loosen the screw (G) (Bit No. 1) that secures the adjustment knob.
6. Examine the printed pattern visually. Be careful not to completely remove the screw that secures the
C A U T IO N
7. Make the adjustment referring to 4.11.5.3 Correcting Head Inclination (CR adjustment knob.
direction) (Page 348).
7. Turn the adjustment knob to correct the head inclination. See Figure 4-47 for
OK which direction to move the knob.
Paper feed
direction
NG
NG Adjustment knob
Misalignment within one-dot's width is OK.

Plus direction
Figure 4-46. Judgement
Minus direction
DAMPER KIT
Figure 4-47. Correcting the Head Inclination
8. Tighten the three screws to secure the head holder. Tighten them in the order
shown below. D - E - F

9. Tighten the screw to secure the adjustment knob.

C H E C K  See below, direction of rotation of the adjustment cam
10. Tighten the three screws to secure the DAMPER KIT. (there is no particular order P O IN T
to tighten them.)
11. Attach the CR COVER.
Paper feed When the Cyan line is When the Cyan line is under
12. Print the pattern and see if the inclination is corrected. If not, repeat the procedure direction under the Magenta line, the Magenta line, turn
until the pattern becomes normal. turn clockwise counterclockwise
13. When finished, click [Finish] and turn the printer OFF.  Since the resolution is different depending on the presence or
absence of the distinction mark, it is necessary to change the
amount of rotation of the adjustment cam. If there is distinction
mark, turn twice the adjustment cam compared to normal.
magnification
distinction
mark
1. If there is no distinction mark
When adjustment cam turn 5 to 6 notch, about one dot line will
be moved.
5 to 6 notch
Plus direction
Minus direction

C H E C K 2. If there is distinction mark 4.11.6 Head Slant Check & Adjustment (PF direction)
P O IN T When adjustment cam turn 10 to 12 notch, about one dot line
The following two methods are provided.
will be moved.
10 to 12 notches  Automatic adjustment: An adjustment pattern is printed and scanned by the IM
SENSOR, and required adjustment level is displayed.
 Manual adjustment: Visually check the printed adjustment pattern, and determine
Plus direction
the required adjustment level.
The way to actually correct the head inclination according to the result obtained by any
of the above methods is the same.
Minus direction
PAPER USED

 Size: The maximum paper width which can be set
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode

4.11.6.1 Head Slant Auto Adjustment (PF direction)

3. Start the Service Program and select Head Slant Check & Adjustment (PF
direction).
Figure 4-49. Auto adjustment pattern
Figure 4-48. [Head Slant check & adjustment (PF direction)] screen
4. Select [Automatic], and click [Next].
5. Click [Run].
6. The printed pattern is scanned by the IM SENSOR and the required adjustment
level (how much the adjustment knob should be moved) is displayed.
7. Make the adjustment referring to 4.11.6.3 Correcting Head Slant (PF direction)
(Page 353).

4.11.6.2 Head Slant Manual Adjustment (PF direction)

A C

A=B
3. Start the Service Program and select Head Slant Check & Adjustment (PF C=D OK
direction).
4. Select [Manual], and click [Next]. B D
5. Click [Run]. A C
A=B
6. Examine the printed pattern visually.
See if the gaps between the squares are parallel. If so, no adjustment is required. If C=D OK
not, make the adjustment referring to 4.11.6.3 Correcting Head Slant (PF Paper feed direction It does not matter if the gap widths
direction) (Page 353). (the width of A-B and that of C-D)
B D differ.
A C
A≠B
C≠D NG
B D
A C
A≠B
C≠D NG
B D
Figure 4-50. Judgement

4.11.6.3 Correcting Head Slant (PF direction) 6. Tighten the screw to secure the adjustment knob.
1. Press the F11 key of the keyboard to unlock the CR UNIT. 7. Print the pattern and see if the slant is corrected. If not, repeat the procedure until
normal pattern is printed.
2. Move the CR UNIT to the left end of the printer.
8. When finished, click [Finish] and turn the printer OFF.
3. Remove the CR COVER. (P. 154)
4. Loosen the screw (Bit No. 1) that secures the adjustment knob. Rear Front Rear Front
Print He ead
C A U T IO N Be careful not to completely remove the screw that secures the ad Print H
adjustment knob. Paper feed
Condition of the head
direction
5. Move the adjustment knob to correct the head slant. See Figure 4-51 for which
direction to move the knob. Printed pattern
Adjustment knob
Rear Front Rear Front
Screw
Adjustment knob
Minus direction
Print Head
Print Head
Plus direction
Figure 4-52. Adjustment
Figure 4-51. Correcting the Head Slant

4.12 Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments
4.12.1 Ink eject & pressure reduction

EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K Time required for ejecting ink (all rows): about 15 minutes

P O IN T
Figure 4-53. [Ink eject & pressure reduction] Screen

2. Start the Service Program and select Ink eject & pressure reduction.
3. Select the rows for discharge (All rows / Single row).
4. Remove the ink cartridge of the rows for discharge.
5. Click [Run].
6. When finished, turn the printer OFF.
C A U T IO N Running the Ink eject function one time may not be enough to
prevent ink from leaking when removing the ink tubes. Prepare
paper or cloth to wipe off spilled ink in advance or run the Ink eject
function twice in a row.
ADJUSTMENT Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments 354

4.12.2 Cleaning (Tube Inner Cleaning)

THINGS TO PREPARE
 When cleaning all rows:

 4 maintenance boxes
 5 cleaning cartridges
 When cleaning single row (C/M or Y/Pk)
 2 maintenance boxes
 2 cleaning cartridges
 When cleaning single row (Mk)
 1 maintenance box
 1 cleaning cartridge
Figure 4-54. [Cleaning (Tube Inner Cleaning)] Screen
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Cleaning.
3. Select All rows or Single row and click [Run].
4. Clean the tubes following the on-screen instructions.
5. Click [Finish].
C H E C K This menu ends after filling cleaning fluid. Before the next ink
P O IN T charge, discharge the cleaning fluid by performing 4.12.1 Ink eject
& pressure reduction (Page 354).

4.12.3 Initial Ink Charge

EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
2. Start the Service Program and select Initial ink charge.
3. Insert the ink cartridges into all the ink holders.
4. Select All rows or Single row and click [Run].
5. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-55. [Initial ink charge] Screen

4.13 Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments
4.13.1 PF Belt Tension Check

REQUIRED TOOLS Fixing screws
 Sonic tensimeter U-507

 Any tools to flip the timing belt
STANDARD VALUE
 10 ± 3.5 N
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode PF motor mounting plate
PROCEDURE
Figure 4-56. Softening the PF TIMING BELT
1. Remove the following parts in advance.
 LEFT UPPER COVER (P. 134)
 LEFT LOWER COVER (P. 131)
2. Loosen the two screws that secure the PF motor mounting plate.
3. Move the mounting plate back and forth three times to soften the PF TIMING
BELT.
4. Tighten the two screws to secure the mounting plate.
ADJUSTMENT Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments 357


C A U T IO N  Flip the timing belt as weak as the tensimeter can measure it.
6. Start the Service Program and select PF Belt Tension check.
 Be careful not to let the microphone touch the timing belt when
7. Click [Run]. flipping the belt.
The PF roller rotates 30 revolutions.
11. Measure the belt tension three times, and check if the average is within the
standards.
 Within the standards: Go to Step 12
 Out of the standards: Go to Step 2
Measuring microphone
Figure 4-57. [PF Belt Tension check] Screen

8. Input the following information on the belt into the tensimeter.
 MASS: 1.3 g/m
 WIDTH: 6.0 mm/R
 SPAN: 78 mm
9. Bring the microphone of the tensimeter close to the belt as shown in Figure 4-56.
Figure 4-58. PF Belt Tension Check
C H E C K The distance between the microphone and the belt surface should 12. Click [Finish].
P O IN T be 5 mm or less, but do not let it touch the belt.
10. Click [MEASURE] on the tensimeter, and flip the timing belt with tweezers or a
similar tool.

4.13.2 PC Scale Check 5. After the PF SCALE has rotated 30 revolutions, the check result is displayed.
 The result is OK: Go to Step 7
EXECUTION MODE
 The result is NG: Go to Step 6
Normal mode 6. Since the PF SCALE may be dirty, clean it with ethanol. After cleaning the PF
SCALE, perform Step 4 to run the check again. If the result is still NG, replace the
PROCEDURE PF ENCODER (P. 217) or the PF SCALE (P. 216) and check again.
1. Remove the following part in advance. 7. Click [Finish].
 LEFT UPPER COVER (P. 134) 8. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
 LEFT LOWER COVER (P. 131)

Point to be
2. Turn the printer ON. checked
3. Start the Service Program and select PF Scale Check.

4. Click [Run] to rotate the PF SCALE.
Look at the PF ENCODER and the PF SCALE from straight above, and visually
check that the scale is not in contact with the encoder.
Figure 4-60. PC Scale Check
Figure 4-59. [PF Scale Check] Screen

4.13.3 Media Feed Auto Adjustment

PAPER USED

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K Required time: about 4 minutes

P O IN T
Figure 4-61. [Media Feed Auto Adjustment] Screen

3. Start the Service Program and select Media Feed Auto Adjustment.
4. Click [Run].
6. Click [Finish].

4.13.4 Cut Position Check & Adjustment 5. < Inaccurate cutting check >
Check if the average of the maximum value and the minimum value is within the
REQUIRED TOOLS standards.
 Calibrated Loupe  Within the standards: Go to Step 6

 Out of the standards: Replace the cutter (refer to User's Guide) since the
PAPER USED precision of the cutter is not appropriate. Replace the CUTTER UNIT if not
improved. And then, perform Step 3 again.
 Type: PGPP250
6. < Cut position check and adjustment >
 Size: Check if the average of the maximum value and the minimum value is within the
 SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series: 44 inches standards.
 SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series: 36 inches  Within the standards: Go to Step 9
 SC-T3200 series: 24 inches  Out of the standards: Go to Step 7
7. Input the maximum value and the minimum value from the values measured in
STANDARD VALUE Step 6.
 Inaccurate cutting check: 15 ± 0.3 mm 8. After performing Step 3 and Step 4, go back to Step 6.
 Cut Position Check & Adjustment: 15 ± 0.3 mm 9. Click [Finish].
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Cut position check and adjustment.
3. Click [Print].
4. Measure the distances of three points, Home, Center, and Full shown in Figure
4-64.
Figure 4-63. [Cut position check and adjustment] Screen

Full Center Home
Paper feed
direction

4.13.5 Paper Thickness Sensor Adjustment 8. Insert the adjustment jig of 0.5 from the paper insertion opening and set the jig at
the position shown in Figure 4-65, then press [Paper Set].
REQUIRED TOOLS 9. Check that the control panel displays “00”. When the displayed value is other than
“00”, carry out the adjustment. → Go to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
 P-THICK sensor adjustment jig(0.2*/0.5/0.6)
10. Press [Paper Set], and release the paper presser.
 Paper thickness sensor adjustment jig(0.8)
Note "*": Use the P-THICK sensor adjustment jig (0.2) when measuring the paper thickness of 11. Set the adjustment jig of 0.6 at the position shown in Figure 4-65, then press
1.0 by stacking it with the Paper thickness sensor adjustment jig 0.8. [Paper Set].
12. Check that the control panel displays “10”. When the displayed value is other than
EXECUTION MODE “10”, carry out the adjustment. → Go to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
Serviceman Mode 13. Press [Paper Set], and release the paper presser.
14. Set the adjustment jig of 0.8 at the position shown in Figure 4-65, then press
STANDARD VALUE [Paper Set].
Table 4-11. Standard Value 15. Check that the control panel displays “10”. When the displayed value is other than
Paper presser status Jig type Panel display
Locked N/A 00 16. Press [Paper Set], and release the paper presser.
Locked 0.5 00 17. Insert the adjustment jig of 1.0 (Stack 0.2 jig on 0.8 jig) from the paper insertion
Locked 0.6 10 opening and set the jig at the position shown inFigure 4-65, then press [Paper
Locked 0.8 10 Set].
Locked 1.0 11 18. Check that the control panel displays “11”. When the displayed value is other than
Released N/A 01 “11”, carry out the adjustment. → ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
CHECKING PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following part in advance.

 TOP COVER (P. 117)
2. Attach the control panel (P. 152) with the upper rear cover removed.
4. Select Mecha Adjustment → Paper.
5. Press [Paper Set], and lock the paper presser.
6. Check that the control panel displays “00”. When the displayed value is other than
20. With the paper presser being released, check that the control panel displays “01”.
C H E C K Slide the paper thickness sensor holder forward to raise the value
When the displayed value is other than “01”, carry out the adjustment. → Go to P O IN T and backward it to decrease the value.
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
21. After checking and adjusting, check again all the condition is correct.
3. Secure the screws to fix the paper thickness sensor holder.
Paper thickness sensor holder 2 Paper thickness sensor holder 1
Adjustment jig
Align the right end with the 1st
row of the pressure roller
Align this end with

the stepped end of
the platen.
Screws
Setting direction
Figure 4-65. Setting position of the adjustment jig

Figure 4-66. Adjusting the Positions
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
When the least significant digit of the value differ from the standard value, adjust the
paper thickness sensor holder 2 (left side) position, and when the second digit from the
least significant digit of the value differ from the standard value, adjust the paper
thickness sensor holder (right side) position.
1. Loosen the screws (one each) that secure the paper thickness sensor holder.
2. Slide the paper thickness sensor holder forward and backward checking the panel
display, and hold the position of the paper thickness sensor holder at the
immediate after the position that the panel display is switched.

4.13.6 Rear AD Adjustment

C A U T IO N When the following procedure is conducted, make sure not to
remove the exterior parts to acquire correct AD values.
REQUIRED TOOLS
Standard Sheet (JETRAS JP-D300S)

7. Select Mecha Adjustment → Rear AD and press [OK] when [Enter] Start is
EXECUTION MODE displayed. Check that the triple-digit displayed on the control panel is within the
standard. When Retry AD Adjust is displayed, check that the standard sheet has
Serviceman Mode no abnormality (such as, breaks dirt, and wrinkles), and acquire the AD values
again.
STANDARD VALUE
83 to 129 C A U T IO N When the Retry AD Adjust is displayed again, the PE SENSOR is

broken. Replace the PE SENSOR with a new one and carry out the
PROCEDURE adjustment again.
8. Press [Back] several times to return to the top menu.
2. Select Mecha Adjustment → Rear AD.
10. Remove the standard sheet and turn the printer OFF.
C H E C K The following procedure must be done without the standard sheet.
P O IN T
Standard sheet
Align the right end with the 1st
3. Press [OK] while [Enter] Start is displayed. Confirm that the control panel row of the pressure roller
displays Retry AD Adjust.
4. Press [Back] several times to return to the top menu.
5. Select Rear AD again, and press [Paper Set] to release the paper presser when
Align this end with
[Enter] Start is displayed. the stepped end of
6. Set the standard sheet and press [Paper Set]. the platen.
C A U T IO N Set the standard sheet with its matte surface up. Setting direction
Figure 4-67. Setting Position of the Standard Sheet

4.14 Boards Related Checks and Adjustments
4.14.1 Main Board initial setting

EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode.

Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2. Start the Service Program and select Main Board initial setting.
3. Click [Run].
4. The main board will be initialized.
5. Click [OK].
6. Printer will automatically shut down.
Figure 4-68. [Main Board initial setting] Screen
C A U T IO N If the initialization fails, run this function again.

If still fails, replace main board to a brand-new main board.
ADJUSTMENT Boards Related Checks and Adjustments 366

4.14.2 RTC Check & Adjustment

EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
2. Start the Service Program and select RTC Check &Adjustment.
3. Check the Date and Time displayed, and correct them if necessary.
4. Click [Write] to write RTC to the NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD.
5. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-69. [RTC Check & Adjustment] Screen

4.14.3 MAC Address Input

C A U T IO N Click [Read] once. After waiting two and half minutes until the
network firmware is restarted, follow the procedure below.
EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode (Partially in the Normal Mode)
PROCEDURE
1. Start the printer in the Normal Mode and reset the IP Address from the operation
panel on the printer.
3. Connect the printer to the computer with a USB cable.
4. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing MAC address label
5. Start the Service Program and select MAC Address Input.
Figure 4-71. MAC Address Label

7. Click [Read] once.
The written MAC address is displayed in about two minutes.
Figure 4-70. [MAC Address Input] Screen 8. Check that the address you entered and that displayed on the screen are the same.
6. Enter the MAC address indicated on the MAC address label attached on the rear of 9. Click [Finish].
the printer, and click [Write].

4.14.4 Serial Number & USB ID Check & Adjustment

EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
2. Start the Service Program and select Serial Number & USB ID Check &
Adjustment.
3. Enter a 10-digit serial number of the printer, and click [Write].
The serial number is written to the NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD.
Based on the entered serial number, the USB ID is generated automatically and
recorded on the NVRAM.
4. When you click [Read], the serial number written on the NVRAM is Figure 4-72. [Serial Number & USB ID Check & Adjustment] Screen
automatically read and displayed on the screen.
5. Click [Finish].
C A U T IO N If the printer is turned OFF and back ON after changing the USB
ID, the computer (Windows) detects the USB port as a new port
and automatically copies the printer driver as xxxx (copy x). If you
need to perform another adjustment using this tool, select the
"copy x" driver.

4.14.5 Option HDD/PS Unit S/N information Write to

NVRAM
EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
2. Start the Service Program and select Option HDD/PS Unit S/N information
Write to NVRAM.
3. Click [Run].
The serial number of the Option HDD Unit or Option PS Unit is written to the
NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD.
Figure 4-73. [Option HDD/PS Unit S/N information Write to NVRAM] Screen
4. Click [Finish].

4.14.6 Board Replacement Date & Time Setting

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Main Board Exchange Counter (or Power
Supply Unit Replacement Date & Time setting).
3. Click [Run]. When a confirmation message is displayed, press [OK].
4. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-74. [Main Board Exchange Counter] Screen

4.14.7 Flag for extending life

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Flag for Extend-Life-Correspondence.
3. Refer to "3.4.6 Cutter Mechanism" (p247) and check if the printer has films to
extend the life.
 For the printers without films (w/o Extend-Life-Correspondence):
Choose OFF.
 For the printers with films (w/ Extend-Life-Correspondence):
Choose ON. Figure 4-75. [Flag for Extend-Life Correspondence] Screen
4. Click [Run]. When a confirmation message is displayed, press [OK].

5. Click [Finish].

4.15 Other Printer Checks and Adjustments
4.15.1 Suction Fan Adjustment

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Suction Fan Adjustment.
3. Click [Run]. When the suction fan operates, check its operation sound and also
check if the fan sucks paper placed on the platen.
4. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-76. [Suction Fan Adjustment] Screen
ADJUSTMENT Other Printer Checks and Adjustments 373

4.15.2 Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset

EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset.
3. When initializing the panel setting, run [Initialize all setting] from the control
panel menu.
4. When resetting the user job history, click [Run].
5. Click [Finish].
6. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment. Figure 4-77. [Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset] Screen

4.15.3 Roll Unit Nip Release 5. Turn the printer OFF to Complete the work.
C A U T IO N The roller position goes back to the nipping position when turning
the printer back on. Therefore, make sure to perform this item at
the end of the preparation before long term storage.
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Roll Unit Nip Release.
3. Press the [Run] button to release the 1st Roll and 2nd Roll. Make sure the Release
Roller and Paper Feed Roller are in contact with each other at the paper inlet for
the 1st Roll.
Figure 4-79. [Roll Unit Nip Release] Screen
Release Roller
Paper Feed
Roller
Figure 4-78. Roll Unit Nip Release

4. Click [Finish].

4.15.4 Operation Panel Check (LCD & Buttons) 4.15.4.2 Panel Buttons Operation Check
4.15.4.1 Panel LCD Operation Check EXECUTION MODE
EXECUTION MODE Serviceman Mode
Serviceman Mode PROCEDURE
PROCEDURE 1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing
1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing 2. Select Mecha Adjustment → Panel Check.
3. Press buttons you want to check the functions, and check if the button names you
2. Select Mecha Adjustment → LCD RGB Check.
pressed match the names displayed on the panel.
3. Select one of the three colors at a time and press [Menu]. The LCD is filled with
solid red, green or blue color. Check if there is no missing dots. Check the colors
in the order of red, green, and then blue.
4. To select the next color, press [Pause/Reset] or [Back]. Paper Feed
Pause
Paper Settings Maintenance
LCD RGB Check

Red
Green
Blue
UP
Menu
Right
Back
HEATER
Figure 4-80. Color LCD Display Check
Exits from the menu Down OK
Figure 4-81. Buttons and Their Names Displayed on the Panel

4.15.5 Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment

The measurement adjustment can be made for the following motors individually.
 CR MOTOR
 Pump motor (PUMP CAP UNIT)
 PF MOTOR
 Cutter motor
EXECUTION MODE
Normal mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Motor Measurement & Automatic Figure 4-82. [Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment] Screen
Adjustment of the target motor.
3. Click [Run].
Measurement and adjustment are performed automatically.
4. When finished, click [Finish].
C A U T IO N The adjustment may fail if you touch the printer during

measurement. In such a case, perform the adjustment again. If the
re-adjustment is not complete correctly, replace the motor.

CHAPTER
5
MAINTENANCE

5.1 Overview C A U T IO N  Ensure sufficient work space for servicing.

 Locate the printer on a stable and flat surface.
This chapter provides information on how to maintain the printer in its optimum  When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for
operating condition. cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such
products containing flammable gas is prohibited.
Basically, servicing on the printer should be performed on-site. Be sure to strictly
 Be sure to spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the work space
observe the following precautions when servicing to avoid an accident or injury
before removing any ink-path-related parts or components to
causing the user trouble.
keep the space from being soiled with leaked ink.
 The power switch is installed on the secondary side of the  Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the
W A R N IN G
power circuit, so power is always supplied to the power supply elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily
circuit even when the switch is OFF unless the power cord is damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards
unplugged from the wall power outlet. Unless otherwise stated with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such
(for printing or operation checks), be sure to unplug the power as anti-static wrist straps.
cord from the wall outlet before disassembling or assembling  When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed,
the printer to prevent electric shock and damage to the circuit. take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in
 The Front Sensor provided for detecting open/close status of moving parts such as the fan unit.
the Printer Cover also acts as a safety interlock switch. Never  When the printer needs to be repacked for transportation after
disable the switch function to prevent possible injury. being used, make sure to follow the steps below after turning
 A lithium battery is mounted on the Main Board (control the power OFF.
circuit) for memory backup. Be sure to observe the following • Check that the Printhead is capped properly.
precautions when handling the Main Board. • Leave the ink cartridges installed in the printer.
• Be careful not to short the electrode of the battery. • Repack the printer using the packaging box, cushioning
• When replacing the battery, make sure to insert it in correct materials and protective equipment indicated in the
orientation. unpacking guide.
• Never heat the battery or plunge it into the flames.
• Do not put the Main Board directly on conductive materials.
 Be extremely careful not to get the ink into your eye or let it
come into contact with your skin. If it happens, wash out your
eye or skin with water immediately. If any abnormality is
found, contact a physician.
MAINTENANCE Overview 379

5.2 Storing the Printer

When storing the printer, make sure to leave the ink cartridges installed and place it on
a horizontal surface, and also inform the user on the following cautions.
 When not using the printer for a long time
 Turn on the printer at least once a week to let it clean the nozzles and prevent
clogging of the nozzles.
 Remove the media. If the media is left set for a long time, nip impression of
the Press Roller may remain on the media, or the media may ripple.
 Check that the Printhead is capped properly.
 Close all the covers.
 When storing the printer for a long time, evacuate the ink and flush the ink
passage. (See "4.12.2 Cleaning (Tube Inner Cleaning)" (p355).)
 Before using the printer again
Make sure to print a nozzle check pattern and check for clogging of the printhead.
If any clogging can be seen, carry out a head cleaning.
C H E C K After performing the head cleaning a few times, try turning off the
P O IN T printer and leaving it overnight or longer, so that the ink may
dissolve and the clogging might be improved.
MAINTENANCE Storing the Printer 380

5.3 Transportation
C A U T IO N  Do not lift or carry the printer with one person because it is
very heavy. When the printer needs to be moved, make sure to
lift or carry the SC-T3200 series with two people or more, and
the SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series/SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series with
four people or more.
 When lifting the printer, work in a posture that does not
damage your body.
 To prevent the printhead from drying or ink leakage, keep the
ink cartridges installed.
 To keep the printer intact, do not touch any parts other than
those you have to touch.
Lift the printer by holding the positions shown below.
Figure 5-2. Transportation (SC-T3200 series)
Figure 5-1. Transportation (SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series/SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series)
MAINTENANCE Transportation 381

5.4 Exchange Parts

Exchange parts of this printer are as follows.
Note *1: M/C = Maintenance call
S/C = Service call
*2: See Chapter 2 “Troubleshooting” for details of maintenance call and service call.
*3: Reciprocating 400CPS operations, required passes for A1+/20,000 sheets: 720 x 1400 dpi (Plain Paper, CAD / Line Drawing, Fine, Continuity) x safety rate (x 2)
*4: Outward 400CPS/return 500CPS operation, required passes for A0+/20,000 sheets: 720 x 1400 dpi (Plain Paper, CAD / Line Drawing, Fine, Continuity) x safety rate (x 2)
*5: Outward 400CPS/return 500CPS operation, required passes for B0+/20,000 sheets: 720 x 1400 dpi (Plain Paper, CAD / Line Drawing, Fine, Continuity) x safety rate (x 2)
Table 5-1. Exchange Parts
Life
Parts Exchange Timing (call) *1*2
SC-T3200 series SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series
 M/C: None
Print Head The number of fired ink droplets: 6,840,000,000,000
 S/C: None
 M/C (Near end of life): 00000400

Damper Kit Buffer counter: 280,000 times
 S/C: 14C0
The number of paths: approx. The number of paths: approx. The number of paths: approx.  M/C (Near end of life): 00000001
Ink Tube
2,900,000*3 4,100,000*4 5,000,000*5  S/C: 1101
 The number of ink cartridge replacements: 2,700 times  M/C (Near end of life): 00000080, 00001000
IC Holder
 Pump counter: 280,000 times  S/C: 14B0, 1430
 CR MOTOR
 Driven Pulley The number of paths: approx. The number of paths: approx. The number of paths: approx.  M/C: None
 CR UNIT 2,900,000*3 4,100,000*4 5,000,000*5  S/C: None
 CR FFC
 M/C (Near end of life): 00000020

Pump Cap Unit Life counter: 700,000
 S/C: 1412
 M/C: 00000008
RTC Battery 5 years or more
 S/C: None
MAINTENANCE Exchange Parts 382

5.5 Cleaning 5.5.2 Cleaning the Platen

3. Open the Printer Cover.
5.5.1 Cleaning the roller 4. Wipe of the dust or dirt in the direction of the arrow using a soft cloth such as a
1. Turn the printer on and load a roll paper with the specified maximum width. waste cloth. If the dirt persists, damp a soft cloth in water with a little neutral
detergent and wring it out tightly, then wipe the dirt off with it, then dry the platen
2. Press the [Feed/Cut Media] button, then press the [Down] button. with a dry soft cloth.
C H E C K The roll paper will be fed while the [Down] button is pressed. If no
P O IN T smear is attached on the roll paper, it is the end of cleaning, so stop C A U T IO N Do not touch the ink pads.
cleaning the roller.
Ink pad Platen
Figure 5-3. Cleaning the Platen
MAINTENANCE Cleaning 383

5. Using a pointed tool such as a tooth pick, push in the foreign things such as paper 5.5.3 Cleaning the inside of the PLATEN/replacing the
dust stuck in the holes on the Platen. INK PAD
After massive borderless printing is performed, waste ink may flow out on the platen.
In such a case, clean the inside of the platen and replace the ink pad.
Platen
Ink pad
Figure 5-5. Contaminated platen and ink pad

Figure 5-4. Cleaning the Suction Holes on the Platen

5. Remove the 12 screws (three each), and remove the four sub platen. 6. Remove the five platens in the direction of the arrow. (Remove the platen on the
full side first.)
Platen
Sub platen
A A A
Sub platen
Platen
Figure 5-6. Cleaning the inside of the platen (1)
Figure 5-7. Cleaning the inside of the platen (2)

7. Clean the platen base full of waste ink with waste cloths or the like. 9. Make sure to insert the legs of the ink pad into the holes on the platen base, then
install the five platens (install the one on the home side first.)
Platen base
Paten
Leg of the ink pad
Hole
Platen base
Figure 5-8. Cleaning the inside of the platen (3) Figure 5-10. Replacing the ink pad (2)
8. Remove the contaminated ink pad from the platen and replace it with a new one. 10. Install the four sub platen. (refer to Figure 5-6)
11. Install the TOP COVER. (p117)
12. Install the PANEL BOARD. (p152)
Ink pad 13. Install the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p126)
14. Install the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p133)
Platen
Figure 5-9. Replacing the ink pad (1)

5.5.4 How to replace Porous Pads and Cleaning for ASP PARTS
Borderless Printing
 Parts name: POROUS PAD PAPER GUIDE,FRONT;D,ASP
Carry out the following treatment depending on the level of the back smudges.
 Code: 1718503
WORK ITEMS
PREPARATION
Clean the Platen and replace the Porous Pads
1. Wet the cleaning sticks with water, then absorb excess moisture out of the sticks
with dry cloths.
TOOLS
2. Wet the soft cloths with water, then wring out.
 Porous Pads
 Cleaning Sticks
 Nonwoven wipers
 Gloves
Porous Pads
Figure 5-12. Preparation
CLEANING PLATEN
1. Wipe paper dusts, dirt and waste ink on the platen using cleaning sticks. Do not
touch Porous Pads, if you do not replace the Porous Pads.
Nonwoven wipers
Cleaning Sticks Gloves
Figure 5-11. Tools
Figure 5-13. Cleaning platen

REPLACEMENT OF POROUS PADS
1. Remove Porous Pads

1. Hold the Porous Pad with tweezers softly.
Figure 5-16. The platen pulled out the Porous Pad.
Figure 5-14. Removing porous pads

2. Pull out the Porous Pad upward gently.
C A U T IO N Never damage the PF Roller with tweezers.
Figure 5-17. The Porous Pad removed from the platen.
Figure 5-15. Removing porous pads

2. Wipe waste ink using dry soft cloths.

1. Wipe waste ink under the Porous Pad with dry nonwoven fabric wipers.
Figure 5-20. The platen cleaned waste ink.
Figure 5-18. Wiping off waste ink

2. Wipe absorbing ink may flow out onto the adjacent area, the same way as
step1.

3. Wipe waste ink using well-wringed wet cloths.

1. Wipe waste ink under the Porous Pad with well-wringed wet cloths.

step1.

4. Wipe moisture using dry cloths.

1. Wipe waste ink under the Porous Pad with dry cloths.

step1.

5. Attach the Porous Pads.

C A U T IO N  Inserted Porous Pad into the right and left sockets properly.
1. Insert the tip of the Porous Pad into the hole softly.
Not to be inserted the Porous Pad
into the sockets properly.
OK Not good
Figure 5-27. Attaching the Porous Pads  Not float the Porous Pad, not loose in the middle of the Pad.
C H E C K  In case of reusing the Porous pads, carry out the same

P O IN T procedure.
 Do not insert a porous pad to different hole due to each porous
pad is different size.
 Be careful not to bend the tip of the Porous Pad.
2. Insert the Porous Pad into the sockets, both right and left.
Not good Not good Not good
Socket
Figure 5-28. Attaching the Porous Pads

5.6 Lubrication [Lubrication 1]
Part Name CR main shaft

LUBRICATION Lubricants (Part Code) G-84 (1516265)
This section describes necessary lubrication to maintain the functions and performance Amount φ 2 mm x 8 mm x 8 points
of this printer. Make sure to properly lubricate the parts/units specified in this section Lubrication Tool φ 2 mm injector
as necessary when replacing or maintaining them. Lubricate on both ends of the CR main shaft and between the
Lubrication Manner posts, then spread the lubricant entirely with a waste cloth or the
C A U T IO N  Make sure to perform the lubrication following the specified like.
lubrication points, lubricants, and amount. Otherwise, the
printer may not operate normally. Note Be careful not to apply the lubricant beyond the specified point.
 When lubricating the originally installed parts, first wipe off
the old lubricant completely. Lubrication Point
LUBRICATION POINTS LIST
Lubrication
Corresponding Part Name of Lubricant Lubrication Tool Reference
No.
Part name: G-84
1 CR main shaft p.393
Part code: 1516265
Part name: G-84
2 CR sub shaft p.394
Part code: 1516265
Part name: G-84
φ 2 mm injector
OIL PAD HOLDER Part code: 1516265
3 p.394
(RIGHT/LEFT) Part name: O-17
Part code: 1521154 CR main shaft
Part name: G-84
4 CR slider p.395
Part code: 1516265
MR Release Assy Part name: G-26
5 Brush p.395
Guide Part code: 1080614
MAINTENANCE Lubrication 393

[Lubrication 2] [Lubrication 3]
Part Name CR sub shaft Part Name Oil pad holder (Left/Right)
Lubricants (Part Code) G-84 (1516265) 1. G-81 (1574337)
Lubricants (Part Code)
Amount φ 2 mm x 4 mm x 8 points 2. O-17 (1521154)
Lubrication Tool φ 2 mm injector 1. 0.2 g to 0.25 g
Amount
Lubricate on the back of the CR sub shaft at the posts and spread the 2. 0.2 cc
Lubrication Manner
lubricant entirely with a waste cloth or the like. Lubrication Tool φ 2 mm injector
Note Be careful not to apply the lubricant beyond the specified point. Remove the oil pad holder.
Lubrication Manner 1. Apply the lubricant with a syringe.
2. Let the oil soak into the oil pad.
Note Be careful not to apply the lubricant beyond the specified point.
Cross section
CR sub shaft Oil pad holder
Post
Front Oil pad
Lubrication Point 2
Lubrication Point 1
Lubrication Point

[Lubrication 4] [Lubrication 5]
Part Name CR slider Part Name MR Release Assy Guide

Lubricants (Part Code) G-84 (1516265) Lubricants (Part Code) G-26 (1080614)
Amount φ 2 mm x 7 mm Amount φ 2mm x 15mm
Lubrication Tool φ 2 mm injector Lubrication Tool Brush
On the contact point of the CR slider with the sub shaft, lubricate by Lubricate on the contact point with the Paper Feed Release Roller Cam
Lubrication Manner Lubrication Manner
filling the lubricant into the groove. and spread the grease with a brush.
Note Be careful not to apply lubricant beyond the specified point. Note Be careful not to apply lubricant beyond the specified point.
CR slider
MR Release
Assy Guide
Lubrication Point
Lubrication Point

CHAPTER
6
APPENDIX

6.1 Block Wiring Diagram

6.1.1 Main Body
㪠㪤㩷㪧㪮㩷㪚㪩㩷㪧㪘㪥㪜㪣㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫
㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㪜㪥㪚㪦㪛㪜㪩㪧㪞㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㩷
㪧㪥㪣㪶㪙㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛㪧㪜㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩䋨㪫㪟㪠㪚㪢㪥㪜㪪㪪㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩䋩
㪚㪥㪋㪣㪚㪛
㪊㪩㪜㪘㪩㩷㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪋㪊㪌㪊㪈㪈
㪊㪚㪥㪉㪈㫊㫋㩷㪧㪧㪢㩷㪩㪜㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷
㪣㪜㪝㪫㩷㪩㪦㪣㪣㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㩷㪉㪚㪥㪈㪚㪥㪊㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㩷㪘
㪦㪧㪜㪥㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㪚㪥㪈㪇㪈㪚㪥㪈㪇㪊㪚㪥㪈㪇㪉㪚㪥㪈㪇㪋㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫㩷㪟㪜㪘㪛
㪧㪘㪥㪜㪣㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪇㪈㫊㫋㩷㪧㪧㪢㩷㪩㪜㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷
㪉㫅㪻㩷㪘㪫㪚㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩㪪㪬㪙㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛㪋㪇㪚㪥㪈㪚㪥㪋㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㩷㪙
㪍㪚㪥㪉㪉㪈㪉
㪧㪜㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩䋨㪩㪦㪣㪣㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩䋩
㪉㫅㪻㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪝㪜㪜㪛㩷㪚㪥㪌㪈
㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩㪍㪚㪥㪊㪘㪚㪶㪠㪥㪚㪥㪈
㪚㪩㩷㪟㪧㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪧㪪㪟㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪉㫅㪻㩷㪧㪧㪢㩷㪩㪜㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪊
㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩㪚㪥㪋㪚㪥㪈㪎㪈㪉㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪫㪟㪠㪚㪢㪥㪜㪪㪪㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪍
㪘㪫㪚㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩㪚㪥㪈㪇㪉㪋㪇
㪚㪥㪉㪈
㪈㪌㪚㪥㪋㪇㪇㪚㪥㪈㪍㪈㪍㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪫㪟㪠㪚㪢㪥㪜㪪㪪㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪩㪠㪞㪟㪫㩷㪩㪦㪣㪣㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㩷
㪦㪧㪜㪥㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㪉㪚㪥㪌㪚㪥㪈㪇㪈㪋㪇
㪘㪧㪞㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩㪚㪬㪫㪫㪜㪩㩷㪟㪦㪤㪜㩷㪧㪦㪪㪠㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷
㪪㪬㪙㪄㪚㩷㪚㪥㪈㪊㪉㪈㪚㪥㪊㪇㪇㪍
㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛㪚㪥㪈㪇㪇
㪈㫊㫋㩷㪧㪧㪢㩷㪩㪜㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪋㪇
㪉㫅㪻㩷㪧㪧㪢㩷㪩㪜㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪊㪚㪥㪍㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩㪚㪥㪈㪋㪊㪋
㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㩷㪙㪊㪇㪚㪥㪊㪇㪈㪧㪬㪤㪧㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪈㫊㫋㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪚㪥㪈㪐㪊
㪉㫅㪻㩷㪧㪝㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㪊㪚㪥㪎㪝㪜㪜㪛㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩㪤㪘㪠㪥㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛㪚㪥㪈㪌
㪉㪋㪚㪥㪉㪌㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㪬㪩㪜㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪉㫅㪻㩷㪧㪧㪢㩷㪩㪜㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷㪚㪥㪉㪇㪊
㪊㪚㪥㪏㪉
㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㩷㪘㪉㪚㪥㪉㪋
㪉㫅㪻㩷㪩㪦㪣㪣㩷㪣㪦㪚㪢㩷
㪛㪜㪫㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㪊㪚㪥㪐㪊㪚㪥㪉㪊㪚㪥㪉㪉㪊
㪉㫅㪻㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪘㪻㫆㪹㪼㩷㪧㫆㫊㫋㪪㪺㫉㫀㫇㫋㩷㪊㩷
㪊㪚㪥㪈㪈㪜㫏㫇㪸㫅㫊㫀㫆㫅㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㪍㪚㪥㪈㪠㪥㪢㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪛㪜㪫㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㩷
㪚㪥㪌㪇㪇㪟㪛㪛㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋
㪊㪋㪚㪥㪐㩷
㪈㪍
㩿㪜㫋㪿㪼㫉㫅㪼㫋㪀
㪬㪪㪙㩷㪠㪆㪝㪊㪚㪥㪉㪐㩷
㪚㪥㪍㩷㩿㪬㪪㪙㩷㪙㪀㪊㪍㪊㪍㪚㪥㪌㪇㪇
㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪊㪋
㪚㪥㪎㩷㩿㪬㪪㪙㩷㪘㪀㪚㪥㪍㪇㪇㪚㪥㪍㪇㪈㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㩷㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩㩷
㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪩㩷㪮㪘㪪㪫㪜㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩㩷
㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㪬㪩㪜㩷㪧㪬㪤㪧㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪚㪪㪠㪚㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪘㪚㪫㩷㪤㪦㪛㪬㪣㪜
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㩷㪧㪦㪪㪠㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷
㪟㪛㪛㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪪㪬㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪝㪘㪥㪧㪮㩷㪝㪘㪥
㪝㪘㪥㪙㪦㪯㩷㪝㪘㪥
㪊㪇㪚㪩㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪚㪪㪠㪚㪍
㪪㪬㪙㪄㪙㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪚㪥㪊㪇㪈㪚㪥㪊㪇㪇㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪣㪦㪚㪢㩷㪪㪮㪠㪫㪚㪟
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪚㪥㪏㪚㪥㪍㪚㪥㪌㪚㪥㪋㪚㪥㪉㪚㪥㪈
㪉㪊㪍㪍㪉
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪠㪥㪢㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㪐㪋
㪙㪦㪯
㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㪬㪩㪜㩷㪧㪝㩷
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪙㪦㪯㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㪬㪩㪜㩷㪚㪬㪫㪫㪜㪩㩷㪧㪝㩷
㪣㩷㪮㪘㪪㪫㪜㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩㪜㪥㪚㪦㪛㪜㪩
㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
APPENDIX Block Wiring Diagram 397

6.1.2 Auto Take-up Reel
LED
㪚㫆㫅㫋㫉㫆㫃㩷㪧㪸㫅㪼㫃
CN2
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪪㫌㫇㫇㫃㫐㩷㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻
CN1
CN17 CN23 CN1

Auto Take-up Encoder
CN11
CN22
㪤㪸㫀㫅㩷㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻 Auto Take-up Motor
CN28 CN29
Slack Sensor
APPENDIX Block Wiring Diagram 398

6.2 Connection Diagram （1）
（2）（2）
（3）
（4）
（1）（5）
Cable No. Connection

（3）
1 HEAD FFC MAIN BOARD (CN101/CN102)
Cable No. Connection 2 CR FFC MAIN BOARD (CN100)
1 INTERLOCK SWITCH MAIN BOARD (CN20) 3 CR HP SENSOR Relay cable
2 L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR SUB-B BOARD (CN8) MAIN BOARD (CN16)
3 R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR Relay cable 4 APG MOTOR Relay cable
(MAIN BOARD (CN14)) MAIN BOARD (CN15)
5 CR MOTOR MAIN BOARD (CN19)
APPENDIX Connection Diagram 399

（1）
（2）
（3）
（1）
（7）
（4）
（6）
（2）
（5）
（3）（4）
Cable No. Connection Cable No. Connection

1 PW SENSOR SUB BOARD (CN103) 1 BOARD BOX FAN MAIN BOARD (CN24)
2 IM SENSOR SUB BOARD (CN101) 2 HDD FAN MAIN BOARD (CN25)
3 PG SENSOR SUB BOARD (CN104) 3 PSH BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN1)
4 CR ENCODER SUB BOARD (CN102) 4 SUB-C BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN500)
5 PW FAN MAIN BOARD (CN29)
6 SUB-B BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN300)
7 SUB-B BOARD MAIN BOARD (CN301)


1 CSIC CONTACT MODULE MAIN BOARD (CN400)
(IC HOLDER)
（2）
2 PRESSURE MOTOR Relay cable
(IC HOLDER) MAIN BOARD (CN14)
（1） 3 INK LEVEL SENSOR Relay cable
4 PRESSURE PUMP SENSOR Relay cable
（6） 5 MAINTENANCE POSITION Relay cable
SENSOR (PUMP CAP UNIT) MAIN BOARD (CN14)
6 PUMP MOTOR Relay cable
(PUMP CAP UNIT) MAIN BOARD (CN14)
（5）
（4）
（3）

（2）
（3）
（1）
（4）
（5）
（6）

1 PF MOTOR SUB-B BOARD (CN1)
2 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR SUB-B BOARD (CN5)
3 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR SUB-B BOARD (CN6)
4 PF ENCODER SUB-B BOARD (CN2)
5 CUTTER MOTOR SUB-B BOARD (CN4)
6 L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR Relay cable
MAIN BOARD (CN23)


（1）
（2） 1 PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER) Relay cable
(MAIN BOARD (CN17))
（3） 2 PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR Relay cable
(MAIN BOARD (CN16))
3 PE SENSOR (THICKNESS PAPER) MAIN BOARD (CN21)
4 ATC MOTOR Relay cable
（4） MAIN BOARD (CN15)
5 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR Relay cable
6 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Relay cable
7 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B Relay cable
(MAIN BOARD (CN17))
8 REAR COVER SENSOR Relay cable
(MAIN BOARD (CN17))
（7）
9 CUTTER SENSOR Relay cable
(MAIN BOARD (CN16))
10 SUCTION FAN (RIGHT) Relay cable
MAIN BOARD (CN22)
（8）
（9）
（10）


1 2nd ATC MOTOR SUB-C BOARD (CN2)
2 2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SUB-C BOARD (CN9)
SENSOR
3 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A SUB-C BOARD (CN8)
4 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR B SUB-C BOARD (CN6)
（1） 5 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR SUB-C BOARD (CN4)
6 RIGHT ROLL UNIT OPEN SUB-C BOARD (CN5)
SENSOR
7 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR SUB-C BOARD (CN3)
（2）（10）
8 2nd PF SENSOR SUB-C BOARD (CN7)
9 2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR SUB-C BOARD (CN11)
10 LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR SUB-C BOARD (CN1)
（9）
（8）
（7）
（6）
（5）
（3）
（4）

6.3 Panel Menu Map
APPENDIX Panel Menu Map 405

㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㪨㫌㪼㫌㪼㫊㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㪨㫌㪼㫌㪼㪡㫆㪹㩷㪛㪼㫋㪸㫀㫃
User Menu Map 㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㪨㫌㪼㫌㪼*3

㪟㫆㫃㪻㩷㪨㫌㪼㫌㪼*2*3
㪮㪸㫀㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪡㫆㪹㩷㪥㪸㫄㪼㪮㪸㫀㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪡㫆㪹㩷㪥㪸㫄㪼
㪬㫊㪼㫉䋺
㪪㪸㫍㪻㩷㪡㫆㪹㩷㪨㫌㪼㫌㪼 *3 㪟㫆㫃㪻㩷㪨㫌㪼㫌㪼㪜㫊㫋㫀㫄㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪪㫋㪸㫉㫋㩷㪫㫀㫄㪼䋺
: 㪛㪼㪽㪸㫌㫃㫋㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㪡㫆㪹㩷㪣㫆㪾㩷㪪㪿㪼㪼㫋㪜㫊㫋㫀㫄㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㪫㫀㫄㪼䋺
㪭㫀㪼㫎㩷㪟㫆㫃㪻㩷㪨㫌㪼㫌㪼
㪩㪼㫊㫌㫄㪼㩷㪘㫃㫃㩷㪡㩷㫆㪹㫊㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪘㫍㪸㫀㫃㪸㪹㫀㫃㫀㫋㫐䋺
㪪㪸㫍㪼㪻㩷㪡㫆㪹㩷㪨㫌㪼㫌㪼㪭㫀㪼㫎㩷㪟㫆㫃㪻㩷㪨㫌㪼㫌㪼㪡㫆㪹㩷㪛㪼㫋㪸㫀㫃
㪪㫋㫆㫉㪼㪻㩷㪡㫆㪹㩷㪥㪸㫄㪼㪧㪸㫌㫊㪼㪻㩷㪡㫆㪹㩷㪥㪸㫄㪼㪧㪸㫌㫊㪼㪻㩷㪡㫆㪹㩷㪥㪸㫄㪼

㪬㫊㪼㫉㪑
㪡㫆㪹㩷㪛㪼㫋㪸㫀㫃㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪫㫐㫇㪼㪑
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪣㫆㪸㪻㪆㪩㪼㫄㫆㫍㪼㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪪㫋㫆㫉㪼㪻㩷㪡㫆㪹㩷㪥㪸㫄㪼㪪㫆㫌㫉㪺㪼㪑
㪣㫆㪸㪻㪆㪩㪼㫄㫆㫍㪼㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪩㪼㫄㫆㫍㪼㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪬㫊㪼㫉㪑㪪㫀㫑㪼㪑
㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪫㫐㫇㪼㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉 *2
㪣㪼㫅㪾㫋㪿㪑㪩㪼㪸㫊㫆㫅㩷㪝㫆㫉㩷㪟㫆㫃㪻㪑
㪚㫌㫊㫋㫆㫄㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪈*1
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪣㫀㫊㫋㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪉 *1 㪧㪸㪾㪼㫊㪑
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪫㫐㫇㪼㪑
㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪩㪼㫄㪸㫀㫅㫀㫅㪾㪚㫌㫋㩷㪪㪿㪼㪼㫋㩷㩿㫌㫇㩷㫋㫆㩷㪇㪅㪏㩷㫄㫄㩷㫋㪿㫀㪺㫂㪀
㪧㫆㫊㫋㪼㫉㩷㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻㪚㫆㫇㫀㪼㫊㪑
㪩㪼㫄㪸㫀㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㪘㫃㪼㫉㫋
㪪㫆㫌㫉㪺㪼㪑
㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪫㫐㫇㪼㪪㫀㫑㪼㪑
㪧㫃㪸㫀㫅㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪜㫊㫋㫀㫄㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㪫㫀㫄㪼㪑
㪧㪿㫆㫋㫆㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪤㪸㫋㫋㪼㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪝㪼㪼㪻㩷㪘㪻㫁㫌㫊㫋
㪦㫋㪿㪼㫉㫊
㪧㪸㫋㫋㪼㫉㫅
㪚㫌㫊㫋㫆㫄㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪭㪸㫃㫌㪼
㪚㫌㫊㫋㫆㫄㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㪩㪼㪽㪼㫉㪼㫅㪺㪼㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪪㫌㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㪩㪼㪽㪼㫉㪼㫅㪺㪼㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪧㫃㪸㫀㫅㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪄㪋㩷㫋㫆㩷㪇
㪧㫃㪸㫋㪼㫅㩷㪞㪸㫇㪧㪿㫆㫋㫆㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪛㪼㫋㪼㪺㫋㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪫㪿㫀㪺㫂㫅㪼㫊㫊㪤㪸㫋㫋㪼㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪫㪼㫅㫊㫀㫆㫅
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪝㪼㪼㪻㩷㪘㪻㫁㫌㫊㫋㪦㫋㪿㪼㫉㫊㪥㫆㫉㫄㪸㫃
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪪㫌㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㪥㫆㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻
㪟㫀㪾㪿
㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪫㪼㫅㫊㫀㫆㫅
㪜㫏㫋㫉㪸㩷㪟㫀㪾㪿
㪩㪼㫄㫆㫍㪼㩷㪪㫂㪼㫎㪧㫃㪸㫋㪼㫅㩷㪞㪸㫇
㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪥㪸㫄㪼㪥㪸㫉㫉㫆㫎
㪩㪼㫄㫆㫍㪼㩷㪪㫂㪼㫎
㪩㪼㫊㫋㫆㫉㪼㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻
㪦㪥
㪮㫀㪻㪼㪦㪝㪝
㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪩㪼㫄㪸㫀㫅㫀㫅㪾㪮㫀㪻㪼㫉
㪦㪥
㪩㪼㫊㫋㫆㫉㪼㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊
㪦㪝㪝
㪰㪼㫊
㪫㪦㪧㩷㪤㪜㪥㪬㪥㫆
㪩㪼㫄㪸㫀㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㪘㫃㪼㫉㫋
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㪨㫌㪼㫌㪼㫊
㪈䌾㪈㪌㫄
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪤㪸㫀㫅㫋㪼㫅㪸㫅㪺㪼
㪤㪸㫀㫅㫋㪼㫅㪸㫅㪺㪼㪟㪼㪸㪻㩷㪘㫃㫀㪾㫅㫄㪼㫅㫋㪚㫌㫋㫋㪼㫉㩷㪤㪸㫀㫅㫋㪼㫅㪸㫅㪺㪼㪘㪻㫁㫌㫊㫋㩷㪚㫌㫋㩷㪧㫆㫊㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
㪥㫆㫑㫑㫃㪼㩷㪚㪿㪼㪺㫂㪘㫌㫋㫆㩷㩿㪬㫅㫀㪄㪛㪀㪘㪻㫁㫌㫊㫋㩷㪚㫌㫋㩷㪧㫆㫊㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅㪄㪊㩷㫋㫆㩷㪊㫄
㪜㫅㫃㪸㫉㪾㪼㪻㩷㪚㫆㫇㫐
㪟㪼㪸㪻㩷㪚㫃㪼㪸㫅㫀㫅㪾㪘㫌㫋㫆㩷㩿㪙㫀㪄㪛㪀㪩㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㪼㩷㪚㫌㫋㫋㪼㫉
㪣㪸㫉㪾㪼㩷㪚㫆㫇㫐㩷㪆㩷㪣㪸㫉㪾㪼㩷㪪㪺㪸㫅
㪟㪼㪸㪻㩷㪘㫃㫀㪾㫅㫄㪼㫅㫋㪤㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃㩷㩿㪬㫅㫀㪄㪛㪀
㪚㫌㫋㫋㪼㫉㩷㪤㪸㫀㫅㫋㪼㫅㪸㫅㪺㪼㪤㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃㩷㩿㪙㫀㪄㪛㪀
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㪘㫌㫋㫆㩷㪚㫌㫋

㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㪘㫌㫋㫆㩷㪚㫌㫋㪦㪥
㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇 *4 㪘㪻㫍㪸㫅㪺㪼㪻㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㪚㫌㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪤㫆㪻㪼㪦㪝㪝
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㪟㪧㪄㪞㪣㪆㪉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㪩㪼㪽㫉㪼㫊㪿㩷㪤㪸㫉㪾㫀㫅
㪥㪼㫋㫎㫆㫉㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㪩㪼㫊㫋㫆㫉㪼㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㪧㪸㪾㪼㩷㪣㫀㫅㪼㪚㫌㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪤㫆㪻㪼
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪤㪸㫉㪾㫀㫅㪥㫆㫉㫄㪸㫃
㪧㫉㪼㪽㪼㫉㪼㫅㪺㪼㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪜㫅㪻㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪪㫀㫃㪼㫅㫋
㪘㪻㫄㫀㫅㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫆㫉㩷㪤㪼㫅㫌㪘㫌㫋㫆㩷㪣㫆㪸㪻㫀㫅㪾*1
㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪪㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾 *1 㪩㪼㪽㫉㪼㫊㪿㩷㪤㪸㫉㪾㫀㫅
㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪪㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㪚㫆㫅㪻㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅*1 㪦㪥
㪦㪝㪝
㪘㪻㫍㪸㫅㪺㪼㪻㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊
㪧㪸㪾㪼㩷㪣㫀㫅㪼
㪦㪥
㪣㪼㫊㫊㩷㪟㪼㪸㪻㩷㪪㪺㫌㪽㪽㫀㫅㪾
㪦㪝㪝
㪛㫉㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㪫㫀㫄㪼㩷㪧㪼㫉㩷㪧㪸㪾㪼
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼㩷㪚㪿㪼㪺㫂
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪪㫂㪼㫎㩷㪚㪿㪼㪺㫂㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪤㪸㫉㪾㫀㫅
㪪㫋㫆㫉㪼㩷㪟㪼㫃㪻㩷㪡㫆㪹*2 *3 㪥㫆㫉㫄㪸㫃
㪫㫆㫇㪈㪌㫄㫄㪆㪙㫆㫋㫋㫆㫄㪈㪌㫄㫄
㪬㪪㪙㩷㪫㫀㫄㪼㫆㫌㫋
㪫㫆㫇㪊㪌㫄㫄㪆㪙㫆㫋㫋㫆㫄㪈㪌㫄㫄
㪟㪧㪄㪞㪣㪆㪉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㪫㫆㫇㪋㪌㫄㫄㪆㪙㫆㫋㫋㫆㫄㪈㪌㫄㫄
㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐㪊㩷㫄㫄
㪦㫌㫋㫇㫌㫋㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼㪈㪌㩷㫄㫄
㪤㪸㫉㪾㫀㫅
㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪜㫅㪻㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪤㪸㫉㪾㫀㫅㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㫊
㪩㫆㫋㪸㫋㪼㪚㫆㫅㫋㫀㫅㫌㪼
㪤㫀㫉㫉㫆㫉㪪㫋㫆㫇㩷㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㫀㫅㪾
㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㪧㪸㫃㪼㫋㫋㪼㪩㪼㫇㫉㫀㫅㫋 *3
㪛㪼㪽㫀㫅㪼㩷㪧㪸㫃㪼㫋㫋㪼
㪘㫌㫋㫆㩷㪣㫆㪸㪻㫀㫅㪾
㪣㫀㫅㪼㩷㪤㪼㫉㪾㪼
㪦㪥
㪩㪼㫊㪼㫋㩷㪟㪧㪄㪞㪣㪆㪉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊
㪦㪝㪝
㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪪㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾
㪰㪼㫊
㪘㫌㫋㫆
㪥㫆
㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪈
㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪉
㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐
㪪㫇㪼㪼㪻㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪪㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㪚㫆㫅㪻㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪝㫀㫅㪼㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪫㫐㫇㪼
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪣㪼㫅㪾㫋㪿
㪦㫌㫋㫇㫌㫋㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪮㫀㪻㫋㪿
㪘㫌㫋㫆
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㪡㫆㪹㩷㪧㫉㫀㫆㫉㫀㫋㫐 *3
㪘㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊
㪬㪪㪄㪘㪥㪪㪠
㪬㪪㪄㪘㪩㪚㪟
㪙㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㪈㩷㫋㫆㩷㪌
㪧㪿㫆㫋㫆㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊
㪣㪼㫊㫊㩷㪟㪼㪸㪻㩷㪪㪺㫌㪽㪽㫀㫅㪾
㪦㫋㪿㪼㫉㫊
㪦㪥
㪬㫊㪼㫉㩷㪛㪼㪽㫀㫅㪼㪻
㪦㪝㪝
㪤㪸㫉㪾㫀㫅
㪊㫄㫄㪛㫉㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㪫㫀㫄㪼㩷㪧㪼㫉㩷㪧㪸㪾㪼
㪦㪽㪽㩷㫋㫆㩷㪍㪇㩷㫄㫀㫅㫌㫋㪼㫊
㪌㫄㫄
㪤㪸㫉㪾㫀㫅㩷㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㫊㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼㩷㪚㪿㪼㪺㫂
㪦㪥
㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻
㪦㪝㪝
㪘㪻㪻㩷㪤㪸㫉㪾㫀㫅㫊
㪚㫃㫀㫇㩷㪙㫐㩷㪤㪸㫉㪾㫀㫅㫊
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪪㫂㪼㫎㩷㪚㪿㪼㪺㫂
㪦㪥
㪩㫆㫋㪸㫋㪼
㪦㪝㪝
㪇㫦
㪐㪇㫦
㪪㫋㫆㫉㪼㩷㪟㪼㫃㪻㩷㪡㫆㪹
㪈㪏㪇㫦
㪦㪥
㪉㪎㪇㫦
㪦㪝㪝
㪤㫀㫉㫉㫆㫉
㪦㪥㪬㪪㪙㩷㪫㫀㫄㪼㫆㫌㫋
㪈㪇㩷㫋㫆㩷㪍㪇㪇㩷㫊㪼㪺㫆㫅㪻㫊
㪦㪝㪝
㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㪧㪸㫃㪼㫋㫋㪼
㪪㫆㪽㫋㫎㪸㫉㪼
㪛㪼㪽㪸㫌㫃㫋
㪧㪸㫃㪼㫋㫋㪼㩷㪘㩷㩷㩷
㪧㪸㫃㪼㫋㫋㪼㩷㪙
㪛㪼㪽㫀㫅㪼㩷㪧㪸㫃㪼㫋㫋㪼
㪧㪸㫃㪼㫋㫋㪼㩷㪘
㪧㪸㫃㪼㫋㫋㪼㩷㪙
㪣㫀㫅㪼㩷㪤㪼㫉㪾㪼
㪦㪥
㪁㪈䋺㪪㪚㪄㪫㪎㪉㪇㪇㪛㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㪆㪪㪚㪄㪫㪌㪉㪇㪇㪛㩷㫊㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪦㪝㪝
㪁㪉䋺㪪㪚㪄㪫㪎㪉㪇㪇㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㪆㪪㪚㪄㪫㪌㪉㪇㪇㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㪆㪪㪚㪄㪫㪊㪉㪇㪇㩷㫊㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪩㪼㫊㪼㫋㩷㪟㪧㪄㪞㪣㪆㪉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊
㪁㪊䋺㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫆㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪸㫃㩷㪿㪸㫉㪻㩷㪻㫀㫊㫂㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㩷㫆㫉㩷㪘㪻㫆㪹㪼㩷㪧㫆㫊㫋㪪㪺㫉㫀㫇㫋㩷㪊㩷㪜㫏㫇㪸㫅㫊㫀㫆㫅㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㩷㪿㪸㫊㩷㪹㪼㪼㫅㩷㪺㫆㫅㫅㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐㪰㪼㫊
㪥㫆
㪁㪋䋺㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫆㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪸㫃㩷㪘㪻㫆㪹㪼㩷㪧㫆㫊㫋㪪㪺㫉㫀㫇㫋㩷㪊㩷㪜㫏㫇㪸㫅㫊㫀㫆㫅㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㩷㪿㪸㫊㩷㪹㪼㪼㫅㩷㪺㫆㫅㫅㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series No.1

㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㪧㪪㪊㩷㪜㫏㫇㪸㫅㫊㫀㫆㫅㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㪭㪼㫉㫊㫀㫆㫅
User Menu Map 㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇

㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㩷*4
㪧㪪㪊㩷㪜㫏㫇㪸㫅㫊㫀㫆㫅㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㪭㪼㫉㫊㫀㫆㫅
㪧㪪㩷㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪪㪿㪼㪼㫋
㪧㫆㫊㫋㪪㪺㫉㫀㫇㫋㩷㫍㪼㫉㫊㫀㫆㫅
㪧㪛㪝㩷㫍㪼㫉㫊㫀㫆㫅
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊
: 㪛㪼㪽㪸㫌㫃㫋㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪥㪼㫋㫎㫆㫉㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㪦㫌㫋㫇㫌㫋㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪝㫀㫉㫄㫎㪸㫉㪼㩷㪭㪼㫉㫊㫀㫆㫅㪦㫌㫋㫇㫌㫋㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㩷㪤㫆㪻㪼
㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㪘㫌㫋㫆
㪧㫉㪼㪽㪼㫉㪼㫅㪺㪼㪛㫆㫋㩷㪚㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪪㪿㫆㫎㩷㪫㫆㫋㪸㫃㩷㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㫊㪘㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊
㪘㪻㫄㫀㫅㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫆㫉㩷㪤㪼㫅㫌㪚㪤㪰㪢㩷㪪㫀㫄㫌㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪪㪿㪼㪼㫋㪬㪪㪄㪘㪥㪪㪠
㪩㪞㪙㩷㪪㫆㫌㫉㪺㪼
㪬㪪㪄㪘㪩㪚㪟
㪩㪼㫅㪻㪼㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㪠㫅㫋㪼㫅㫋
㪙㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊
㪙㫃㪸㪺㫂㩷㪧㫋㩷㪚㫆㫄㫇㪼㫅㫊㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪧㪿㫆㫋㫆㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊
㪘㫌㫋㫆㩷㪩㫆㫋㪸㫋㪼
㪚㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪾㩷㪫㫆㩷㪟㪛㪛㪦㫋㪿㪼㫉㫊
㪬㫊㪼㫉㩷㪛㪼㪽㫀㫅㪼㪻
㪧㪪㩷㪜㫉㫉㫆㫉㩷㪪㪿㪼㪼㫋
㪥㪼㫋㫎㫆㫉㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㪠㪧㩷㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾
㪠㪧㩷㪘㪻㪻㫉㪼㫊㫊㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪘㫌㫋㫆
㪪㫇㪼㪼㪻
㪠㪧㫍㪍㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪧㪸㫅㪼㫃
㪥㫆㫉㫄㪸㫃
㪠㪧㫊㪼㪺㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾
㪝㫀㫅㪼
㪧㪪㪢㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪠㪧㫍㪍㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾
㪠㪜㪜㪜㪏㪇㪉㪅㪈㫏㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪜㫅㪸㪹㫃㪼
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㩷㪤㫆㪻㪼
㪛㫀㫊㪸㪹㫃㪼
㪟㪫㪫㪧㪪㩷㪩㪼㪻㫀㫉㪼㪺㫋㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊㩷㪪㪿㪼㪼㫋㪞㫉㪸㫐㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼
㪠㪧㫊㪼㪺㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾
㪜㫅㪸㪹㫃㪼
㪛㫆㫋㩷㪚㫆㫉㫉㪼㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪛㫀㫊㪸㪹㫃㪼
㪦㪥
㪠㪜㪜㪜㪏㪇㪉㪅㪈㫏㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪦㪝㪝
㪜㫅㪸㪹㫃㪼
㪛㫀㫊㪸㪹㫃㪼㪚㪤㪰㪢㩷㪪㫀㫄㫌㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪪㪮㪦㪧㩷㫍㪉
㪟㪫㪫㪧㪪㩷㪩㪼㪻㫀㫉㪼㪺㫋㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪬㪪㩷㪮㪼㪹㩷㪬㫅㪺㫆㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㫍㪉
㪜㫅㪸㪹㫃㪼㪬㪪㩷㪪㪿㪼㪼㫋㪽㪼㪻㩷㪚㫆㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㫍㪉
㪛㫀㫊㪸㪹㫃㪼㪬㪪㩷㪪㪿㪼㪼㫋㪽㪼㪻㩷㪬㫅㪺㫆㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㫍㪉
㪚㫆㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪞㪩㪘㪚㫆㪣㩷㪉㪇㪇㪍
㪩㪼㫊㫋㫆㫉㪼㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㪪㪮㪦㪧㩷㪞㫉㪸㪻㪼㩷㪊㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪰㪼㫊㪪㪮㪦㪧㩷㪞㫉㪸㪻㪼㩷㪌㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪥㫆㪚㫆㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪝㪦㪞㪩㪘㪉㪎
㪮㪼㪹㩷㪚㫆㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪝㪦㪞㪩㪘㪉㪏
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㪪㫃㪼㪼㫇㩷㪤㫆㪻㪼㪬㫅㪺㫆㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪝㪦㪞㪩㪘㪉㪐
㪪㫃㪼㪼㫇㩷㪤㫆㪻㪼㪌㩷㫋㫆㩷㪉㪈㪇㩷㫄㫀㫅㫌㫋㪼㫊㪚㫆㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪝㪦㪞㪩㪘㪊㪐

㪫㪦㪧㩷㪤㪜㪥㪬
㪜㫌㫉㫆㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼㩷㪚㫆㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㫍㪉
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㪨㫌㪼㫌㪼㫊㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪦㪽㪽㩷㪫㫀㫄㪼㫉
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪦㪽㪽㩷㪫㫀㫄㪼㫉㪜㫌㫉㫆㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼㩷㪬㫅㪺㫆㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㫍㪉
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪩㪼㫊㫋㫆㫉㪼㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊
㪦㪝㪝㪡㪸㫇㪸㫅㪮㪼㪹㪚㫆㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㩿㪘㪻㪀
㪡㪸㫇㪸㫅㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪉㪇㪇㪈㪚㫆㪸㫋㪼㪻
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㪈㩷㫋㫆㩷㪉㪋㩷㪿㫆㫌㫉㫊
㪡㪸㫇㪸㫅㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪉㪇㪇㪈㪬㫅㪺㫆㪸㫋㪼㪻
㪡㪸㫇㪸㫅㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪉㪇㪇㪉㪥㪼㫎㫊㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪣㪸㫉㪾㪼㩷㪚㫆㫇㫐㩷㪆㩷㪣㪸㫉㪾㪼㩷㪪㪺㪸㫅㪩㪼㫊㫋㫆㫉㪼㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊
㪡㪸㫇㪸㫅㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪉㪇㪇㪊㪮㪼㪹㪚㫆㪸㫋㪼
㪰㪼㫊
㪜㪧㪪㪦㪥㪶㪫㪦㪰㪦
㪥㫆
㪜㪧㪪㪦㪥㪶㪛㪠㪚
㪦㪝㪝
㪧㫉㪼㪽㪼㫉㪼㫅㪺㪼㪣㪸㫅㪾㫌㪸㪾㪼
㪩㪞㪙㩷㪪㫆㫌㫉㪺㪼
㪣㪸㫅㪾㫌㪸㪾㪼
㫊㪩㪞㪙
㪬㫅㫀㫋㪑㩷㪣㪼㫅㪾㫋㪿
㪘㪻㫆㪹㪼㩷㪩㪞㪙㩷㩿㪈㪐㪐㪏㪀
㪘㫃㪼㫉㫋㩷㪣㪸㫄㫇㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾
㪘㫇㫇㫃㪼㩷㪩㪞㪙
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪤㪸㫋㪺㪿㩷㪩㪞㪙
㪦㪝㪝
㪩㪼㫅㪻㪼㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㪠㫅㫋㪼㫅㫋
㪘㪹㫊㫆㫃㫌㫋㪼
㪩㪼㫃㪸㫋㫀㫍㪼
㪧㪼㫉㪺㪼㫇㫋㫌㪸㫃
㪪㪸㫋㫌㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪬㫅㫀㫋㪑㩷㪣㪼㫅㪾㫋㪿
㫄㪙㫃㪸㪺㫂㩷㪧㫋㩷㪚㫆㫄㫇㪼㫅㫊㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪽㫋㪆㫀㫅㪦㪥
㪦㪝㪝
㪘㫃㪼㫉㫋㩷㪣㪸㫄㫇㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾
㪦㪥㪘㫌㫋㫆㩷㪩㫆㫋㪸㫋㪼
㪦㪝㪝㪦㪥
㪦㪝㪝
㪘㪻㫄㫀㫅㫀㫊㫋㫉㪸㫋㫆㫉㩷㪤㪼㫅㫌㪦㫇㪼㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㪸㫃㩷㪚㫆㫅㫋㫉㫆㫃
㪚㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㩷㪧㪸㫊㫊㫎㫆㫉㪻㪥㪼㫋㫎㫆㫉㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇㪚㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪾㩷㪫㫆㩷㪟㪛㪛
㪦㫇㪼㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㪸㫃㩷㪚㫆㫅㫋㫉㫆㫃㩷㩷㪦㪥
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪚㫃㪼㪸㫅㫀㫅㪾㪤㪸㫅㪸㪾㪼㩷㪟㪛㪛㪦㪝㪝
㪤㪸㫅㪸㪾㪼㩷㪟㪛㪛*3 㪝㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㩷㪟㪸㫉㪻㩷㪛㫀㫊㫂
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪤㫆㪻㪼㪧㪪㩷㪜㫉㫉㫆㫉㩷㪪㪿㪼㪼㫋
㪛㪸㫋㪼㩷㪘㫅㪻㩷㪫㫀㫄㪼㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪤㫆㪻㪼㪦㪥
㪫㫀㫄㪼㩷㪱㫆㫅㪼㪘㫌㫋㫆㪦㪝㪝
㪩㪼㫊㪼㫋㩷㪧㪪㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊*4 㪧㫆㫊㫋㪪㪺㫉㫀㫇㫋*4
㪩㪼㫊㪼㫋㩷㪘㫃㫃㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㪟㪧㪄㪞㪣㪉㪥㪼㫋㫎㫆㫉㫂㩷㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
㪧㪸㫊㫊㫎㫆㫉㪻㩷㪩㪼㫈㫌㫀㫉㪼㪻
㪛㪸㫋㪼㩷㪘㫅㪻㩷㪫㫀㫄㪼
㪥㫆㩷㪧㪸㫊㫊㫎㫆㫉㪻㩷㪩㪼㫈㫌㫀㫉㪼㪻
㪤㪤㪆㪛㪛㪆㪰㪰㩷㪟㪟㪑㪤㪤
㪝㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㩷㪟㪸㫉㪻㩷㪛㫀㫊㫂
㪩㪼㫊㪼㫋㩷㪧㪪㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊
㪰㪼㫊
㪰㪼㫊
㪥㫆
㪥㫆
㪩㪼㫊㪼㫋㩷㪘㫃㫃㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊
㪰㪼㫊
㪥㫆
㪜㫅㫃㪸㫉㪾㪼㪻㩷㪚㫆㫇㫐㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆㪞㫉㪸㫐㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆㪞㫉㪸㫐㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉
㪘㫌㫋㫆㪞㫉㪸㫐㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼
㪛㪼㫅㫊㫀㫋㫐㪘㫌㫋㫆㪘㫌㫋㫆
㪘㪊㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆㪮㫀㫋㪿㩷㪙㫆㫉㪻㪼㫉
㪙㪋㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆㪙㫆㫉㪻㪼㫉㫃㪼㫊㫊
㪘㪋㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆
㪙㪌㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆㪛㫆㪺㫌㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪘㪌㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆㪘㪊
㪣㪫㪩㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆㪙㪋
㪋㫏㪍㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆㪘㪋
㪙㪌
㪘㪋㪆㪉㪄㪕㪙㪸㫅㫅㪼㫉㩷㩿㪘㫌㫋㫆㪀
㪘㪌
㪣㪫㪩
㪋㫏㪍
㪦㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪛㫆㪺㫌㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪘㪇
㪙㫆㫉㪻㪼㫉㪬㪪㪜
㪙㪈
㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐㪘㪈
㪪㫇㪼㪼㪻㪬㪪㩷㪛
㪝㫀㫅㪼㪙㪉
㪬㪪㩷㪚
㪘㪉
㪛㪼㫅㫊㫀㫋㫐㪘㪇㩷㩿㪉㪪㪿㪼㪼㫋㫊㪀
㪝㫀㫍㪼㩷㫆㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㫊㩷㪽㫉㫆㫄㩷㪣㫀㪾㪿㫋㩷㫋㫆㩷㪛㪸㫉㫂
㪙㫆㫉㪻㪼㫉
㪙㫆㫉㪻㪼㫉㫃㪼㫊㫊
㪁㪈䋺㪪㪚㪄㪫㪎㪉㪇㪇㪛㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㪆㪪㪚㪄㪫㪌㪉㪇㪇㪛㩷㫊㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷
㪁㪉䋺㪪㪚㪄㪫㪎㪉㪇㪇㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㪆㪪㪚㪄㪫㪌㪉㪇㪇㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㪆㪪㪚㪄㪫㪊㪉㪇㪇㩷㫊㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷
㪁㪊䋺㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫆㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪸㫃㩷㪿㪸㫉㪻㩷㪻㫀㫊㫂㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㩷㫆㫉㩷㪘㪻㫆㪹㪼㩷㪧㫆㫊㫋㪪㪺㫉㫀㫇㫋㩷㪊㩷㪜㫏㫇㪸㫅㫊㫀㫆㫅㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㩷㪿㪸㫊㩷㪹㪼㪼㫅㩷㪺㫆㫅㫅㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐

㪜㫅㫃㪸㫉㪾㪼㪻㩷㪚㫆㫇㫐㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆㪞㫉㪸㫐㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼
User Menu Map 㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆㪞㫉㪸㫐㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼

㪘㫌㫋㫆
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉
㪞㫉㪸㫐㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼
: 㪛㪼㪽㪸㫌㫃㫋㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐
㪘㫌㫋㫆㪘㫌㫋㫆
㪛㪼㫅㫊㫀㫋㫐
㪘㪊㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆㪮㫀㫋㪿㩷㪙㫆㫉㪻㪼㫉
㪙㪋㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆㪙㫆㫉㪻㪼㫉㫃㪼㫊㫊
㪘㪋㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆
㪙㪌㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆㪛㫆㪺㫌㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪘㪌㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆㪘㪊
㪣㪫㪩㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆㪙㪋
㪋㫏㪍㪄㪕㪘㫌㫋㫆㪘㪋
㪘㪋㪆㪉㪄㪕㪙㪸㫅㫅㪼㫉㩷㩿㪘㫌㫋㫆㪀㪙㪌
㪘㪌
㪣㪫㪩
㪦㫋㪿㪼㫉㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼㪋㫏㪍
㪛㫆㪺㫌㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪘㪇
㪙㫆㫉㪻㪼㫉
㪬㪪㩷㪜
㪙㪈
㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐㪘㪈
㪪㫇㪼㪼㪻㪬㪪㩷㪛
㪝㫀㫅㪼㪙㪉
㪬㪪㩷㪚
㪛㪼㫅㫊㫀㫋㫐㪘㪉
㪝㫀㫍㪼㩷㫆㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㫊㩷㪽㫉㫆㫄㩷㪣㫀㪾㪿㫋㩷㫋㫆㩷㪛㪸㫉㫂㪘㪇㩷㩿㪉㪪㪿㪼㪼㫋㫊㪀
㪙㫆㫉㪻㪼㫉
㪮㫀㫋㪿㩷㪙㫆㫉㪻㪼㫉
㪙㫆㫉㪻㪼㫉㫃㪼㫊㫊
㪣㪸㫉㪾㪼㩷㪚㫆㫇㫐㩷㪆㩷㪣㪸㫉㪾㪼㩷㪪㪺㪸㫅㪚㫆㫇㫐㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋

㪚㫆㫇㫐㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪈
㪪㪺㪸㫅㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾 *1 㪪㪺㪸㫃㫀㫅㪾㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪉
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆㪞㫉㪸㫐㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼
㪛㫆㪺㫌㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪫㫐㫇㪼㪪㪺㪸㫃㫀㫅㪾㪤㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃
㪮㫀㪻㫋㪿㪤㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃㪉㪌㩷㫋㫆㩷㪋㪇㪇㩼
㪨㫌㪸㫃㫀㫋㫐㪘㫌㫋㫆
㪫㪦㪧㩷㪤㪜㪥㪬
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㪨㫌㪼㫌㪼㫊
㪚㫆㫅㫋㫉㪸㫊㫋㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆㪞㫉㪸㫐㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪙㪸㪺㫂㪾㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉
㪪㪿㪸㫉㫇㫅㪼㫊㫊㪞㫉㪸㫐㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼
㪪㪼㫋㫌㫇
㪛㫆㪺㫌㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪫㫐㫇㪼
㪣㪸㫉㪾㪼㩷㪚㫆㫇㫐㩷㪆㩷㪣㪸㫉㪾㪼㩷㪪㪺㪸㫅
㪫㪼㫏㫋㪆㪣㫀㫅㪼㩷㪛㫉㪸㫎㫀㫅㪾
㪫㫉㪸㪺㫀㫅㪾㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪩㪼㪺㫐㪺㫃㪼㪻㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪙㫃㫌㪼㫇㫉㫀㫅㫋
㪧㫆㫊㫋㪼㫉
㪮㫀㪻㫋㪿㪺㫄
㪘㫌㫋㫆㪉㪇㩷㫋㫆㩷㪐㪇㩷㪺㫄
㪠㪪㪦㩷㪘㪃㩷㪬㪪㪄㪘㪥㪪㪠㪃
㪬㪪㪄㪘㪩㪚㪟㪃㩷㪡㪠㪪㩷㪙㪃㩷㪠㪪㪦㩷㪙㫀㫅㪺㪿
㪺㫄㪏㩷㫋㫆㩷㪊㪍㩷㫀㫅
㫀㫅㪺㪿
㪪㫇㪼㪼㪻
㪝㫀㫅㪼
㪣㪼㫍㪼㫃㩷㪄㪊㩷㫋㫆㩷㪊
㪚㫆㫅㫋㫉㪸㫊㫋
㪪㪿㪸㫉㫇㫅㪼㫊㫊
㪪㪺㪸㫅㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆㪞㫉㪸㫐㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㪆㪞㫉㪸㫐㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉
㪛㫆㪺㫌㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪫㫐㫇㪼㪞㫉㪸㫐㫊㪺㪸㫃㪼
㪮㫀㪻㫋㪿
㪪㪸㫍㪼㩷㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪫㫐㫇㪼㪛㫆㪺㫌㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㪫㫐㫇㪼
㪩㪼㫊㫆㫃㫌㫋㫀㫆㫅㪫㪼㫏㫋㪆㪣㫀㫅㪼㩷㪛㫉㪸㫎㫀㫅㪾
㪝㫀㫃㪼㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼㩷㪚㫆㫄㫇㫉㪼㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪫㫉㪸㪺㫀㫅㪾㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
㪛㪼㫅㫊㫀㫋㫐㪩㪼㪺㫐㪺㫃㪼㪻㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉
䉴䊁䊷䉺䉴䈱⏕⹺
㪚㫆㫅㫋㫉㪸㫊㫋㪙㫃㫌㪼㫇㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷
㪙㪸㪺㫂㪾㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㪧㫆㫊㫋㪼㫉
㪮㫀㪻㫋㪿㪺㫄
㪘㫌㫋㫆㪉㪇㩷㫋㫆㩷㪐㪇㩷㪺㫄
㪠㪪㪦㩷㪘㪃㩷㪬㪪㪄㪘㪥㪪㪠㪃
㪬㪪㪄㪘㪩㪚㪟㪃㩷㪡㪠㪪㩷㪙㪃㩷㪠㪪㪦㩷㪙㫀㫅㪺㪿
㪺㫄㪏㩷㫋㫆㩷㪊㪍㩷㫀㫅
㫀㫅㪺㪿
㪪㪸㫍㪼㩷㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪫㫐㫇㪼
㪡㪧㪜㪞
㪧㪛㪝
㪩㪼㫊㫆㫃㫌㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪛㫀㫉㪼㪺㫋㩷㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㩷㩿㪊㪍㪇㪻㫇㫀㪀
㪉㪇㪇㩷㪻㫇㫀
㪊㪇㪇㩷㪻㫇㫀
㪋㪇㪇㩷㪻㫇㫀
㪍㪇㪇㩷㪻㫇㫀
㪝㫀㫃㪼㩷㪪㫀㫑㪼㩷㪚㫆㫄㫇㫉㪼㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅
㪟㫀㪾㪿
㪥㫆㫉㫄㪸㫃
㪣㫆㫎
㪚㫆㫅㫋㫉㪸㫊㫋
㪁㪈䋺㪪㪚㪄㪫㪎㪉㪇㪇㪛㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㪆㪪㪚㪄㪫㪌㪉㪇㪇㪛㩷㫊㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷
㪁㪉䋺㪪㪚㪄㪫㪎㪉㪇㪇㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㪆㪪㪚㪄㪫㪌㪉㪇㪇㩷㪪㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㪆㪪㪚㪄㪫㪊㪉㪇㪇㩷㫊㪼㫉㫀㪼㫊㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷
㪁㪊䋺㪮㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫆㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪸㫃㩷㪿㪸㫉㪻㩷㪻㫀㫊㫂㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㩷㫆㫉㩷㪘㪻㫆㪹㪼㩷㪧㫆㫊㫋㪪㪺㫉㫀㫇㫋㩷㪊㩷㪜㫏㫇㪸㫅㫊㫀㫆㫅㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㩷㪿㪸㫊㩷㪹㪼㪼㫅㩷㪺㫆㫅㫅㪼㪺㫋㪼㪻㩷㫆㫅㫃㫐

Serviceman Mode Menu Map

: 㪛㪼㪽㪸㫌㫃㫋㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾
Mecha Adjustment RearAD

Paper [Enter] Start
RearAD
CR Un Cap
CR Un Cap
LCD RGB Check
[Enter] Un Cap
Panel Check
SELF TESTING SELF TESTING
Sensor Check
Mecha Adjustment PPK Sensor Check LCD RGB Check
Life WPPK Sensor Check Red
WRoll Pull Out Check Green
Blue
Panel Check
Displays button name
Sensor Check
ILS
PPK Sensor Check

[Enter] Start
WPPK Sensor Check

[Enter] Start
WPPK Pull Out Check

Full
Home
Life CR PG
CR PG PG--
PF H to F Speed PG-
RLS F to H Speed PGtyp
APG Page Size PG+
Cutter Fan PG++
Roll LD Life Count
Roll RLS H to F Speed
WRoll LD 400 CPS
WRoll RLS 500 CPS
PP change
240 CPS
Display Count
F to H Speed
400 CPS
500 CPS
240 CPS
Page Size
0 - 1314 mm
Fan
0 - 200 %
Life Count
0 - 99999999
PF Feed Amount 1
Feed Amount 1 -1000.0 - 1000.0
Feed Speed 1 (0.1 )
Feed Amount 2
Feed Speed 2
Feed Speed 1
Wait
PS1
Fan
Life Count PS2
PS3
PS4
Feed Amount 2
-1000.0 - 1000.0
(0.1 )
Feed Speed 2
PS1
PS2
RLS
PS3
Wait 1
PS4
Wait 2
Life Count
Wait
0.0 - 999.9 sec
Fan
0 - 200 %
Life Count
0 - 99999999
APG PG
PG PGtyp
Wait PG+
Life Count PG++
Wait
Cutter
0.0 - 999.9 sec
Length
Return Length
Wait Life Count
Life Count 0 - 99999999
Roll LD Feed Speed

Feed Amount KS2
Feed Speed KS3
Wait
Life Count Life Count
0 - 99999999
Roll RLS Direction

Direction CW
Wait 1 CCW
Wait 2
0 - 99999999
WRoll LD Feed Speed

Feed Amount WKS2
Feed Speed WKS3
Wait
0 - 99999999
WRoll RLS Direction

Direction CW
Wait 1 CCW
Wait 2
0 - 99999999
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
6.4 Part names used in this manual Table 6-1. Conversion Table
Ref.
Part name used in this manual ASP part name
To make it easier to locate the target part from its part name, this manual uses the part (Ch3 sec.No.)
names different from the ASP part names. The table below shows the conversion of the  COVER,SIDE,RIGHT,UPPE
part names used in this manual and the corresponding ASP part names. RIGHT UPPER COVER R
3.4.2.9
& RIGHT ROLL COVER  CAP,CR,ADJUST
Table 6-1. Conversion Table  COVER,SIDE,ROLL,RIGHT
Ref. RIGHT LOWER COVER COVER,SIDE,RIGHT,LOWER 3.4.2.10
Part name used in this manual ASP part name
(Ch3 sec.No.) RIGHT BASE COVER COVER,BASE,RIGHT 3.4.2.11
 COVER,TOP,BASE,44 LEFT LOWER COVER COVER,SIDE,LEFT,LOWER 3.4.2.12
TOP COVER 3.4.2.1
 COVER,TOP,RIGHT REAR RIGHT LOWER
CAP,COVER,REAR 3.4.2.13
 COVER,FRONT,ASSY,ASP COVER
 COVER,FRONT,SUB,LEFT, UPPER LEFT COVER COVER,TOP,LEFT 3.4.2.14
44
LEFT UPPER COVER &  COVER,SIDE,LEFT,UPPER
 COVER,FRONT,SUB,RIGHT 3.4.2.15
LEFT ROLL COVER  COVER,SIDE,ROLL,LEFT
,44
 COVER,INNER Housing LEFT BASE COVER COVER,BASE,LEFT 3.4.2.16
FRONT COVER 3.4.2.2
 COVER,INNER,LEFT,44,AS FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER,FRONT,LEFT,LOWE
SY,ASP 3.4.2.17
COVER R
 COVER,INNER,RIGHT,44,A
REAR LEFT LOWER
SSY,ASP CAP,COVER,REAR 3.4.2.18
COVER
 COVER,FRONT,RIGHT
 COVER,FRONT,LEFT REAR ROLL COVER
N/A 3.4.2.19
FRAME
Housing PAPER GUIDE LOWER
LOWER PAPER GUIDE 3.4.2.3 CARTRIDGE COVER
ASSY.,ESL,ASP SENSOR ASSY.;C 3.4.2.20
SENSOR
LOWER PAPER GUIDE PAPER GUIDE
3.4.2.4 R WASTE INK COVER
B LOWER,B,ASSY.,ESL,ASP SENSOR ASSY. 3.4.2.21
SENSOR
 HOLDER,IH,ASSY,ASP
IH COVER 3.4.2.5 L WASTE INK COVER
 COVER,IH,ASSY,ASP SENSOR ASSY.;B 3.4.2.22
SENSOR
WASTE INK TANK
COVER,TANK,INK EJECT 3.4.2.6 INTERLOCK SWITCH INTER KOCK,ASSY.,ESL,ASP 3.4.2.23
COVER
MAIN BOARD BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 3.4.3.1
 COVER,PRINTER,SUB,LEF
T,44 SUB BOARD BOARD ASSY.,SUB 3.4.3.2
PRINTER COVER  COVER,PRINTER,SUB,RIG 3.4.2.7 SUB-B BOARD BOARD ASSY.,SUB 3.4.3.3
HT,44 Electric Circuit BOARD ASSY.,POWER
 COVER,PRINTER Components PSH BOARD 3.4.3.4
SUPPLY
UPPER SUPPORT R COVER,TOP,SUPPORT,RIGH
3.4.2.8  PANEL,ASSY.,ESL,ASP
COVER T
PANEL BOARD  HOUSING,PANEL,LOWER, 3.4.3.5
ASSY,ASP
APPENDIX Part names used in this manual 410

Table 6-1. Conversion Table Table 6-1. Conversion Table

Ref. Ref.
Part name used in this manual ASP part name Part name used in this manual ASP part name
(Ch3 sec.No.) (Ch3 sec.No.)
CR COVER COVER,CR 3.4.4.1 PF MOTOR MOTOR ASSY.,PF 3.4.5.1
DAMPER KIT DUCT ASSY.,CR,ASP 3.4.4.2 PF SCALE SCALE,PF,UNIT,ESL,ASP 3.4.5.2
PRINT HEAD PRINT HEAD,IC856V 3.4.4.3 PF ENCODER BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER,PF 3.4.5.3
HEAD FFC HARNESS 3.4.4.4 PF TIMING BELT TIMING BELT,PF 3.4.5.4
CR FFC HARNESS 3.4.4.5 PRESSURE ROLLER N/A 3.4.5.5
CR SCALE SCALE,CR,44;ASP 3.4.4.7 PRESSURE ROLLER
MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB 3.4.5.6
CR ENCODER BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER 3.4.4.8 MOTOR
PRESSURE ROLLER
CR TIMMING BELT TIMING BELT,CR,44 3.4.4.9 PHOTO INTERRUPTER 3.4.5.7
SENSOR
CR MOTOR MOTOR ASSY.,CR 3.4.4.10
ATC MOTOR MOTOR ASSY.,REWIND 3.4.5.8
Carriage Mechanism/ CR HP SENSOR PHOTO INTERRUPTER 3.4.4.11
Ink System PE SENSOR
 MOTOR,APG,ASSY.,ESL,A PHOTO INTERRUPTER 3.4.5.9
(ROLL PAPER)
Mechanism
APG UNIT SP 3.4.4.12
PE SENSOR BOARD
 MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB 3.4.5.10
(THICK PAPER) ASSY.,DETECTOR,PW;B
PG SENSOR PHOTO INTERRUPTER 3.4.4.13 PAPER THICKNESS
PHOTO INTERRUPTER 3.4.5.11
PUMP CAP UNIT PUMP CAP ASSY,ASP 3.4.4.14 SENSOR
IC HOLDER HOLDER ASSY.,IC,ASP 3.4.4.15 Paper Feed PF ROLLER MIDDLE
N/A 3.4.5.12
Mechanism SUPPORT
INK TUBE TUBE,CR,44,ASSY.,ESL,ASP 3.4.4.16
REAR COVER N/A 3.4.5.13
CR UNIT CR,44,ASSY.,ESL,ASP 3.4.4.17
IM SENSOR BOARD ASSY.,INK MARK 3.4.4.18 PAPER GUIDE SENSOR ASSY
REAR COVER SENSOR 3.4.5.14
MR.,ESL,ASP
BOARD
PW SENSOR 3.4.4.19 1st PPK ROLLER ASSY N/A 3.4.5.15
ASSY.,DETECTOR,PW;B
1st PAPER GUIDE N/A 3.4.5.16
1st PAPER FEED
N/A 3.4.5.17
MOTOR
1st PPK RELEASE
N/A 3.4.5.18
MOTOR
1st PPK RELEASE
N/A 3.4.5.19
SENSOR A/B
REAR BOARD PAPER
N/A 3.4.5.20
GUIDE
UPPER 2nd PAPER
N/A 3.4.5.21
GUIDE
LOWER 2nd PAPER
N/A 3.4.5.22
GUIDE
Cutter Mechanism CUTTER UNIT CUTTER,44,ASSY.,ESL,ASP 3.4.6.1

Table 6-1. Conversion Table Table 6-1. Conversion Table

Ref. Ref.
Part name used in this manual ASP part name Part name used in this manual ASP part name
(Ch3 sec.No.) (Ch3 sec.No.)
BOARD BOX FAN N/A 3.4.7.1 2nd PAPER FEED
MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB 3.4.9.11
MOTOR
PW FAN N/A 3.4.7.2
2nd PPK RELEASE
Fan HDD FAN N/A 3.4.7.3 MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB 3.4.9.12
MOTOR
FAN
2nd ATC MOTOR MOTOR ASSY.,REWIND 3.4.9.13
SUCTION FAN ASSY.,ABSORPTION,ASSY., 3.4.7.4
ESL,ASP 2ND,PPK,SENSOR,ASSY
2nd PF SENSOR 3.4.9.14
2nd Roll Unit MR.,ESL,ASP
TAKE-UP REEL
COVER,WINDER,DRIVE 3.4.8.1
COVER 2nd PPK RELEASE
SENSOR A/B
TAKE-UP REEL
DETECTOR,WINDER 3.4.8.2
SENSOR 2nd PAPER
N/A 3.4.9.16
DETECTION SENSOR
TAKE-UP REEL LED INDICATOR,WINDER 3.4.8.3
TAKE-UP REEL 2nd ATC GEAR ASSY N/A 3.4.9.17
SW,WINDER 3.4.8.4
Auto Take-up Reel SWITCH 2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY N/A 3.4.9.18
TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD ASSY.,POWER
3.4.8.5
BOARD SUPPLY
TAKE-UP REEL
MOTOR ASSY.,REWIND 3.4.8.6
MOTOR
TAKE-UP REEL MAIN
BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 3.4.8.7
BOARD
FRONT FRAME N/A 3.4.9.1
REAR FRAME N/A 3.4.9.2
LEFT ROLL UNIT
LEAF SENSOR 3.4.9.3
OPEN SENSOR
RIGHT ROLL UNIT
LEAF SENSOR 3.4.9.4
OPEN SENSOR
2nd ROLL LOCK
DETECTION SENSOR
2nd Roll Unit
LEFT COVER COVER,LEFT,MR
3.4.9.6
LEFT LOWER COVER COVER,LEFT,MR,LOWER
RIGHT COVER COVER,RIGHT,MR
3.4.9.7
RIGHT LOWER COVER COVER,RIGHT,MR,LOWER
RIGHT REAR COVER COVER,RIGHT,MR,SUB 3.4.9.8
2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY N/A 3.4.9.9
SUB-C BOARD BOARD ASSY.,SUB 3.4.9.10

6.5 Exploded Diagram/Parts List

For the exploded diagrams and parts list, refer to Service Parts Information.
APPENDIX Exploded Diagram/Parts List 413

6.6 Status Sheet Table 6-2. Contents of the Status Sheet

Information name Description
The following explains how to read the Status Sheet.
Sheet Print Date The date when the Status sheet is printed
Model Model name
Printer Serial No. Serial No.
Printer Firmware Version Firmware version
Printer Initial Setup Date Printer install date
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Gateway Address Gateway address
<Printer Status Sheet>
1) Printer Status Setting
Page Line Setting of the Page Line
Margin Setting of the Margin
Media Size Check Setting of the Media Size Check
Media Skew Check Setting of the Media Skew Check
Refresh Margin Setting of the Refresh Margin
2) Preference Setting
Language Setting of the Language
Unit: Length Setting of the Unit: Length
Alert Lamp Setting Setting of the Alert Lamp Setting
3) Printer Usage Information
Printer Mechanism Usage Accumulated printed pages
4) Consumable Usage Information
Current Ink Cartridge Info Remaining amounts of ink cartridges and the date when
the cartridges are initially installed.
Current Drain Tank Info Remaining free space of Maintenance Box and the date
when the box is initially installed.
5) Error History
Error Code /Date The error codes of 6 latest errors and their date and time
Figure 6-1. Status Sheet (sample)
of occurrence.
APPENDIX Status Sheet 414


SC-T7200 T5200 T3200 T7200D T5200D Series Rev.E

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SC-T7200 T5200 T3200 T7200D T5200D Series Rev.E

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

Large Format Color Inkjet Printer

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

Copyright © 2022 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

4.15.4.2 Panel Buttons Operation Check ..................................................... 376

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Description 12

 PostScript printing function (option) 1.2 Basic Specifications

*Nozzle set configuration is;

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 13

1.2.2 Electric Specifications 1.2.3 Ink Specifications

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 14

1.3 Printing Specifications

1.3.1 Paper Feed Specifications

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 15

1.3.2 Supported Media

Size Core Take-up*3 Large

406 16 EPSON SC-

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 16

Size Core Take-up*3 Large

420 (A2) --- - EPSON SC-

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 17

Note "*1": SC-T3200 Series not supported

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 18

1.3.2.2 Usable Commercially Available Paper Size ROLL PAPER

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 19

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 20

1.3.3 Printable area Table 1-1. Roll Paper Margin

15m B D CUT SHEET

Note "*1": SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series

Roll Paper Margin Parameter Margin Values

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 21

1.3.4 Borderless Printing Specification Printer driver

Borderless The default printer driver setting is “Borderless”.

Table 1-2. Continuous Stacker

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 22

Table 1-4. Continuous stacker specification

Table 1-5. Single Sheet Stacker specification

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 23

1.4 Hardware Specifications 1.4.2 Installation Room Requirement

1.4.1 Dimensions and Weight

Note 1: When the paper basket is retracted

Figure 1-2. SC-T3200 Series

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 24

Figure 1-3. SC-T7200D/SC-T5200 Series

Figure 1-4. When the Large Format Scanner is installed

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 25

1.4.3 Part Names Table 1-6. Front Side

Note "*": SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series only

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 26

BACK SIDE ROLL 2 UNIT (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D SERIES)

Figure 1-6. Back side

Table 1-7. Back side

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 27

ROLL PAPER ADAPTER

Figure 1-8. Roll paper adapter

Table 1-9. Roll paper adapter

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 28